Alteon OS 22.0.

2

Command Reference

part number: 315393-J, January 2005

4655 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 Phone 1-800-4Nortel http://www.nortelnetworks.com

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Copyright 2005 Nortel Networks, Inc., 4655 Great America Parkway, Santa Clara, California 95054, USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: 315393-J. This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Nortel Networks, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of noninfringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR 2.101 (Oct 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR 12.211- 12.212 (Oct 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995). Nortel Networks, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without notice. Nortel Networks, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Nortel Networks, Inc. The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual property rights of Nortel Networks, Inc.

Alteon OS, Alteon 2424, Alteon 2424-SSL, Alteon 2224, 2216, 2208, 3408, Alteon 180, Alteon 180e,
Alteon 184, Alteon AD3, Alteon AD4, and ACEswitch are trademarks of Nortel Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Cisco® and EtherChannel® are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Check Point® and FireWall-1® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Check Point Software Technologies Ltd. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies. Originated in the U.S.A.

2

315393-J, January 2005

Contents
Preface 15 Who Should Use This Book 15 How This Book Is Organized 15 Related Documentation 16 Typographic Conventions 17 How to Get Help 18 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 19 Connecting to the Switch 20 Establishing a Console Connection 20 Requirements 20 Procedure 20 Establishing a Telnet Connection 21 Using a BOOTP Server 21 Running Telnet 21 Establishing an SSH Connection 22 Running SSH 22 Accessing the Switch 23 CLI Versus Setup 25 Command Line History and Editing 25 Idle Timeout 25 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 27 Using the Setup Utility 27 Information Needed For Setup 27 Starting Setup When You Log In 28 Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually 29 Stopping Setup 29 Restarting Setup 29 Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration 29
3

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Setup Part 2: Port Configuration 31 Setup Part 3: VLANs 34 Setup Part 4: IP Configuration 35 IP Interfaces 35 Default Gateways 36 IP Routing 37 Setup Part 5: Final Steps 38 Optional Setup for SNMP Support 39 Optional Setup for Telnet Support 39 Setting Passwords 40 Changing the Default Administrator Password 40 Changing the Default User Password 42 Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password 44 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 47 The Main Menu 47 Menu Summary 48 Global Commands 49 Command Line History and Editing 51 Command Line Interface Shortcuts 52 Command Stacking 52 Command Abbreviation 52 Tab Completion 52 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 53 Information Menu 53 System Information Menu 55 SNMPv3 System Information Menu 57 SNMPv3 USM User Table Information 58 SNMPv3 View Table Information 59 SNMPv3 Access Table Information 60 SNMPv3 Group Table Information 61 SNMPv3 Community Table Information 61 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information 62 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information 63 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information 64 SNMPv3 Dump Information 65 General System Information 66

4

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Show Last 30 Syslog Messages 67 Saved Syslog Messages 68 Management Port Information 69 SONMP Information 70 System Capacity Information 71 System Information Dump 74 Layer 2 Information Menu 77 Layer 2 FDB Information 78 Show All FDB Information 79 Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database 80 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu 80 LACP Aggregator Information 81 LACP Port Information 82 LACP Dump Information 84 Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information 85 Trunk Group Information 87 VLAN Information 88 Layer2 Dump Information 89 Layer3 Information Menu 90 IP Routing Information 91 Show All IP Route Information 92 Type Parameters 92 Tag Parameters 93 ARP Information Menu 93 Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP 95 Show All ARP Entry Information 95 ARP Address List Information 96 BGP Information Menu 96 BGP Peer information 97 BGP Summary information 97 Dump BGP Information 98 OSPF Information Menu 98 OSPF General Information 100 OSPF Interface Information 100 OSPF Database Information 101 OSPF Information Route Codes 102 OSPF Dump Information 103 IP Information 104

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

5

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

VRRP Information 105 Layer3 Dump Information 107 Layer 4 Information Menu 110 Session Table Information 112 Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications 113 Session dump information in Alteon OS 115 Global SLB Information Menu 117 Show All Layer 4 Information 118 Link Status Information 119 Port Information 120 Bandwidth Management Information 121 BWM IP User Information Menu 122 BWM Contract Information 124 Security Information 126 Software Enabled Keys 127 Information Dump 127 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 129 Statistics Menu 129 Port Statistics Menu 131 Bridging Statistics 132 Ethernet Statistics 133 Interface Statistics 136 Interface Protocol Statistics 138 Link Statistics 139 RMON Statistics 140 Port Dump Statistics 143 Layer 2 Statistics Menu 144 FDB Statistics 145 LACP Statistics 146 Spanning Tree Group Statistics 147 Layer 3 Statistics Menu 148 OSPF Statistics Menu 150 OSPF Global Statistics 151 IP Statistics 155 Route Statistics 157 ARP statistics 159 VRRP Statistics 159

6

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

DNS Statistics 160 ICMP Statistics 161 Interface Statistics 163 TCP Statistics 165 UDP Statistics 167 Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu 167 Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu 170 SP Real Server Statistics 170 SP Filter Statistics 171 SP Maintenance Statistics 172 Global SLB Statistics Menu 174 Real Server Global SLB Statistics 175 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics 175 Global SLB Site Statistics 176 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics 177 Real Server SLB Statistics 179 Per Service Octet Counters 179 Real Server Group Statistics 180 Virtual Server SLB Statistics 181 Filter SLB Statistics 181 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu 182 Layer7 Redirection Statistics 182 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics 183 Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics 184 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics 186 File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu 187 Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics 188 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics 188 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics 189 FTP SLB Statistics Dump 189 RTSP SLB Statistics 190 DNS SLB Statistics 191 WAP SLB Statistics 192 SLB Maintenance Statistics 194 SIP SLB Statistics 196 Clearing the SLB Statistics 196 BWM Statistics Menu 198 BWM Switch Processor Statistics 199

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

7

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu 199 BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics 199 BWM Contract Statistics 200 BWM Contract Rate Statistics 201 BWM History Statistics 203 BWM Maintenance Statistics 204 BWM IP Users Statistics 204 Management Processor Statistics 205 MP Packet Statistics 206 TCP Statistics 208 UCB Statistics 208 MP-Specific SFD Statistics 209 CPU Statistics 209 SP Specific Statistics 210 SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics 211 CPU Statistics 211 Security Statistics 212 DOS Attack Statistics Menu 213 Types of DOS Attacks 214 IP Access Control List Statistics 214 UDP Blast Statistics 215 UDP Blast Dump Statistics 215 UDP Pattern Match Statistics 216 Rate Limiting Statistics 216 Dump Statistics for Security 217 SNMP Statistics 218 NTP Statistics 222 Port Mirroring Statistics Menu 224 Management Port Statistics 224 Dump Statistics 225 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 227 Configuration Menu 227 Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes 228 Viewing Pending Changes 229 Applying Pending Changes 229 Saving the Configuration 229 System Configuration 231

8

Contents

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

System Host Log Configuration 233 Seven Levels of Severity 234 Management Port Configuration Menu 234 Management Port Link Menu 237 SSH Server Configuration Menu 237 RADIUS Server Configuration 239 TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu 240 NTP Server Configuration 242 SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration 243 System SNMP Configuration 244 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu 247 User Security Model Configuration Menu 249 SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu 250 View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu 251 SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu 253 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu 254 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu 255 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu 256 SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu 257 System Health Check Configuration Menu 258 System Access Control Configuration 259 Management Networks Menu 260 User Access Control Menu 261 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu 263 System User ID Configuration Menu 264 Port Configuration 265 Alteon OS 2000 Series 265 Fast Ethernet Ports 265 SFP GBIC Ports 265 Port Link Configuration 267 Alteon OS 3000 Series 269 Port Configuration on Alteon OS 3408 269 Single-Mode ports 270 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu 271 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu 273 Dual-Mode Ports 274 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration 276 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu 277

315393-J, January 2005

Contents

9

2 Command Reference Temporarily Disabling a Port 277 Port Mirroring Menu 278 Port-Mirroring Menu 278 Bandwidth Management Configuration 279 Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration 281 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu 283 Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration 284 Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu 285 Bandwidth Management Current Configuration 286 Layer 2 Configuration Menu 287 Spanning Tree Group Configuration 288 Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration 290 Spanning Tree Port Configuration 291 Trunk Configuration 292 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu 294 LACP Port Configuration Menu 296 VLAN Configuration 297 Layer 3 Configuration Menu 299 IP Interface Configuration 301 Default IP Gateway Configuration 302 Default Gateway Metrics 303 IP Static Route Configuration 304 ARP Configuration Menu 304 ARP Static Configuration Menu 305 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu 306 Local Network Route Caching Definition 306 Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache 307 Network Filter Configuration 308 Route Map Configuration Menu 309 IP Access List Configuration Menu 311 Autonomous System Filter Path 312 Routing Information Protocol Configuration 313 Open Shortest Path First Configuration 315 Area Index Configuration Menu 317 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu 318 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu 319 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu 321 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu 322 10 Contents 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .

2 Command Reference OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu.Alteon OS 22. 323 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu 324 Border Gateway Protocol Configuration 324 BGP Peer Configuration Menu 326 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu 328 BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu 329 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu 330 Domain Name System Configuration Menu 331 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu 332 VRRP Configuration Menu 333 Virtual Router Configuration Menu 334 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration 336 Virtual Router Group Menu 338 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu 340 Virtual Router Group Configuration 341 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration 343 VRRP Interface Configuration 345 VRRP Tracking Configuration 346 Default Gateway Metrics 347 Security Configuration Menu 348 IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu 349 Pattern Matching Menu 350 Port Security Configuration Menu 351 UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu 352 Setup 353 Dump 353 Saving the Active Switch Configuration 354 Restoring the Active Switch Configuration 354 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 355 SLB Configuration 356 Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) 358 Real Server SLB Configuration 358 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration 362 Real server IDS Configuration Menu 363 Real Server Group SLB Configuration 364 SLB Health Check Types 367 Server Load Balancing Metrics 370 315393-J.0. January 2005 Contents 11 .

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .0.2 Command Reference Virtual Server SLB Configuration 372 Virtual Server Service Configuration 375 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration 380 Cookie-Based Persistence 381 SLB Filter Configuration 383 Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters 387 Advanced Filter Configuration 388 802.1p Advanced Menu 391 Advanced Filter TCP Configuration 392 IP Advanced Menu 393 ICMP Message Types 394 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu 395 SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu 397 Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu 398 Port SLB Configuration 399 Global SLB Configuration 401 GSLB Remote Site Configuration 403 GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu 405 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu 406 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu 408 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu 408 Web Cache Redirection Configuration 409 Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu 411 WAP Configuration 412 Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration 413 Peer Switch Configuration 414 Advanced Layer 4 Configuration 415 SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu 418 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu 418 Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu 419 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu 420 Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu 421 Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu 421 Scriptable Health Checks Configuration 423 SNMP Health Check Configuration 425 WAP Health Check Configuration 426 WSP Content Health Check 428 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu 429 12 Contents 315393-J.

January 2005 Contents 13 .0. 439 Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options 439 Operations-Level IP Options 440 Operations-Level BGP Options 440 Activating Optional Software 441 Removing Optional Software 442 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 443 Boot Menu 443 Scheduled Reboot of the Switch 444 Scheduled Reboot Menu 444 Updating the Switch Software Image 444 Downloading New Software to Your Switch 444 Selecting a Software Image to Run 446 Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch 446 Selecting a Configuration Block 447 Resetting the Switch 448 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 449 Maintenance Menu 449 System Maintenance Options 451 Forwarding Database Options 451 ARP Cache Options 452 ARP Entries on a Single Port 453 IP Route Manipulation 454 Debugging Options 455 Uuencode Flash Dump 456 TFTP System Dump Put 456 Clearing Dump Information 457 Panic Command 457 315393-J.2 Command Reference Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu 430 SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu 431 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 433 Operations Menu 433 Operations-Level Port Options 435 Operations-Level SLB Options 436 Real Server Group Operations 437 Global SLB Operations Menu 438 Operations-Level VRRP Options.Alteon OS 22.

2 Command Reference Unscheduled System Dumps 458 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 459 LOG_WARNING 459 LOG_ALERT 460 LOG_CRIT 461 LOG_ERR 461 LOG_NOTICE 467 LOG_INFO 469 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 471 Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 475 Glossary 477 Index 481 14 Contents 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .0.

315393-J. see the Hardware Installation Guide for your particular switch model. and menu shortcuts.” describes how to use the Setup utility for initial switch configuration and how to change the system passwords. the IEEE 802. including a menu map. VLANs. Port Trunking.2 Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Alteon OS software with your Alteon OS. SNMP. “First-Time Configuration. Spanning Tree Protocol. For documentation on installing the switches physically. and more.” provides an overview of the menu system. ports. “Menu Basics. Who Should Use This Book This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in configuring and maintaining a network. Port Mirroring. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet concepts.Preface The Alteon OS 22. global commands. IP addressing.0. “The Configuration Menu. How This Book Is Organized “The Command Line Interface. IP Routing.” shows how to configure switch system parameters. “The Information Menu. and SNMP configuration parameters. “The Statistics Menu.” shows how to view switch performance statistics.” describes how to connect to the switch and access the information and configuration menus.1d Spanning Tree Protocol. January 2005 15 .” shows how to view switch configuration parameters.

“Alteon OS SNMP Agent. “Performing a Serial Download. in the software.0.” shows a listing of syslog messages. “The Maintenance Menu. “Glossary” defines the terminology used throughout the book. 16 Preface 315393-J. Appendix B.0. “Index” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book. and how to troubleshoot it. how to clear it. This document provides a description of new features and caveats and limitations. “Alteon OS Syslog Messages.” describes the use of the primary and alternate switch images. the physical features. Related Documentation Alteon OS 22. Global Server Load Balancing. “The Operations Menu.” lists the Management Interface Bases (MIBs) sup- ported in the switch software. Appendix A. and how to reset the software to factory defaults. January 2005 . Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) Quick Guide (315395-C) Provides a description of the Switch BBI and how to configure and access it on the Switch. 315394-H) Provides application explanations and configuration examples for the Switch.” shows how to directly load a binary software image into the switch for upgrade or maintenance. and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database.” shows how to generate and access a dump of critical switch state information.2 Release Notes (315397-H). Alteon OS 22. Appendix C. and more. “The Boot Options Menu. The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features.0. how to install it. but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily disabling ports).2 Application Guide (Part No. Filtering. how to load a new software image. Alteon Application Switch Hardware Installation Guide (315396-E) Provides a description of the Alteon Application Switch hardware.2 Command Reference “The SLB Configuration Menu.Alteon OS 22.” shows how to use commands which affect switch performance immediately.” shows how to configure Server Load Balancing. if any.

txt file. It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown. January 2005 Preface 17 . AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command examples. or words to be emphasized. Table 1 Typographic Conventions Typeface or Symbol AaBbCc123 Meaning This type is used for names of commands. [ ] Command items shown inside brackets are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands.Alteon OS 22. Main# sys <AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command To establish a Telnet session. special terms. This also shows book titles. It also depicts on-screen computer output and Main# prompts. Read your User’s Guide thoroughly.0. enter: examples as a parameter placeholder. Replace host# telnet <IP address> the indicated text with the appropriate real name or value when using the command.2 Command Reference Typographic Conventions The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book. Do not type the brackets. host# ls [-a] 315393-J. files. and directories used within the text. Do not type the brackets. Example View the readme.

0. Middle East.nortelnetworks. contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers: Technical Solutions Center Europe.nortelnetworks. contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance.2 Command Reference How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller.Alteon OS 22. To locate an ERC for your product or service. refer to the following URL: http://www. When you use an ERC. If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program.html 18 Preface 315393-J. your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service. and Africa Telephone 00800 8008 9009 or +44 (0) 870 907 9009 (800) 4NORTEL or (800) 466-7835 (61) (2) 8870-8800 (800) 810-5000 North America Asia Pacific China Additional information about the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers is available at the following URL: http://www.com/help/contact/erc/index. January 2005 .com/help/contact/global An Express Routing Code (ERC) is available for many Nortel Networks products and services.

and to perform any necessary configuration. you are presented with a hierarchy of menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch.CHAPTER 1 The Command Line Interface Your Alteon Application Switch is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. The extensive Alteon OS switching software included in your switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch: A built-in. require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively. January 2005 19 . This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) to the switch. Using a basic terminal. text-based command line interface and menu system for access via local terminal or remote Telnet session A GUI-based Element Management System (EMS) for interactive network access SNMP support for access through network management software such as HP OpenView Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration. 315393-J. Some of the more advanced features. however.

To establish the connection. you will need the following: An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters shown in the table below: Table 1-1 Console Configuration Parameters Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics). press <Enter> a few times on your terminal. 20 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-J. You will next be required to enter a password for access to the switch. Power on the terminal.0. January 2005 . 3. (For more information. 2.Alteon OS 22. Procedure 1. see “Setting Passwords” on page 40). Connect the terminal to the Console port using the serial cable.2 Command Reference Connecting to the Switch You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways: Using a console connection via the console port Using a Telnet connection over the network Using an SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network Establishing a Console Connection Requirements To establish a console connection with the switch.

Telnet access provides the same options for user access and administrator access as those available through the console port.2 Command Reference Establishing a Telnet Connection A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to the network. The MAC address can be found on a small white label on the back panel of the switch. The MAC address can also be found in the System Information menu (see “System Information” on page 55).0. you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection. The switch can get its IP address in one of two ways: Dynamically. from a BOOTP server on your network Manually. The port must be manually configured with the proper IP address. before you can use these methods of accessing the switch. If you have a BOOTP server on your network. To configure the switch for Telnet access. the Alteon OS software is set up to request its IP address from a BOOTP server. NOTE – If connecting to the management port. The switch must have an IP address. Using a BOOTP Server By default. when you configure the switch IP address (see “Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration” on page 29). To establish a Telnet connection with the switch. Running Telnet Once the IP parameters on the Alteon Application Switch are configured. add the MAC address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server. January 2005 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 21 .Alteon OS 22. NOTE – You need to enable Telnet and SSH. run the Telnet program on your workstation and issue the Telnet command. you need to have a device with Telnet software located on the same network as the switch. using serial connection. followed by the switch IP address: telnet <IP address> You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on page 22. 315393-J. BOOTP is not supported. Refer to “Establishing a Telnet Connection” on page 21.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Establishing an SSH Connection
Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of an Alteon Application Switch via Telnet, this method does not provide a secure connection. The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands remotely. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration, SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure. The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Thus, a SSH/SCP client will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client. Similarly, the system will fail to do the key generation if a SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time. The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below. Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection. Key Exchange: RSA Encryption: 3DES-CBC, DES User Authentication: Local password authentication, Radius The following SSH clients have been tested: SSH 1.2.23 and SSH 1.2.27 for Linux (freeware) SecureCRT 3.0.2 and SecureCRT 3.0.3 (Van Dyke Technologies, Inc.) F-Secure SSH 1.1 for Windows (Data Fellows) NOTE – The Alteon OS implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1.5 and supports SSH-1.5-1.X.XX. SSH clients of other versions (especially Version 2) will not be supported.

Running SSH
Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the Alteon Application Switch, you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection. To establish an SSH connection with the switch, run the SSH program on your workstation by issuing the SSH command, followed by the switch IP address:
>> # ssh <switch IP address>

22

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

or, if SecurID authentication is required, use the following command:
>> # ssh -1 ace <switch IP address>

You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password.

Accessing the Switch
To enable better switch management and user accountability, seven levels or classes of user access have been implemented on the Alteon Application Switch. Levels of access to CLI, Web management functions, and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. Conceptually, access classes are defined as follows: User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the Alteon Application Switch. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications, such as switch statistics and current operational state information. Operators can only effect temporary changes on the Alteon Application Switch. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch, operators cannot severely impact switch operation. Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the Alteon Application Switch. Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well, they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes. Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords. Once you are connected to the switch via local console, Telnet, or SSH, you are prompted to enter a password. The default user names/password for each access level are listed in the following table. NOTE – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. For more information, see “Setting Passwords” on page 40.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

23

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 1-2 User Access Levels
User Account User Description and Tasks Performed The User has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view all switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch. Password user

SLB Operator

The SLB Operator manages Web servers and other Internet ser- slboper vices and their loads. In addition to being able to view all switch information and statistics, the SLB Operator can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing operation menu. The Layer 4 Operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the l4oper shared Internet services. This user currently has the same access level as the SLB operator. and the access level is reserved for future use, to provide access to operational commands for operators managing traffic on the line leading to the shared Internet services. The Operator manages all functions of the switch. In addition to oper SLB Operator functions, the Operator can reset ports or the entire switch. The SLB Administrator configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. In addition to SLB Operator functions, the SLB Administrator can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, with the exception of not being able to configure filters or bandwidth management. The Layer 4 Administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. In addition to SLB Administrator functions, the Layer 4 Administrator can configure all parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, including filters and bandwidth management. The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. slbadmin

Layer 4 Operator

Operator

SLB Administrator

Layer 4 Administrator

l4admin

Administrator

admin

NOTE – With the exception of the “admin” user, access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value. All user levels below “admin” will by default be initially disabled (empty password) until they are enabled by the “admin” user. This prevents inadvertently leaving the switch open to unauthorized users.

24

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

CLI Versus Setup
Once the administrator password is verified, you are given complete access to the switch. If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration, the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup (see Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration”), a utility designed to help you through the first-time configuration process. If the switch has already been configured, the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead. The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges.
[Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit

-

Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command, always available]

NOTE – If you are accessing a user account or Layer 4 administrator account, some menu options will not be available.

Command Line History and Editing
For a description of global commands, shortcuts, and command line editing functions, see “Menu Basics” on page 47.”

Idle Timeout
By default, the switch will disconnect your console or Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter, which can be set from 1 to 10080 minutes. For information on changing this parameter, see “System Configuration” on page 231.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

25

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

26

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface

315393-J, January 2005

CHAPTER 2

First-Time Configuration
To help with the initial process of configuring your switch, the Alteon OS software includes a Setup utility. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords. NOTE – If you are configuring a 2000-SSL Series Switch, you can use the Switch Setup Utility in the Alteon OS 2000-SSL Series Quick Setup Guide (part number 215102-A) instead for setting up the Switch and the SSL Processor. Then return to this guide for configuration and management information on your Switch.

Using the Setup Utility
Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration, you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility. Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login.

Information Needed For Setup
Setup requests the following information: Basic system information Date & time Whether to use BOOTP or not Whether to use Spanning Tree Protocol or not Management port configuration Optional configuration for each port Speed, duplex, flow control, and negotiation mode (as appropriate) Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate)
27

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Optional configuration for each VLAN Name of VLAN Which ports are included in the VLAN Optional configuration of IP parameters IP address, subnet mask, and broadcast address, and VLAN for each IP interface IP addresses for up to four default gateways Destination, subnet mask, and gateway IP address for each IP static route Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not

Starting Setup When You Log In
The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings. 1. Connect to the switch console. After connecting, the login prompt will appear as shown below.
Enter Password:

2.

Enter admin as the default administrator password. If the factory default configuration is detected, the system prompts:
Connected to Alteon Application Switch 2424 18:44:05 Mon April 12, 2004 The switch is booted with factory default configuration. To ease the configuration of the switch, a "Set Up" facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided. Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]:

NOTE – If the default admin login is unsuccessful, or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead, the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings. If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings, see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 447. 3.
28

Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch, or n to bypass the Setup facility.

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually
Stopping Setup
To abort the Setup utility, press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. When you abort Setup, the system will prompt:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]

Enter n to abort Setup, or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning.

Restarting Setup
You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt:
# /cfg/setup

Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration
When Setup is started, the system prompts:
"Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time, BOOTP, Spanning Tree, Management port, Port Speed/Mode, VLANs, and IP interfaces. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] -----------------------------------------------------------Will you be configuring VLANs? [y/n]

1.

Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. Otherwise enter n. If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session, you can configure them later using the configuration menus, or by restarting the Setup facility. For more information on configuring VLANs, see the Alteon OS 22.0.2 Application Guide. Next, the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information.

2.

Enter the year of the current date at the prompt:
System Date: Enter year [2004]:

Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99. “00” is considered 2000. To keep the current year, press <Enter>.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

29

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

3.

Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt:
System Date: Enter month [4]:

Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. To keep the current month, press <Enter>. 4. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt:
Enter day [12]:

Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. To keep the current day, press <Enter>. 5. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt:
System Time: Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]:

Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. To keep the current hour, press <Enter>. 6. Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt:
Enter minutes [55]:

Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current minute, press <Enter>. 7. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt:
Enter seconds [37]:

Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current second, press <Enter>. The system displays the date and time settings:
System clock set to 18:55:36 Mon April 12, 2004.

8.

Enable or disable the use of BOOTP at the prompt:
BootP Option: Current BOOTP usage: Enter new BOOTP usage [d/e]:

disabled

30

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration

315393-J, January 2005

or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on. or skip port configuration at the prompt: Port Config: Enter port number: (1-28) If you wish to change settings for individual ports. 315393-J. before the system will prompt for IP parameters. If desired. a BOOTP server can supply the switch with IP parameters so that you do not have to enter them manually.2 Command Reference If available on your network. some of the prompts and options may be different. default gateway. Enter d to disable the use of BOOTP.0. set up the management port: Management Port Config: Configure management port? [y/n] y If you answer y to configure the management port. or enter e to enable the use of BOOTP. Select the port to configure. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 31 . 9. and other management port options. BOOTP must be disabled however. you will be prompted for IP address. To skip port configuration. subnet mask. Setup Part 2: Port Configuration NOTE – The port configuration options shown in these steps are for the Alteon OS 2424.Alteon OS 22. 1. press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 34. broadcast address. 2. When configuring port options for other switches. enter the number of the port you wish to configure. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt: Spanning Tree: Current Spanning Tree setting: ON Turn Spanning Tree OFF? [y/n] Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree. press <Enter>. To keep the current setting.

the system prompts: Port Mode: Current port 1 mode setting: any Enter new speed ["full"/"half"/"any"] Enter full for full-duplex. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. If appropriate. press <Enter>. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port duplex mode. both to enable both. To keep the current setting. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port autonegotiation mode.2 Command Reference 3. the system prompts: Fast Link Configuration: Port Speed: Current Port 1 speed setting: 10/100 Enter new speed ["10"/"100"/"any"]: Enter the port speed from the options available. press <Enter>. 4. If appropriate. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable autonegotiation. or enter any to have the switch auto-sense the port speed. January 2005 . or none to turn flow control off for the port. 5. off to disable it. To keep the current setting. 32 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. or any to have the switch auto-negotiate. 6. tx for transmit flow control. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port speed. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port flow control. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. the system prompts: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. To keep the current setting. half for half-duplex. press <Enter>. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector.0.Alteon OS 22. If appropriate. If appropriate.

9. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable port autonegotiation. 10. press <Enter>. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector.0. or none to turn flow control off for the port. enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port. off to disable it. both to enable both. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 33 . the system prompts: Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs) Current TAG flag: disabled Enter new TAG status [d/e]: Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port. 315393-J. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. 8. If configuring VLANs. If appropriate. tx for transmit flow control. repeat the steps in this section. press <Enter> without specifying any port.Alteon OS 22. press <Enter>. configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector.2 Command Reference 7. The system prompts you to configure the next port: Enter port number: When you are through configuring ports. configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters. Otherwise. If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1. the system prompts: Gig Link Configuration: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. To keep the current setting. If appropriate. To keep the current setting.

press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35. press <Enter>. enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure. The right angle prompt appears: > For each additional port in the VLAN.2 Command Reference Setup Part 3: VLANs If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 1. 4. 3. January 2005 .0. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. without quotes: Entering a new VLAN name is optional. Enter the VLAN port numbers. 1. 2. skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35. NULL at end: If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs. To skip VLAN configuration. Pending new VLAN name: "VLAN 2" Enter new VLAN name. press <Enter> without specifying any port. NULL at end: Type the first port number to add to the current VLAN and press <Enter>.Alteon OS 22. To use the pending new VLAN name. NULL at end: 34 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. type the port number and press <Enter> to move to the next line. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt: VLAN is newly created. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN. Select the VLAN to configure. or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. Repeat this until all ports for the VLAN being configured are entered. The system prompts you to define the first port in the VLAN: Define ports in VLAN: Current VLAN 2: empty Enter port numbers one per line.

When all VLANs have been configured. enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation: Current subnet mask: Enter new subnet mask: 0.0 315393-J. If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces.0 To keep the current setting. To skip IP interface configuration. and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used).0. enter the number of the IP interface you wish to configure. 3. the system prompts for IP parameters. Otherwise. if you disabled BOOTP.0. press <Enter> without typing an interface number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 36. Select the IP interface to configure. enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 35 . For the specified IP interface. or skip interface configuration at the prompt: IP Config: IP interfaces: Enter interface number: (1-256) NOTE – The total number of interfaces on an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255. Up to 256 IP interfaces can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch.0. IP Interfaces IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs. press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN.0. 1.0. 2. Setup Part 4: IP Configuration If BOOTP was enabled back in Part 1. No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet. press <Enter>. At the prompt. The IP address assigned to each IP interface provides the switch with an IP presence on your network.2 Command Reference Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration. skip to Setup Part 5: Final Steps.Alteon OS 22.

This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1: Current VLAN: Enter new VLAN: 1 Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs. press <Enter> without specifying any interface number. select a default gateway for configuration. At the prompt.2 Command Reference To keep the current setting.0. press <Enter>. To skip default gateway configuration. or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting. 6. At the prompt. 36 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. If configuring VLANs.0 To keep the current setting. 4. or n to leave it disabled: Enable IP interface? [y/n] 7. The system prompts you to configure another interface: Enter interface number: (1-256) Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. Default Gateways 1. or skip default gateway configuration: IP default gateways: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured. press <Enter>. When all interfaces have been configured. At the prompt. January 2005 .0. press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 37. 5.0. enter the broadcast IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current broadcast address: Enter new broadcast address: 0.Alteon OS 22. enter y to enable the IP interface. specify a VLAN for the interface.

0 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation. At the prompt. 3. This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters. where subnets may not have a direct presence on the Alteon Application Switch. press <Enter>.To keep the current setting.Alteon OS 22. To disable IP forwarding. enter n and proceed to Step 2. enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing: Enable IP forwarding? [y/n] Enter y to enable IP forwarding.0. IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch. The system prompts you to configure another default gateway: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured. enable or disable the RIP supply: Enable RIP supply? [y/n] 315393-J. can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically. or press <Enter> without specifying an address to accept the current setting.0. At the prompt. enter the IP address for the selected default gateway: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. At the prompt. or n to leave it disabled: Enable default gateway? [y/n] 4. Routing on more complex networks. When all default gateways have been configured. 2. IP Routing When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch. This eliminates the need to bounce inter-subnet communication off an external router device.2 Command Reference 2.0. 1. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 37 . At the prompt. press <Enter> without specifying any number. enter y to enable the default gateway.

or n to continue. Next. Enter n to return to the Apply the changes? prompt. When prompted. We recommend that you review the changes. If you do not apply or save the changes. or n to continue without applying.2 Command Reference Setup Part 5: Final Steps 1. January 2005 . decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes: Review the changes made? [y/n] Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes.Alteon OS 22. 2. Changes are normally saved at this point. decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt: Apply the changes? [y/n] Enter y to apply the changes. decide whether to restart Setup or continue: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning. the system prompts whether to abort them: Abort all changes? [y/n] Enter y to discard the changes. Enter n to continue without saving the changes. At the prompt. When prompted. it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 40. NOTE – After initial configuration is complete. Changes are normally applied. decide whether to make the changes permanent: Save changes to flash? [y/n] Enter y to save the changes to flash. 5. 38 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J.0. 3. 4.

Perform this procedure only if you are planning on using SNMPbased tools. Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support. 1. Otherwise apply and save after “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” on page 39. NOTE – If you need to configure SNMPv3. 1. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the switch through any telnet application. By default. >> System# apply >> System# save 315393-J. >> System# apply >> System# save Optional Setup for Telnet Support NOTE – This step is optional.Alteon OS 22. Enable telnet. >> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm|wcomm 3. they are public and private respectively. refer to “SNMPv3 Configuration Menu” on page 247 of this manual. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 39 .0. >> # /cfg/sys/access/snmp (disabled/read-only/read-write) [d/r/w]: 2. >> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet ena 2. Enable SNMP and select one of the options. Set SNMP read or write community string. Apply and save SNMP and /or telnet configuration(s).2 Command Reference Optional Setup for SNMP Support NOTE – This step is optional. such as Alteon EMS.

enter n to disable it. RIP listen is set by default. Setting Passwords It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. Changing the Default Administrator Password The administrator has complete access to all menus. NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. 2. To change the default password. enter y to enable the RIP supply. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# /cfg 40 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. you must login using the administrator password.0. Passwords cannot be modified from the user command mode. To change both the user password and the administrator password. Otherwise. follow this procedure: 1. When RIP is enabled. From the Main Menu.Alteon OS 22. The default password for the administrator account is admin. January 2005 . Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.2 Command Reference If your network uses Routing Interface Protocol (RIP). including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. information. and configuration commands.

Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .Layer 2 Menu l3 .Alteon OS 22.Step by step configuration set up dump . From the Configuration Menu.Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security .Security Menu setup .2 Command Reference The Configuration Menu is displayed.Restore current configuration from tftp server 3. [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur - Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 41 .0.Layer 3 Menu slb . [Configuration Menu] sys .System-wide Parameter Menu port .Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg .Port Menu pmirr .Bandwidth Management Menu l2 . use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys The System Menu is displayed.Port Mirroring Menu bwm .

7. The default password for the user account is user. System# user/admpw 6. From the System menu. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords. Enter the new administrator password at the prompt: Enter new administrator password: 8. validation required. use the following path to select the User menu: System# access/user 5. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. but you can’t make configuration changes.. 42 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save Changing the Default User Password The user login has limited control of the switch. you can view switch information and statistics. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. January 2005 .0. as shown in the following procedure. Enter the new administrator password. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt: Changing ADMINISTRATOR password. Select the administrator password.2 Command Reference 4..Alteon OS 22. Through a user account. again. at the prompt: Re-enter new administrator password: 9. This password cannot be changed from the user account.

Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.2 Command Reference 1. validation required. Only the administrator can change the user password. Select the user password. Enter the new user password at the prompt: Enter new user password: 7. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority.. Enter current administrator password: 6. at the prompt: Re-enter new user password: 8.. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# cfg 3. From the Configuration Menu. Apply and save your changes: System# apply System# save 315393-J. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt. From the Main Menu. 2. System# access/user/usrpw 5. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 43 . Changing USER password. use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 4.0. again. Enter the new user password.Alteon OS 22.

From the Main Menu. Enter the new administrator password. Enter the new Layer 4 administrator password at the prompt: Enter new L4 administrator password: 6. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. validation required. To change any switch password. use the following path to access the user command: Main# /cfg/sys/access/user 3.Alteon OS 22. Select the Layer 4 administrator password: System# l4apw 4.. To change the default password. Connect to the switch and log in using the administrator account. The default password for the Layer 4 administrator account is l4admin. Passwords cannot be modified from the Layer 4 administrator account or the user account. 5. follow this procedure: 1.. January 2005 . you must login using the administrator password.2 Command Reference Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password The Layer 4 administrator has limited control of the switch. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. you can view all switch information and statistics. again.0. at the prompt: Re-enter new L4 administrator password: 44 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. Through a Layer 4 administrator account. Enter the current administrator password (not the Layer 4 administrator password) at the prompt: Changing L4 ADMINISTRATOR password. 2.

2 Command Reference 7.Alteon OS 22. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 45 .0.

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .0.2 Command Reference 46 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-J.

In addition. The following table shows the Main Menu for the administrator login. Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu. and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI. The Main Menu The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. NOTE – The ssl option is only visible on the Alteon OS 2000-SSL Series. January 2005 47 . Some features are not available under the user login.CHAPTER 3 Menu Basics The Alteon Application Switch’s Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. always available] 315393-J. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. To make the CLI easy to use. along with a summary of what each command will do. This chapter describes the Main Menu commands. the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are available. the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub-menus.

selecting configuration blocks.0. SNMP. January 2005 . IP. ARP. performing port mirroring.Alteon OS 22. Configuration Menu This menu is available only from an administrator login. IF. and more.2 Command Reference Menu Summary Information Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs. ICMP. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages. Boot Options Menu This menu is used for upgrading switch software. Maintenance Menu This menu is used for debugging purposes. and for resetting the switch when necessary. and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the ARP and routing tables. Included are port. Layer 4 settings. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service. enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch. Statistics Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. 48 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J. and Layer 4 statistics. Operations Command Menu Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration. TCP. routing. DNS. UDP. VRRP. and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing functions. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch.

and for applying and saving configuration changes. Print current menu . go to the Main Menu. When used without the command parameter. lines diff apply save revert exit or quit 315393-J. Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory. When used without a value. Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands.. Move up one menu level / Top menu if first. the current setting is displayed. this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line.. These commands are useful for obtaining online help. Exit from the command line interface and log out. or command separator ! Execute command from history pwd quit revert history Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ? command or help . Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. The default is 24 lines. Otherwise. If placed at the beginning of a command. Apply pending configuration changes. For help on a specific command. a summary of the global commands is displayed. navigating through menus. You will see the following screen: Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu] help up print lines verbose exit diff apply save ping traceroute telnet pushd popd who The following are used to navigate the menu structure: . January 2005 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 49 . type help.2 Command Reference Global Commands Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. Go up one level in the menu structure.Alteon OS 22. Show any pending configuration changes.0. Display the current menu. or print . Use this command to restore configuration parameters set since last “apply” command. or up / Action Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu.

1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown. specify the -m or -mgmt option. tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32). This command stores the current location of the menu tree. traceroute pwd verbose n telnet history pushd popd who 50 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J. maxhops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-16 devices). As with ping. If the management port is used. By default. By default.0. This command takes the user one level back to the menu location stored by the last pushd command. msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts. This command displays the currently logged user’s session information. Display the command path used to reach the current menu.2 Command Reference Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ping Action Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. the current setting is displayed. This command brings up the history of the last 10 commands. This command is used to telnet out of the switch. 2 =Verbose: Everything is shown.Alteon OS 22. If the management port is used. The format is as follows: <hostname>|<IP address> [port] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data]. Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. If the management port is used. the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. specify the -m or -mgmt option. The format is as follows: traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station. Sets the level of information displayed on the screen: 0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts. The format is as follows: ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries <(1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m| -mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. and delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response. but no menus. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. When used without a value. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. specify the -m or -mgmt option. By default. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames (see “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 331). January 2005 .

(Also the Delete key. <Ctrl-n> <Ctrl-a> <Ctrl-e> <Ctrl-b> <Ctrl-f> <Backspace> <Ctrl-d> <Ctrl-k> <Ctrl-l> <Ctrl-u> Other keys 315393-J. This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 10 commands. The following options are available globally at the command line: Table 3-2 Command Line History and Editing Options Option history !! !n <Ctrl-p> Description Display a numbered list of the last 10 previously entered commands.) Recall the next command from the history list. Redraw the screen. Repeat the last entered command. Delete one character at the cursor position. (Also the left arrow key.) Recall the previous command from the history list.Alteon OS 22. Move cursor to the end of the command line.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position. (Also the right arrow key. Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line. Repeat the nth command shown on the history list. January 2005 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 51 . you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes.0. or edited using the options below. Clear the entire line.2 Command Reference Command Line History and Editing Using the command line interface. (Also the up arrow key. Move the cursor to the beginning of command line. This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 10 commands. (Also the down arrow key. The recalled command can be entered as is.) Move the cursor back one position to the left. or edited using the options below. Insert new characters at the cursor position. The recalled command can be entered as is.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right.

Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed. separated by forward slashes (/). If only one command fits the input text when <Tab> is pressed. January 2005 . that command will be supplied on the command line. the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is as follows: Main# cfg/l2/stg/port Command Abbreviation Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu. You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want. the command shown above could also be entered as follows: Main# c/l2/st/p Tab Completion By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting <Tab>. If the <Tab> key is pressed without any input on the command line. the currently active menu will be displayed.0.2 Command Reference Command Line Interface Shortcuts Command Stacking As a shortcut. 52 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. you can type multiple commands on a single line. the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. For example. waiting to be entered. For example.

Show Security status swkey . For details. l3 Displays the Layer 3 information menu.Show enabled software features dump . /info Information Menu [Information Menu] sys .Layer 2 Information Menu l3 .Dump all information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-1 on page 53.CHAPTER 4 The Information Menu You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes.Layer 4-7 Information Menu link . Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays system menu information. For details. see page 77. with pointers to where detailed information can be found. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu.Layer 3 Information Menu slb . January 2005 53 .System Information Menu l2 .Bandwidth Management Information Menu security . This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch infor- mation. To view menu options. 315393-J.Show link status port .Show port information bwm . see page 55. see page 90.

see page 121. To view a sample. see page 119. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. port Displays port status information. For details. For details see page 127.0. including: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership For details. or auto) Link status (up or down) For details. yes. full. see page 127. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more. see page 120. see page 126. link Displays configuration information about each port. see page 110. 10/100. If you want to capture dump data to a file. January 2005 . or 1000) Duplex mode (half. security Displays current UDP blast settings and the security status of the port. 54 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. swkey Displays a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch.Alteon OS 22. depending on your configuration). bwm Displays Bandwidth Management information. including: Port number Port speed (10. 100.2 Command Reference Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Layer 4 Information Menu. For details. To view menu options.

Alteon OS 22. Management Processor Board Hardware.2 Command Reference /info/sys System Information Menu [System Menu] snmpv3 general log savedlog mgmt sonmp capacity fan temp dump SNMPv3 Information Menu Show general system information Show last 30 syslog messages Display syslog messages saved in flash Show Management Port information Show SONMP topology table information Show switch capacity information Show switch fan status Show switch temperature sensor status Dump all system information Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 Information Menu. and date. log Displays last 30 syslog messages. 315393-J. savedlog Displays syslog messages that are saved in flash. See page 69 for detailed information. day. see page 57. See page 67 for a sample output and detailed information. mgmt Displays Management port information.0. See page 68 for a sample output. general Displays general system information including: System information like time. To view the menu options. and Fast Ethernet Board Hardware Software image file and version number Configuration name Log-in banner. Switch model name and number How long the switch has been up Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor Internal SSL Processor MAC Address if the switch is 2424-SSL IP address of IP interface #1 Hardware order number and part numbers of the Mainboard Hardware. if one is configured See page 66 for a sample output. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 55 .

VRRP. This output displays the maximum switch capacity for the various applications and services that the switch supports. which includes Server Load Balancing. and SNMPv3. Layer 4-7. GSLB. Bandwidth Management.0. 56 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. General switch information. RIP. Layer 3. See page 74 for a sample output. See page 70 for detailed information. January 2005 . fan Displays the fan status of the switch. See page 71 for a sample output. dump Displays all system information. BGP. Network Filters. Route Maps. temp Displays the temperature status of the switch sensors. capacity gen|bwm|l2|l3|slb|port Displays the switch capacity information. OSPF. Health Checks. The output contains capacity information about Layer 2.2 Command Reference Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage sonmp Displays SONMP topology table information. Filters.

Alteon OS 22. user name. To view a sample. taddr Displays the Target Address table information. see page 58. [SNMPv3 Information Menu] usm . mask and type of view. sub tress. To view a sample. the security model. see page 61.Show vacmAccess table information group . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 57 . see page 60. and group name. To view a sample.Show community table information taddr .Show notify table information dump . access Displays View-based Access Control information. 315393-J.Show targetAddr table information tparam . To view the table. To view a sample. comm Displays information about the community table information.Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information comm .2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3 SNMPv3 System Information Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. see page 62. see page 61. To view a sample.Show all SNMPv3 information Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm Displays User Security Model (USM) table information.0. view Displays information about view. see page 59. group Displays information about the group that includes.Show targetParams table information notify .Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information access .Show usmUser table information view .

NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5. To view a sample. dump Displays all the SNMPv3 information.0. This security model makes use of a defined set of user identities displayed in the USM user table.Alteon OS 22. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA. usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH. see page 65.2 Command Reference Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage tparam Displays the Target parameters table information. see page 64. which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be authenticated the privacy protocol. /info/sys/snmpv3/usm SNMPv3 USM User Table Information The User-based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authentication and privacy of messages. see page 63. January 2005 . notify Displays the Notify table information. The USM user table contains information like: the user name a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model an authentication protocol. To view a sample. NO PRIVACY 58 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. To view a sample.

6.3.6.3 1.6.6. Displays the bit mask.16 1. /info/sys/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Table Information The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons.6.3.Alteon OS 22. Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string. Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference Table 4-4 USM User Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/usm) Field User Name Protocol Description This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch.6. Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view.15 1.3. This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol.1.3 1.1. A view subtree is the set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names.0. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 59 . The software also supports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC-SHA.1.2 supports DES algorithm for privacy. Mask Type 315393-J. View Name ----------------org v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only Subtree -----------------1.3.3.18 Mask -------------Type -------included included excluded excluded excluded Table 4-5 SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/view) Field View Name Subtree Description Displays the name of the view.3.

This group's access rights are determined by a read-view. Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------. security information. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access. The vacmAccessTable maps a group name. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of a group. noAuthNoPriv.-----. The notify-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when sending a notification. January 2005 .0. a write-view and a notify-view. Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV 60 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. authNoPriv. a context. SNMPv1. which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view.----------.------. Displays the prefix that is configured to match the values. or SNMPv2 or USM. For example. for example. The write-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when writing objects. Displays the match for the contextName. Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access.---------admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org Table 4-6 SNMPv3 Access Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/access) Field Group Name Prefix Model Description Displays the name of group. The options are: exact and prefix. Displays the security model used. Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access.-----.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/access SNMPv3 Access Table Information The access control sub system provides authorization services. The read-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the objects. and a message type. or authPriv.

---------trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 61 .---------.-------------------. SNMPv2. The group is identified by a group name. SNMPv1. Displays the name for the group. and SNMPv3. Displays the access name of the group. Index Name User Name Tag ---------.2 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Table Information A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. Sec Model ---------snmpv1 usm usm usm User Name ------------------------------v1v2only admin adminmd5 adminsha Group Name -------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp admingrp Table 4-7 SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/group) Field Sec Model User Name Group Name Description Displays the security model used.0. /info/sys/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Information This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine.Alteon OS 22. which is any one of: USM.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-8 SNMPv3 Community Table Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/comm)
Field Index Name User Name Tag Description Displays the unique index value of a row in this table Displays the community string, which represents the configuration. Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name. Displays the community tag. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a command responder application accepts management requests and to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.

/info/sys/snmpv3/taddr
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information
This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information, which is stored in the SNMP engine.
Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------trap1 47.81.25.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param

Table 4-9 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/ snmpv3/taddr)
Field Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params Description Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry. Displays the transport addresses. Displays the SNMP UDP port number. This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a particular SNMP message. The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable. The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address.

62

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/tparam
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information
Name MP Model --------------- -------v1v2param snmpv2c User Name -------------v1v2only Sec Model --------snmpv1 Sec Level --------noAuthNoPriv

Table 4-10 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/ tparam)
Field Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Description Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry. Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. Displays the securityName, which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry. Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. The system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model which the system does not support. Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry.

Sec Level

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

63

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/notify
SNMPv3 Notify Table Information
Name Tag -------------------- -------------------v1v2trap v1v2trap

Table 4-11 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/notify)
Field Name Tag Description The locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry. This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of this entry, is selected. If this entry contains a value of zero length, no entries are selected.

64

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/snmpv3/dump
SNMPv3 Dump Information
usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------admin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY

vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV ---------- ------ ------- ---------- ------ ------- -------- -----admin usm noAuthNoPriv exact org org org v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv exact org org v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv exact org org org vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------- --------------org 1.3 v1v2only 1.3 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.15 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.16 v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.18

Mask ------------

Type -------------included included excluded excluded excluded

vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name ---------- ------------------------------snmpv1 v1v2only usm admin usm adminsha

Group Name ----------------------v1v2grp admin admingrp

snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------- ---------- -------------------- ---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------- -------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------- -------- ------------------ --------- -------

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

65

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/general
General System Information
On an Alteon Application Switch 2424:
Enter password: System Information at

9:06:50 Tue Oct 26, 2004

Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 1 day, 19 hours, 52 minutes and 55 seconds. Last boot: 13:13:52 Fri Oct 22, 2004 (power cycle) MAC Address: 00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 IP Hardware Order No: EB1412003 Mainboard Hardware: Management Processor Board Hardware: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: (If 1) Address: 47.80.23.249 Part No: P314090-A Part No: P314080-A Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Rev: 02 Rev: 03

Software Version 22.0.2.0 (FLASH image2), active configuration.

On an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL:
Enter password: System Information at 19:03:14 Tue Oct 26, 2004 Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL Switch is up 2 days, 19 hours, 6 minutes and 33 seconds. Last boot: 23:56:35 Mon Oct 25, 2004 (unknown reason or power cycle) Last apply: 14:43:37 Fri Oct 22, 2004 Last save: 14:45:44 Fri Oct 22, 2004 MAC Address: 00:0c:f8:90:ee:00 IP (If 20) Address: 21.10.0.1 Internal SSL Processor MAC Address: 00:0c:f8:90:ee:1f Hardware Order No: EB1412006 Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P315720-A Rev: 03 Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: 02 Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Software Version 22.0.2 (FLASH image1), active configuration.

66

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

NOTE – The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors exceeds 60oC. There will be a warning from the software if any of the sensors exceeds this temperature threshold. The switch will shut down if the power supply overheats and the temperature gets to 100oC. Information about fan failures will also be displayed if one or more fans are not functioning.

/info/sys/log
Show Last 30 Syslog Messages
Date Time Criticality level Message Nov 19 12:16:51 ALERT stp: STG 1, new root bridge Nov 19 13:52:03 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.80.22.1 Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 operational Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 enabled Nov 19 14:21:27 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.80.22.1 Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 operational Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.22.1 enabled Nov 19 14:38:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 14:44:02 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:15:06 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:15:20 INFO mgmt: new configuration saved Nov 19 16:18:44 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:19:37 ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done Nov 19 16:19:57 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:34:35 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 16:39:43 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:39:59 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 16:54:13 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 17:20:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.27.4 Nov 19 17:26:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.25.49 Nov 19 17:31:53 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH

Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it, included in text form as a prefix to the log message. One of eight different prefixes is used, depending on the condition that the administrator is being notified of, as shown below. EMERG: indicates the system is unusable ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately CRIT: Indicates critical conditions ERR: indicates error conditions or error operations
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 67

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

WARNING: indicates warning conditions NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition INFO: indicates an information message DEBUG: indicates a debut-level message

/info/sys/savedlog
Saved Syslog Messages
Aug 20 13:54:21 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 20 13:57:53 ALERT gateway 47.80.22.1 Aug 20 13:57:57 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 20 13:58:23 ALERT gateway 47.80.22.1 Aug 20 13:58:33 NOTICE 47.80.22.1 operational Aug 24 14:43:43 NOTICE Aug 24 14:49:50 NOTICE Aug 24 14:51:38 NOTICE Aug 24 14:57:30 NOTICE Aug 24 15:05:54 NOTICE Aug 24 15:11:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:40 NOTICE Aug 24 16:00:52 NOTICE ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway ip: cannot contact management port default ip: management port default gateway mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH admin login from host 47.81.25.12 switch reset from CLI

68

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/mgmt
Management Port Information
Speed ----100 Duplex -----full Link ---up

MAC address: 00:01:81:2e:a4:8d Interface information: 47.80.23.251 255.255.254.0 Gateway information: 47.80.22.1

47.80.23.255

Use this command to display Management port information on an Alteon Application Switch including: Port speed (10/100) Duplex mode (half, full, any, or auto) Link (Up or down) MAC Address of the system IP address of the Interface IP address of the gateway.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

69

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/sys/sonmp
SONMP Information
This command displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) topology table. SONMP protocol is enabled on Alteon Application Switches using the /cfg/sys/ sonmp on command, and is necessary so that an Alteon switch can be discovered by the Nortel Networks Optivity Switch Manager.When SONMP is enabled, devices on the network exchange multicast packets namely: flatnet hellos and segment hellos. The IP address of the device is written into the hello packets. As the network devices exchange information, a topology table is built like the one shown below.
Slot Port ----0 /0 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 Seg Id --------------- --47.80.23.247 0 47.80.22.1 770 47.80.23.25 259 47.80.23.25 260 47.80.23.241 257 50.10.10.1 263 IP address MAC address ----------------00:01:81:2e:a3:60 00:e0:16:7c:28:24 00:60:cf:81:54:28 00:60:cf:81:54:38 00:60:cf:43:a2:10 00:60:cf:46:d5:60 Local State Seg ------------------ ----- ----Alteon2224 true topChanged Passport1200 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat AlteonAD4 true topChanged Alteon184 true topChanged Chassis Type

Table 4-12 SONMP Information Parameters Description
Parameter Slot Port Description Specifies the slot and port on which the topology message was received. This is the IP address of the sender of the topology message. The “segment identifier” of the segment from which the remote agent send the topology message. Different devices may use different methods for representing the segment identifier. The MAC address of the sender of the topology message. The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message. Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same Ethernet segment (i.e. not across a bridge) as the reporting agent. The current state of the sender of the topology message. the values are: topChanged—topology information has recently changed heartbeat—topology information unchanged. new—sending agent is in new state.

IP Address Seg ID

Mac Address Chassis Type Local Seg

State

70

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

. Maximum LAYER 2 FDB FDB per SP VLANs Static Trunk Groups LACP Trunk Groups Trunks per Trunk Group Spanning Tree Groups Monitor Ports LAYER 3 IP Interfaces IP Gateways IP Routes Static Routes ARP Entries Static ARP Entries Local Nets DNS Servers BOOTP Servers RIP Interfaces OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF OSPF LSDB Interfaces Areas Summary Ranges Virtual Links Hosts Limit 16384 8192 255 12 28 8 16 1 Current(Enabled) 54 1(1) 0(0) 16(1) 256 4+255 4096 128 8192 128 5 2 2 256 256 3 16 3 128 12288 1(1) 1+0(1+0) 7 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) Continued.0.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /info/sys/capacity System Capacity Information The following sample output from an Alteon OS 2424 displays the maximum and currently enabled switch capacity for various services and applications from Layer 2-7. 315393-J.. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 71 .

PORTS Port # Client Server Filter RTS Continued.2 Command Reference BGP Peers BGP Route Aggregators Route Maps Network Filters AS Filters VRRP Routers VRRP Router Groups VRRP Interfaces SLB (LAYER 4-7) Real Servers Server Groups Virtual Servers Virtual Services Real Services Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global Global SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB SLB Domains Services Local Servers Remote Servers Remote Sites Failovers per Remote Site Networks Geographical Regions Rules Metrics Per Rule 16 16 32 256 8 1024 16 256 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0 1024 1024 1024 1024 8192 1024 8192 1024 1024 64 2 128 7 128 8 2048 32 32 5 1024 2097104 16 64 8 0(0) 0 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 0(0) 2(2) 0(0) 7(7) 0(1) 8(8) 0(0) 0 0 0 1 0 0(0) Filters PIPs Scriptable Health Checks SNMP Health Checks Rules for URL Parsing SLB Sessions Number of Rports to Vport Domain Records Mapping Per Domain Record LAYER 4 .0.Alteon OS 22. 72 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. January 2005 ...

0.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 73 .2 Command Reference BWM Policies Contracts Groups Contracts per Group Time Policies per Contract GENERAL Syslog hosts RADIUS servers NTP servers SMTP hosts Mnet/Mmask End Users Panic Dumps MP memory SP memory SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Users Views Access Groups Target Address Entries Target Params Entries 512 256 32 8 2 0 1(1) 0 2 2 1 1 5 10 2 128M 128M 16 128 32 16 16 0 0 0 1 0 3 5 2 0 0 315393-J.

27. 7 minutes and 58 seconds.1 operational Jun 22 15:16:32 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47. Last 30 syslog message information: Jun 22 15:16:00 NOTICE system: link up on port 9 Jun 22 15:16:30 NOTICE system: rebooted (power cycle) Jun 22 15:16:32 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.22.99 Jul 2 9:56:11 NOTICE mgmt: admin logout from Telnet/SSH Jul 6 9:41:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.1 enabled Jun 22 15:17:05 ALERT stp: STG 1.0.0 (FLASH image1). 2004 Software Version 22.25.6 Continued 74 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.6 Jun 30 12:37:26 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jul 2 9:51:57 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.12 Jun 22 15:32:57 ERROR cli: No apply needed Jun 22 15:35:33 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 22 15:40:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jun 23 12:13:04 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.Alteon OS 22.27.80. topology change detected Jun 22 15:28:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.0. January 2005 . Last boot: 15:15:56 Tue Jun 22. active configuration.25.249 Part No: P314090-A Part No: P314080-A Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Rev: 02 Rev: 03 6.80.80.23.81.81.0.22.12 Jul 6 9:47:06 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jul 6 10:22:32 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.2 Command Reference /info/sys/dump System Information Dump System Information at 10:23:41 Tue Jul Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 13 days.25. 2008 (power cycle) MAC Address: 00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 IP Hardware Order No: EB1412003 Mainboard Hardware: Management Processor Board Hardware: Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: (If 1) Address: 47. 19 hours.8.12 Jun 23 12:13:39 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 23 12:13:53 NOTICE mgmt: Failed login attempt via BBI.81.81. Jun 23 12:18:36 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Jun 30 12:32:11 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.81.

6.0.-----.2 Command Reference Management port information: Speed ----10/100 Duplex -----any Link ---disabled Interface information: Gateway information: Engine ID = 80:00:07:50:03:00:0E:40:2F:5B:00 usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------test wyin adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only vacmAccess Table: Group Name Prefix Model ---------.6.1.3.Alteon OS 22.15 1.1.6.--------noAuthNoPriv exact iso iso iso noAuthNoPriv exact iso iso noAuthNoPriv authPriv noAuthNoPriv noAuthNoPriv exact exact exact exact iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso iso vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------.3.3. NO PRIVACY Level Match ReadV WriteV NotifyV -----------. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA. NO PRIVACY NO AUTH.------------------------iso 1 included v1v2only included v1v2only excluded v1v2only excluded 1 Mask ------------ Type ---- 1.16 Continued 315393-J.-----.-------. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH. NO PRIVACY HMAC_MD5.3. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 75 .------testgrp usm v1v2grp snmpv1 v1v2only wyingrp usm admingrp usm test1grp usm test2grp usm Protocol -------------------------------NO AUTH.6.

6.--------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------.--------------.18 vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name Group Name ---------.---------------.------Slot IP address Seg MAC address Chassis Type Port Id ----.--------------.-------. January 2005 .---.6.------------Local Seg ----State ----- 76 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.-----------------------snmpv1 v1v2only v1v2grp usm test testgrp usm wyin wyingrp usm test1 test1grp usm adminmd5 admingrp usm adminsha admingrp snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------.Alteon OS 22.------------.-------------------.---------.3.---.1.---------.2 Command Reference v1v2only excluded 1.0.------------------------------.---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------.3.--------.-------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------.

you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State For details. see page 80.2 Command Reference /info/l2 Layer 2 Information Menu [Layer 2 Menu] fdb lacp stg trunk vlan dump Forwarding Database Information Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Show STG information Show Trunk Group information Show VLAN information Dump all layer 2 information Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. see page 83. trunk When trunk groups are configured. see page 78.Alteon OS 22. For details. stg <STG index to display or carriage return for all STGs> In addition to seeing if Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled. For details. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 77 . lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. For details.0. 315393-J. see page 87.

including: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN For details. 08:00:20:12:34:56. xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. dump Displays all Layer 2 information.Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan . For example. Each SP supports up to 8K entries. Enter the MAC address using the format.Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port .Show all FDB entries NOTE – The master forwarding database supports up to 16K MAC address entries on the MP per switch. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. xxxxxxxxxxxx. The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address. 78 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. You can also enter the MAC address using the format. see page 88. 080020123456. [Forwarding Database Menu] find .2 Command Reference Table 4-13 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number to display or carriage return to display all VLANs> Displays VLAN configuration information.0. For example.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . Table 4-14 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address.Show FDB entries on a single VLAN refpt .Show FDB entries on a single port trunk . /info/l2/fdb Layer 2 FDB Information The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned.Show FDB entries referenced by a single SP dump .

/info/l2/fdb/dump Show All FDB Information MAC address VLAN Port State Referenced SPs Referenced ports ----------------. When an address is in the unknown state. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database.Alteon OS 22. the port field represents the trunk group number.----. When in the trunking (TRK) state. the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch. means that it has been learned by the switch. but has only been seen as a destination address.------------00:02:01:00:00:00 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:01 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:02 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:03 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:04 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:05 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:06 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:07 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:08 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:09 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0a 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0b 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0c 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the FDB entries referenced by a single port.-------------. see page 79.2 Command Reference Table 4-14 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number.---. 0 for "unknown"> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 79 . For more information.0. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK).---.” 315393-J. although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference ports. trunk <trunk group number> Displays all FDB entries on a single trunk. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. no outbound port is indicated.

To view a sample output. see port <port index 1 to max num ports> Displays information of an LACP port.Show all LACP ports information Table 4-15 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu Options (/info/ lacp) Command Syntax and Usage aggr <aggregator index 1 to max num ports> Displays information an LACP aggregator. see dump Displays LACP information of all the ports. the MAC address is for a standard VRRP virtual router. If the state is listed as a virtual server (VIP). 80 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. [LACP Menu] aggr port dump . Use this command to verify the state of ports in an LACP trunk group. Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB) or to clear the entire FDB. To view a sample output. January 2005 . see page 83.0. refer to “Forwarding Database Options” on page 451.2 Command Reference If the state for the port is listed as an interface (IF).Show LACP port information . To view a sample output. /info/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu The following menu options display the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) information on the Alteon OS. the MAC address is for a virtual server router—a virtual router with the same IP address as a virtual server.Alteon OS 22.Show LACP aggregator information for the port .

32768 Partner System ID .TRUE Number of Ports in aggr .FALSE Actor Admin Key .00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 Partner Oper Key .300 Actor Oper Key .300 Partner System Priority .10 index 0 port 1 index 1 port 2 index 2 port 3 index 3 port 4 index 4 port 5 index 5 port 6 index 6 port 7 index 7 port 8 index 8 port 9 index 9 port 10 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 Individual . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 81 .1 ready .0.32768 Actor System ID .00:01:81:2e:a1:d1 Actor System Priority .2 Command Reference /info/lacp/aggr LACP Aggregator Information Aggregator Id 1 ---------------------------------------------MAC address .

0x0 Partner Oper Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Long FALSE FALSE Aggregation: Distributing: TRUE FALSE Long Aggregation: TRUE Distributing: FALSE TRUE TRUE Long Aggregation: TRUE Continued 82 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.TRUE Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor Actor System ID System Priority Admin Key Oper Key Port Number Port Priority Admin System Priority Oper System Priority Admin System ID Oper System ID Admin Key Oper Key Admin Port Number Admin Port Priority Oper Port Number Oper Port Priority 00:01:81:2e:a1:b0 32768 300 300 1 32768 0 32768 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:0d:29:e3:4a:00 0 1 0 0 4 32768 Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Partner Actor Admin Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:FALSE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Actor Oper Port state Activity: Active Timeout: Synchronization:TRUE Collecting: Defaulted: FALSE Expired: Partner Admin Port state .TRUE lacp_admin_enabled .0. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /info/lacp/port LACP Port Information port 1 ---------------------------------------------lacp_enabled .Alteon OS 22.

LACP_MUX_COL_DIS_STATE .LACP_PERIODIC_SLOW_STATE .Alteon OS 22.FALSE .FALSE turned ON! 315393-J.FALSE .FALSE .1 .Selected .0.LACP_RX_CURRENT_STATE .2 Command Reference Synchronization: TRUE Defaulted: FALSE Collecting: Expired: TRUE Distributing: FALSE TRUE Rx machine state Mux machine state Periodic machine state Individual Selected Aggregator ID Attached Aggregator ID ready_n ntt selected port_moved Collision and Detection state .1 . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 83 .

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /info/lacp/dump LACP Dump Information port attached trunk aggr ------------------------------------------------------------------1 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 2 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 3 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 4 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 5 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 6 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 7 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 8 active 300 300 y 32768 1 13 9 active 300 300 n 32768 --10 active 300 300 n 32768 --11 active 300 300 n 32768 --12 active 300 300 n 32768 --13 active 300 300 n 32768 --14 off 14 14 n 32768 --15 off 15 15 n 32768 --16 off 16 16 n 32768 --17 off 17 17 n 32768 --18 off 18 18 n 32768 --19 off 19 19 n 32768 --20 off 20 20 n 32768 --21 off 21 21 n 32768 --22 off 22 22 n 32768 --23 off 23 23 n 32768 --24 off 24 24 n 32768 --25 off 25 25 n 32768 --26 off 26 26 n 32768 --27 off 27 27 n 32768 --28 off 28 28 n 32768 --lacp adminkey operkey selected prio 84 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.0.

In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled.2 Command Reference /info/l2/stg Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information When multiple paths exist on a network.0.2 supports up to 16 multiple Spanning Tress or Spanning Tree Groups. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 85 . NOTE – Alteon OS 22.------- 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 The switch software uses the IEEE 802.0. you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time 315393-J.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 MaxAge 20 Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------.Alteon OS 22.

the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. January 2005 . the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network. in seconds. LISTENING. The maximum age parameter specifies. or DISABLED. the faster the port. The state field shows the current state of the port. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. MaxAge FwdDel Aging priority (port) Cost State 86 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. FORWARDING. the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions Parameter Priority (bridge) Hello Description The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge. The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.0. Generally speaking. The hello time parameter specifies. in seconds.2 Command Reference You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State Designated Bridge Designated Port The following table describes the STP parameters. The aging time parameter specifies. The state field can be either BLOCKING. LEARNING. the lower the path cost.Alteon OS 22. The forward delay parameter specifies. in seconds. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). in seconds.

This bridge is displayed as character string starting with the bridge priority (1-65535) followed by a hyphen and six byte MAC address of that switch. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 87 . the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding. When trunk groups are configured.2 Command Reference Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (Continued) Parameter Designated Bridge Description The designated bridge resides closest to the root bridge and is responsible for forwarding packets from LAN towards the root bridge. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. 315393-J. For example. Trunk group 1. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together. The designated port identifies a physical port. combining their bandwidth to create a single. bw contract 256. port state: 1: STG 1 forwarding 2: STG 1 forwarding NOTE – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding. multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk-capable devices.0. larger virtual link. This is a number that is the numerical sum of bridge priority and the actual physical port number.Alteon OS 22. Designated port /info/l2/trunk Trunk Group Information Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth. a physical port number four with bridge priority 32768 will be displayed as 32678+4=32772.

2 Command Reference /info/l2/vlan VLAN Information VLAN ---1 Name Status Jumbo BWC Learn Ports -------------------------------. Port membership is represented in slot/port format.Alteon OS 22. VLAN information includes: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Jumbo Frames Bandwidth Contract if BWM is enabled Source MAC Address Learning Port membership of the VLAN 88 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.---.----Default VLAN ena n 256 ena 1-28 This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state.----.----. January 2005 .-----.0.

2 Command Reference /info/l2/dump Layer2 Dump Information Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Hello 2 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 MaxAge 20 Port -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 89 .0.Alteon OS 22.------ 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 315393-J.

IP information. see page 93. includes: IP interface information: Interface number. Using the options of this menu. and health status IP forwarding information: Enable status. bgp Displays BGP Information Menu. lnet and lmask Port status 90 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. VLAN number. and operational status. see page 104. see page 98. ip Displays IP Information. gateway number. ospf Displays OSPF routing information menu. IP address.Alteon OS 22. For details. Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use. or 16 for infinite hops) The IP interface that the route uses For details. specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops. see page 91. subnet mask. and gateway address Type of route Tag indicating origin of route Metric for RIP tagged routes. For details.0. the system displays the following for each configured or learned route: Route destination IP address. For details. January 2005 . subnet mask. broadcast address. see page 96. To view menu options. IP address. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu.2 Command Reference /info/l3 Layer3 Information Menu [Layer 3 Menu] route arp bgp ospf ip vrrp dump IP Routing Information Menu ARP Information Menu BGP Information Menu OSPF Routing Information Menu Show IP information Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information Dump all layer 3 information Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Routing Menu.

101)> Displays a single route by destination IP address. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single type. see page 105.4.44)> Displays routes to a single gateway. see Table 4-19 on page 92.17. dump Displays all Layer 3 information. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays routes on a single interface.0.Show if . tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Displays routes of a single tag.Alteon OS 22.Show a single route by destination IP address routes to a single gateway routes of a single type routes of a single tag routes on a single interface all routes Using the commands listed below. NOTE – The total number of interfaces on an Alteon Application Switch 2424-SSL is 1-255. Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. For a description of IP routing types. For details.Show gw .Show type .Show tag . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 91 . you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch. 315393-J. 192. /info/l3/route IP Routing Information [IP Routing Menu] find .Show dump . 192. see Table 4-20 on page 93.17. For a description of IP routing types. gw <default gateway address (such as.2 Command Reference Table 4-17 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vrrp Displays the VRRP Information Menu.4.

see page 92.255.255 47.0 multicast addr * 224.0.255.255.255 47.0 224.255.255.5 255.255.0.0.-* 0. Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces. Indicates a multicast route.0.255 broadcast broadcast 1 * 127.255 0.80.0 0.0 martian martian * 224.255 0.0 255.0.23.249 255.80.--------------.255.0.255.0.255.23.0 47.23.255.255. Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch.22.0.0 255. The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out.0. /info/l3/route/dump Show All IP Route Information Status code: * .23.0.------------.2 Command Reference Table 4-18 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all routes configured in the switch.0.80.23.0.0 multicast addr * 255.255.0 0.254.0 martian martian * 224.249 local addr 1 * 47. For more information.6 255.255.0 47. Table 4-19 IP Routing Type Parameters (/info/l3/route/dump/type) Parameter indirect Description The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address.255 255. direct local broadcast martian multicast 92 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.255 255.0.0.--------.80.255 255.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.80.0.Alteon OS 22.80.0.0.0.255.1 indirect static 1 * 47.0.0.0 0.0.0.22. Packets to this destination are discarded.80.----.0.255.0.249 direct fixed 1 * 47.0. January 2005 .255 broadcast broadcast Type Parameters The following table describes the Type parameters. Indicates a broadcast route.

The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP). [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find . The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Indicates a broadcast address.0. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the router is present in the ARP cache. In any IP communication.Show ARP address list 315393-J.Show help on the fields of ARP entries addr . The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 93 . Table 4-20 IP Routing Tag Parameters (info/l3/route/tag) Parameter fixed static Description The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses.Alteon OS 22. Indicates a route destination that is a virtual server IP address.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt .Show a single ARP entry by IP address port . Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet. The address is a static route which has been configured on the Alteon Application Switch. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump . addr rip ospf bgp broadcast martian vip /info/l3/Arp ARP Information Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer. VIP routes are needed to advertise virtual server IP addresses via BGP.Show all ARP entries help . The address belongs to a filtered group. The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).Show ARP entries on a single port vlan .2 Command Reference Tag Parameters The following table describes the Tag parameters.

R . VIP. and port referencing information. MAC address: VLAN: Port: Referenced SPs: MAC address of ARP entry VLAN of this ARP entry Physical port where this IP address owner is connected SPs on which this ARP entry is present addr Displays the ARP address list: IP address. IP interface. VLAN and port for the address.ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN P .g.17.101> Displays a single ARP entry by IP address.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry.Layer 4 IP address (VIP) u . 94 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Indirect ARP (cache) entry for IP address reachable via indirect routes (static/dynamic) 4 . refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the ARP entries referenced by a single SP. The MAC address has not been learned. dump Displays all ARP entries. port <port number> Displays the ARP entries on a single port. see page 95. and VLAN flags. For details. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN. etc. For example: IP address: Flags: IP address of ARP entry J .0. Table 4-21 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. MAC address. January 2005 . 192. address status flags (see Table 4-22 on page 95). see page 95.4. help Displays help on the ARP field entries. IP mask.Permanent ARP entry (not obtained via ARP request). e. including: IP address and MAC address of each entry Address status flag (see below) The VLAN and port to which the address belongs The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown) For more information.Unresolved ARP entry.

3.0.3.31.80.31.1.----47.----00:0e:40:2f:5b:00 1 Referenced SPs -----------1-4 /info/l3/arp/dump Show All ARP Entry Information IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port --------------. Unresolved ARP entry.10 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 47. NOTE – If you have VMA turned on.3.80.10. Indirect route entry. the designated port will be the normal ingress port.10.---. If you have VMA turned off.2 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/refpt Show ARP Entries on Referenced SP IP address Flags ------------. The MAC address has not been learned. the referenced port will be the designated port.11. this traffic needs to be forwarded to the egress port (port 6 in the above example). So the traffic coming into the referenced ports has the destination IP address.1 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172.22.23.80.---1.10 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 172.31. From the ARP entry (the referenced ports).249 P MAC address VLAN Port ----------------.Alteon OS 22.1 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 10.---. ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN R U J 315393-J. The Flag field is interpreted as follows: Table 4-22 ARP Dump Flag Parameters Flag P P 4 Description Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.----.----------------.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:86 1 23 47. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 95 .23.11 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 Referenced SPs ------------1-4 1-4 empty 1-4 1-4 empty empty Referenced ports are the ports that request the ARP entry.81 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 172. Permanent entry created for Layer 4 proxy IP address or virtual server IP address.

See page 98 for a sample output. up/down.80.Show BGP routing table Table 4-23 BGP Peer Information Menu Options (/info/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer Displays BGP peer information. summary Displays peer summary information such as AS. message sent. See page 97 for a sample output.255 255.255.1 172.200 172.255 255.255 MAC address ----------------00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:0e 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 00:09:97:16:5f:00 VLAN ---Flags ----- D 1 1 1 /info/l3/bgp BGP Information Menu Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks.Show all BGP peers summary .255 255.255.255.81 IP mask --------------255.4. 96 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.31.23.255 255.255.Show all BGP peers in summary dump .1 47.4.255.10 1.255. [BGP Menu] peer . message received.255. See page 97 for a sample output.31. January 2005 . state.1 172.2 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/addr ARP Address List Information IP address --------------10.3.11.255. For more information.1.10.255 255.0.10.255.255. refer to BGP section in chapter: “The Configuration Menu” on page 227 and the Application Guide.255.31.255.Alteon OS 22. dump Displays the BGP routing table.

1. Local router ID: 1.0.178.1 .1. Old status: idle Total received packets: 0. version 0.148 0 148 0 0 never connect 315393-J. Local router ID: 1.-------.0.. BGP Peer Information: 3: 2. LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 /info/l3/bgp/summary BGP Summary information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/summary provides. Holdtime: 0.0.-------.0.5 BGP status: idle.201.178.1.1.-------.0. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0. Local AS: 0.4 .23. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0.15. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 97 . version 0. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0.2 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/peer BGP Peer information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/peer provides.Alteon OS 22.0. Holdtime: 0.-------.---------1: 205. Old status: idle Total received packets: 0. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0). LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 4: 2.0.201. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0. Local AS: 0. BGP Peer Summary Information: Peer V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down State --------------. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0.1. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0).5 BGP status: idle. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0.142 4 142 113 121 00:00:28 established 2: 205.1.

0.178.----. >> BGP# dump Status codes: * valid. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone. [OSPF Information Menu] general .0 205.0.2 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/dump Dump BGP Information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/dump provides.Show area(s) information if .--------------.----*> 10.Database Menu sumaddr . All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone.15. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch.EGP.Alteon OS 22.21.0. January 2005 . one area must be designated as area 0.Show interface(s) information virtual .0 205. ? .0.0.147 1 256 *>i205. refer to the OSPF section in chapter “The Configuration Menu” on page 227 and your Alteon OS Application Guide. known as the backbone. e .---.21.Show OSPF information 98 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.178.0 205. which then distributes it to other areas as needed.Show neighbor(s) information dbase .178. i . In any AS with multiple areas.Show NSSA summary address list routes .21.17. The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas.Show OSPF routes dump .178. > best.Show summary address list nsumadd .Show general information aindex .internal Origin codes: i .21.147 1 256 Path -------------147 148 i 0 i 147 i 147 i 147 {35} ? /info/l3/ospf OSPF Information Menu Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol.incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght --------------.0 * 205.0.0 0.178. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area.178.147 1 128 13. The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583.IGP.0.Show details of virtual links nbr .147 1 128 *> 205. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS).

D)> Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 99 .Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. To view menu options. it displays information for all the interfaces. see page 101. dbase Displays OSPF database menu. See page 100 for a sample output.0.2 Command Reference Table 4-24 OSPF Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general OSPF information.B. it displays the information about all the current neighbors. virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays area information for a particular area index. If no parameter is supplied. See page 102 for a sample output. nbr <nbr router-id (A. If no parameter is supplied. routes Displays OSPF routing table.C. if <interface number [1-256]> Displays interface information for a particular interface. If no router ID is supplied. nsumadd <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas. dump Display all the OSPF information. sumaddr <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas. See for a sample output. See page 100 for a sample output. it displays area information for all the areas.

0.10. Ip Address 10.1.80. January 2005 . State DR.14.12. Ip Address 10. Admin Status UP Router ID 10.23.12. of which 3-transit 0-nssa Area Id : 0. Poll interval 0.0.0 Authentication : none Import ASExtern : yes Number of times SPF ran : 8 Area Border Router count : 2 AS Boundary Router count : 0 LSA count : 5 LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B Summary : noSummary /info/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Information Ip Address 10.10.10.10.Alteon OS 22.10. Dead 40.0.10.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10. Wait 1663.10. 2 are >=EXCH state.10. of which 2 are >=INIT state. Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.0.1. Hello 10.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/general OSPF General Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 47. Area 0. Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4. Retransmit 5.2 Timer intervals. Authentication type none 100 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.1. 2 are =FULL state Number of areas is 2.247 Started at 95 and the process uptime is 352315 Area Border Router: yes.12.0. AS Boundary Router: no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 Number of interfaces in this router is 2 Number of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1.1.1.

LS Database summary ext .1. d) asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs.1.Network LS Database info nssa .0.1. ext <adv-rtr (A.Network-Summary LS Database info all .1.B. dbsumm Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: a) the number of LSAs of each type in each area.C.External LS Database info nw .1. d) the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined. b) the total number of LSAs for each area. The usage of this command is as follows: a) asbrsum adv-rtr 20.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20.B. c) the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. for example: 20.D)>|<link_state_id (A. asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.1.Router LS Database info self .B. 315393-J.B.1.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/dbase OSPF Database Information [OSPF Database Menu] advrtr .1.Self Originated LS Database info summ .1.1.NSSA External LS Database info rtr .1. No parameters are required. c) asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs.C.C.All Table 4-25 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage advrtr <router-id (A.ASBR Summary LS Database info dbsumm .LS Database info for an Advertising Router asbrsum .C. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID.D)>|<link_state_id (A.D)>|<self> Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 101 .1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10. b) asbrsum link_state_id 10.Alteon OS 22.1.C.B.D)>|<self> Displays ASBR summary LSAs.D)> Takes advertising router as a parameter.1.

D)>|<link_state_id (A.0.OSPF external type 1.1.18.2 E2 172.2 102 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.C. summ <adv-rtr (A.3/32 via 30.2 IA 140. No parameters are required.1.1.6/32 via 30.1. E2 . /info/l3/ospf/routes OSPF Information Route Codes Codes: IA .1.0/16 via 200.1.1.1.1.1.5/32 via 30.1.C.18.1.2 E2 172. rtr <adv-rtr (A.B. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.1.0/24 via 200.2 E2 172.1/32 via 30.1.B.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.2 IA 80. self Displays all the self-advertised LSAs.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.1.1.1.2 Command Reference Table 4-25 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage nw <adv-rtr (A.C.2 IA 150. January 2005 .D)>|<link_state_id (A.1.2 E2 172.Alteon OS 22.18.C.2 E2 172.1.C.OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 .1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.0/28 via 200. nssa <adv-rtr (A.D)>|<self> Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.D)>|<self> Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.B.C.1.1.B.1.10.2 E2 172.B.0/28 via 20.D)>|<link_state_id (A.18.0/27 via 20.D)>|<self> Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA. N1 .1.1.1.18.C.2 IA 100.4/32 via 30.B.7/32 via 30.1.1.1.2 E2 172.network LS database.2 E2 172. N2 .1.C.1.18.1.B.1.OSPF inter area.18.1.1.B. all Displays all the LSAs.1.0/24 via 20.8/32 via 30.D)>|<self> Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.1.1.OSPF NSSA external type 1.2 IA 40.0.1.1.2/32 via 30.18.1.1.OSPF external type 2 IA 10.1.1.

0. 315393-J. of which 0 are >=INIT state.2 Command Reference /info/ospf/dump OSPF Dump Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 1. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 103 .1 Started at 42 and the process uptime is 1197051 Area Border Router: no. AS Boundary Router: no External LSA count 0 Number of interfaces in this router is 0 Number of virtual links in this router is 0 0 new lsa received and 0 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 0 Total neighbors are 0.1.1) No areas enabled. 0 are >=EXCH state.Alteon OS 22.1.1.1. of which 0-transit 0-nssa OSPF Neighbors: Intf NeighborID ---.---------- Prio ---- State ----- Address ------- OSPF LS Database: OSPF LSDB breakdown for router with ID (1. 0 are =FULL state Number of areas is 0.

0 47. vlan 1.23.255.3.22.1. up Default gateway information: metric strict 2: 47. vlan any.1.31. up vlan 1. up vlan 1.1.1 255.255.255.80.80.3.Alteon OS 22.31. 172.80.254.255.23. 172.255.31.1 255.81 255.255.255.4. January 2005 .31.2 Command Reference /info/l3/ip IP Information Interface information: 1: 47.0. up Current IP forwarding settings: ON.0 2: 172. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current OSPF settings: ON Default route none Router ID: 1.1 lsdb limit 0 104 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.255.4.0 3: 172.

2. prio 110. renter. 27. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for more information on VRRP. backup. prio 110. prio 110.200.200.1.2.1. renter.1. renter. renter. 205. renter.200. based on a number of priority criteria. 1. master 12. 14: vrid 14.1. 172.200. master 14. prio 102. master 11. 205.Alteon OS 22. 14.2.200. renter. renter. prio 110. 13: vrid 13. 28. prio 118.2. prio 118.1. renter.1. 12: vrid 12.1. 254: vrid 254. 12.1.21. 27.18.8.178. 27: vrid 27. 10.21. 28.2. A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same. If the master fails. renter. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master.100. master. prio 100. server 1. renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device. server VRRP information: 1: vrid 2. VRRP information includes: Virtual router number Virtual router ID and IP address Interface number Ownership status owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. server 255: vrid 255. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.200.200. if 2: vrid 1.2 Command Reference /info/l3/vrrp VRRP Information Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. 20.202.178. you can view the status of each virtual router using this command.204. VRRP information: 10: vrid 10.2. renter. prio 118. 13. prio 100.2.1. renter. master.18. backup 13.178. backup 20.200. if if if if if if if if if if 10. renter. 100: vrid 100. renter. master.210. master if 27.100. prio 102. if 3: vrid 3. prio 100. proxy When virtual routers are configured. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. if 28. renter. if 172.2. 11: vrid 11. backup 1. prio 102. 315393-J. 28: vrid 28. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device.0. master. prio 118. server 172: vrid 172. backup 172.2. 20: vrid 20. prio 102.1. master 28. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 105 .18.8. renter.200.100. 172. 205. master 27. 11.2.

the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master. These are known as virtual server routers: any virtual router whose IP address is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the same IP address.0.Alteon OS 22. Server status. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers. Proxy status. Activity status master identifies the elected master virtual router. 106 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured. During the election process. January 2005 . backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode. where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address.2 Command Reference Priority value. The server state identifies virtual routers that support Layer 4 services.

up vlan 1. up vlan 1. default none.0.0 3: 205. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current BGP settings: ON.255.255 .255 .1.1. vlan 1.1.203. pref 100.21.255 .1. enabled metric none.201 255.255. rip disabled.255.255. adv 60 retry 120. AS number 100 Interface information: 2: 45.0 45.254 255. ospf disabled fixed disabled. ttl 1. 205. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 107 . IP information: IP information: Router ID: 45.1.1. vip disabled in-rmap: empty out-rmap: empty Current BGP aggr settings: Continued 315393-J.1.0 4: 172. 172.0.1. orig 15. static disabled. hold 180. alive 60. ras 300.255. up Default gateway information: metric strict Current IP forwarding settings: ON.1.2 Command Reference /info/l3/dump Layer3 Dump Information This command dumps all the information about Layer 3 parameters.0.21.1. This dump is a collection of all the individual commands described in the sections above.1.Alteon OS 22.201 255.1.201.255. AS number 100 Current BGP peer settings: 1: 45.

255.1 00:09:6b:b5:0b:d6 1 24 empty 205.1.255.21.0.255 172.201 direct fixed 2 * 45.0.201 255.255broadcast broadcast 2 * 127.255 broadcast broadcast 4 Continued 108 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.1.1.1.----00:01:81:2e:a2:2e D 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 Route table information: Status code: * .255 255.Alteon OS 22.--------------205.----.0.1.255.254 direct fixed 4 * 172.1.1.1.1.1. ARP cache information: IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------. January 2005 .21.255.1.1.255 172.1.1.100 P 4 00:01:81:2e:a2:2e 1-4 205.5 00:09:6b:00:74:97 1 24 empty 205.1.21.------------.1.---.0 255.255.254 255.0.1.255 205.1.1.254 255.255 172.255.255.1.1.1.-* 45.4 00:09:6b:00:76:1b 1 24 empty 205.1.---------------45.0 172.0.1.255.254 local addr 4 * 172.255 255.1.0 0.----.1.0 martian martian * 172.0.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.1.255.255.0.0 45.1.1.1.255 45.---.1.255.1.255 45.0.201 255.255.255.1.1.255.3 00:09:6b:00:6f:b7 1 24 empty 205.0.------------.255.0 255.21.2 Command Reference Virtual Router Redundancy is globally turned OFF.0.255.1.100 255.0.255.21.202 00:09:97:5e:69:00 1 24 empty 172.2 00:09:6b:b5:08:48 1 24 empty 205.1.255.1.0 255.254 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 205.255.255.1.255 MAC address VLAN Flags ----------------.1.255.6 00:09:6b:00:71:bb 1 24 empty 205.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 ARP address information: IP address IP mask --------------.201 255.21.255 45.21.255.201 local addr 2 * 45.-----------.1.201 P 00:01:81:2e:a2:20 1 1-4 45.21.----------------.1.75 00:0f:06:ec:8a:00 1 24 empty 45.1.

0.0.201 255.255.100 255.1.0.0 0.1.0 205.----. i .----.255.0 255.255.255.EGP.1.1.1.1.0 0.0.0.100 direct vip * 205.255 255.incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght Path --------------.255 205.1.255.255.0 0.1.255.1.IGP.255 205. > best.Alteon OS 22.0 224. ? .0 0. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 109 .1.1.0.1.0 0 ? 315393-J.0.1.0.0 0 ? *> 205.1.21.255 255. e .255.internal Origin codes: i .255.0.1. Status codes: * valid.255 broadcast broadcast 3 * 224.255 broadcast broadcast OSPF is disabled.0.1.0.201 direct fixed 3 * 205.1.----.0.255.--------------*> 45.0.0 0 ? *> 172.2 Command Reference * 205.255.0 martian martian * 255.255.255 255.1.255.1.201 local addr 3 * 205.255 205.255.0.0.--------------.

physical switch port. VLAN.Show IDS server selected by hash or minmisses metric bind . the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server.Alteon OS 22. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms.Show real server information virt . If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand. layer where health check is performed.2 Command Reference /info/slb Layer 4 Information Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. and health check result. gslb Displays the Global SLB Information Menu.Show real server selected by hash. see page 117. each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. January 2005 .Show SYN attack detection information dump . To view menu options.0. or minmisses metric cookie .Show all layer 4 information Table 4-26 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sess Displays the Session Table Information Menu. phash. real IP address. see page 112.Decode the HEX value to get VIP. To view menu options. it can become overutilized. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature. MAC address.Session Table Information Menu gslb . With this software feature.Show filter information port .Show port information idshash .Show virtual server information filt . real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays Real server number. 110 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. RIP and Rport synatk .: [Server Load Balancing Information Menu] sess .Global SLB Information Menu real .

server port mapping. dump Displays all Layer 4 information for the switch. bind <IP address> <mask> <group number> Displays the real server selected by hash. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 111 .0. real server IP address. and real server port. or minmisses metric. the number of new half open sessions is examined within a set period of time. a list of applied filters. cookie <16 or 20 bytes cookie value in HEX as 0xXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX> Decodes the hexadecimal value to get the virtual server IP address. real server port. 315393-J. group backup server. proxy IP address.Alteon OS 22. virtual MAC address Virtual Port State: Virtual service or port. URL for health checks. group backup server. real server group. synatk Displays SYN attack detection information. phash. backup server. IP address. idshash <IP address 1> <IP address 2> Displays the Intrusion Detection System server selected by hash or minmisses metric. health check layer. real server group. This feature requires dbind to be enabled. To identify whether or not the server is under SYN attack. IP address.2 Command Reference Table 4-26 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays Virtual Server State: Virtual server number. and status. and client and/or server Layer 4 activity. filter status. destination port. For details. see page 118. for example. every two seconds. and real server group. filt <filter ID (1-2048)>|list|allow|deny|redir|nat Displays the filter number. port <port number> Displays the physical port number.

Show all session entries with matching flag port . 112 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. flag <E|L|N|P|S|Rt|Ru|Ri|Vi|Vr|Vs|Vm|U|W> Displays all session entries with matching flag.Show all session entries with proxy IP address pport .Show all session entries help . pip <Proxy IP address> Displays all session entries with proxy IP address.Session entry description Table 4-27 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage cip <IP address> Displays all session entries with client’s source IP address.Show all session entries with source port dip . See “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 115 for a description of these options.Show all session entries with source IP address cport .Show all session entries with ingress port real .Show all session entries with destination IP address dport . pport <proxy port> Displays all session entries with proxy port. cport <real port> Displays all session entries with source (client) port.Show all session entries with destination port pip .Show all session entries with matching filter flag . filter <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays all session entries with matching filter. dport <Destination real port> Displays all session entries with destination port.2 Command Reference /info/slb/sess Session Table Information [Session Table Information Menu] cip . January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.Show all session entries with proxy port filter .0. dip <Destination IP address> Displays all session entries with the destination IP address.Show all session entries with real IP address sp .Show all session entries on sp dump .

144.2.1 http age 6 f:10 EUSPT c (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7a) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) Note: The fields.Alteon OS 22.79 urlwcr age 6 f:123 E RTSP L4-L7 RTSP 3.144. 2.1 rtsp -> 47.2.81.2 Command Reference Table 4-27 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays all session entries on the ingress port. 39. 1 to 13 associated with a session as identified in the above example.1 http -> 1.1.1.16: 172.144.1 rtsp -> 47.12.3. 39.24.21. 39. dump Displays all session entries.81.2. help Displays the description of the session entry.01: 172. Information similar to the following may appear in a session entry dump: 3.8.2. are described in “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 115.1 4586.21.81.168.13 21220 age 10 P The first session is RTSP TCP control connection.81.2.19 1040. 39.2.13 0 age 10 P During client-server port negotiation.2. the destination port shows “rtsp” and server port shows “0” L7 WCR RTSP Chapter 4: The Information Menu 113 315393-J.01: 172.79 http age 4 L4-L7 WCR HTTP 2.21. Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications L4 HTTP 3.19 4586.19 6970.1.1 http -> 47.11 wcr age 4 f:12 E 3.01: 172.12.3.2.1 21220 -> 47. January 2005 .24.1.19 1040. real <IP address> Displays all session entries with real server IP address. 01: 1. 172. The second session is RTSP UDP data connection.2.51 http -> 192.200 44687.12.21.01: 172.2.13 rtsp age 10 EU 3. sp <port number (1-4)> Displays all session entries on switch processor.12.0.01: 172.12.8. 3.2.1 http -> 47.21. 39.21.2.21.1.19 6970.81.2 3567 3.

0. 172.178.20 ftp-data age 10 E NAT 2.13 21220 age 10 P Filtering LinkLB 2.31.215 4098.20.1.19 6970. 39.168.4.09: 172.4.31.30 age 4 EPS C:3 The destination port.4.162.01: 172.4.31.14.00: 237.05: 172.26 http NAT age 2 f:24 E Persistent session 3.4.26 1706.11 age 8 EP c:1 1.81.8.01: 172.84 http -> 192.07: 10.0.200 ftp-data ->172.21. 39.3.16 2559.12.2 Command Reference 3.19 4586.1.31. real server IP and server port are not shown for persistent session.09: 172.2.123 160. 172.4.215 80. 10.2.21.31. 114 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.10.1 rtsp -> 47.31.4.1 21220 -> 47.200 0 172.20 ftp age 10 EU 1.31.52. January 2005 . 205. 172.21.2.200 ftp ->172.81.31.144.0.13 urlwcr age 10 f:100 EU 3.Alteon OS 22.215 4102.3.3.00: 172.12.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E FTP 1.144.31.2.

1.1 http -> 3.1 http age 10 3.2.1 http -> 3.Alteon OS 22. For example: 3.01: 1. 2. If the switch does not find live server.1 1706. It will show “ALLOW”. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 115 .01: 1. this field also shows the real server IP address. For example: 3.3.1. This field contains the real server IP address of the corresponding server that the switch selects to forward the client packet to.2. for load balancing.2.3. This field also shows the real server IP address for filtering. (2) Ingress port (3) Source IP address (4) Source port (5) Destination IP address (6) Destination port (7a) Proxy IP address (7) Proxy Port This field identifies the TCP/UDP source port substituted by the switch.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E (8) Real Server IP Address 315393-J.1 21220 age 10 P For filtering. It will show ALLOW. This field shows the physical port through which the client traffic enters the switch.2.07: 1. This field contains the source IP address from the client’s IP packet. This field identifies the source port from the client’s TCP/UDP packet.1. DENY or NAT instead.1.1 1040.1 1040.1 http-> 192. this field contains the IP address of the real server that the switch selects to forward client packet to.1 http age 10 f:11 2.3.1 rtsp -> 2.01: 1. this field contains the same information as the destination IP address mentioned in field (5). “DENY” or “NAT” instead.2. 2.0. 2. Deny or NAT.2.2.2 Command Reference Session dump information in Alteon OS Field (1) SP number Description This field indicates the Switch Processor number that created the session.2. This field contains the Proxy IP address substituted by the switch.1. This field identifies the destination port from client’s TCP/UDP packet. If the switch does not find a live server. This field identifies the destination IP address from the client’s TCP/UDP packet. Deny or NAT. For load balancing. 2.168.2.3.1.1. this field is the same as destination IP address (as in row 5).1 6970. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow.4.2. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow.1.

For RTSP UDP session. or Cookie Pbind. “Vi”: Indicates the session is a SIP INVITE session.0. the session is freed. this server port is obtained from the client-server negotiation. “E”: Indicates the session is established and will be aged out if no traffic is received within session timeout value. which means the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding client traffic to the real server. (7) and (8) cannot have persistent session. linkslb or nonat. (13) Persistent session user count This counter indicates the number of client sessions created to associate with this persistent session. For example. “Vm”: Indicates the session is a SIP MESSAGE session. wcr. “Vr”: Indicates the session is a SIP REGISTER session.Alteon OS 22.The session is aged out in 10 minutes.The session is aged out in 160 minutes. “Vs”: Indicates the session is a SIP SUBSCRIBE session. This field is the filtering application port for filtering. The user can configure slowage by using the command: /cfg/slb/adv/slowage. “W”: Indicates the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding Layer 7 WCR traffic to the real server. It is for internal use only. “P”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and is not to be aged out. “N”: Indicates no NAT. If no packet is received within the value specified. Fields (6). “Rt”: Indicates the session is TCP rate limiting for every client entry. This field can be urlwcr. (10) Age This is the session timeout value. “Ru”: Indicates UDP rate limiting for every client entry. “L”: Indicates the session is a link load balance session.2 Command Reference Field (9) Server port Description This field is the same as the destination port (field 6) for load balancing except for the RTSP UDP session. idslb. January 2005 . “Ri”: Indicates the session is ICMP rate limiting per-client entry. “U”: Indicates the session is Layer 7 delayed binding and the switch is trying to open TCP connection to the real server. if: age 10 . age < 160 . 116 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. This indicates that slowage is used. “S”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and the application is SSL session ID. (11) Filter number (12) Flag This field indicates the session created by filtering code as a result of the IP header keys matching the filtering criteria.

Show Global SLB geo .Show Global SLB site .Show Global SLB dump . 315393-J. geo Displays the Global SLB geographical preference information. the number of the local and remote virtual servers. The menu for this feature displays the following information: [Global SLB Information Menu] virt . site Displays the Global SLB remote site information. the number of virtual services on those virtual servers. and the group of real servers associated with the local and remote virtual servers.2 Command Reference /info/slb/gslb Global SLB Information Menu An Alteon OS running Global SLB selects the most appropriate site to direct the client traffic for a given domain during the initial client connection.Show Global SLB rule . January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 117 .0.Show all Global virtual server information remote site information rule information geographical preference information SLB information Table 4-28 Global SLB Information Menu Options (/info/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the Global SLB virtual server information such as the domain name of the virtual server.Alteon OS 22. dump Displays all Global SLB information.

1.20. backup none proxy enabled.20.1.20. 2 ms.200. 1 ms. vlan any 200: group 1. radius snoop disabled real servers: 1: 210.20. 00:01:02:70:4d:4a. backup none. group 88.102. up Port 1: 2: 3: 4: state: filt disabled. port 8.101.0. health 3.20.1. filters: 200 filt disabled.101. vlan 1.1. filters: 50 200 118 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J. port 7. up 20.1. filters: 200 idslb filt enabled. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 3: urltwo 4: urlthree Redirect filter state: Action redir dport http. 00:60:cf:47:5c:1e virtual ports: http: rport http.200.200. up Virtual server state: 1: 20.2. health 3. health 3. health 3.20. vlan 1. backup none. 3 ms. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 1: any 2: urlone 27: 20. up 20.1. January 2005 .2. 00:01:02:71:9c:a6. 00:01:02:c1:4b:48. up 2: 210.Alteon OS 22.20.2.2.20. 00:03:47:07:a4:9e. port 1. filters: 80 idslb filt enabled. backup none. backup none. vlan 1. port 6. vlan 1. rport 3128.20.20. up 210. 2 ms. backup none. health 3.102. dbind HTTP Application: urlslb real servers: 26: 20.2 Command Reference /info/slb/dump Show All Layer 4 Information Real 1: 2: 26: 27: server state: 210.

Alteon OS 22. any.2 Command Reference /info/link Link Status Information Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Speed ----10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 10/100 1000 1000 1000 1000 Duplex -------any any any any any any any any half any any any any any any any any any any any any any any any full full full full Flow Ctrl --TX-----RX-yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Link -----down down down down down down down down up down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down down Use this command to display link status information about each port on an Alteon Application Switch slot. or 1000) Duplex mode (half.0. or auto) Link status (up or down) 315393-J. yes. 10/100. full. 100. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. including: Port number Port speed (10. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 119 .

2 Command Reference /info/port Port Information Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Tag --n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n RMON ---e d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d PVID ---1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BWC ----256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 NAME -------------VLAN(s) --------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Port information includes: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n) Whether Remote Monitor is enabled or disabled Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership Whether RMON is enabled or disabled on the port 120 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 .

cont Displays the BWM contract information configured on this switch. receive higher priority versus non-criticaltraffic. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 121 . BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information.2 Command Reference /info/bwm Bandwidth Management Information Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications.Alteon OS 22. It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic.BWM IP User Entries Information Menu cont .Show Bandwidth Management Contract information Table 4-29 Bandwidth Management Information Command Syntax and Usage ipuser Displays the IP user entries with their IP addresses. See page 122 for sample output. 315393-J. You can see the following information on your switch when you execute this command: [Bandwidth Management Information Menu] ipuser . such as e-commerce transactions.0.

0. but only for the specified sp number.Show all IP user entries Table 4-30 BWM IP User Information Menu (/info/bwm/ipuser) Command Syntax and Usage ip <IP address> Displays the IP user entries for a specific IP address.Show all IP user entries on sp dump .2 Command Reference /info/bwm/ipuser BWM IP User Information Menu [BWM IP User Entries Information Menu] ip . sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the IP user entries on the Switch Processor. dump Displays all the IP user entries. 1-256> Displays the IP user entries for a specific BWM contract.Show all IP user entries for a contract sp . cont <BW Contract number.Alteon OS 22. 122 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-J.Show all IP user entries with IP address cont . January 2005 . The same fields as described in cont above are displayed.

---------.0.105 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.0. January 2005 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 123 . Contract Rate: the BWM contract number of the ipuser entry.108 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11. Octets: the number of octets processed on this ipuser entry Discards: the number of octets discarded on this ipuser entry Allowed Rate: the rate of traffic allowed for this IP address Offered Rate: the rate including the discards for this IP address 315393-J.1.1.-------.0.100 86 21500000 301001440 1953 29297 2 10 11.0. IP address: the IP address of the ipuser entry.0.0.2 Command Reference The format of the output of the above commands: SP Contract IP Address Age Octets Discards Allowed Offered Rate Rate -.----2 11 11.Alteon OS 22.--.1.107 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.0.0.0.100 86 1076600 0 97 97 2 10 11.0.1.106 16 199940 0 97 97 2 10 11.102 16 198402 0 96 96 2 10 11.101 16 201478 0 98 98 2 10 11.104 16 204554 0 99 99 2 10 11.1.---------.---------------. Age: the age of the entry in seconds.103 16 196864 0 96 96 2 10 11.1.0.1.1.1.1.1.109 16 203016 0 99 99 SP Rate: the switch processor number (1-4) of the ipuser entry.0.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/bwm/cont
BWM Contract Information
Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement:enabled BWM history will be mailed in a minute to 'abcd' at host '100.81.138.26' BWM IP user table entries 64k

Contract Policy Per User Traffic Num Name Prec Hard Soft Resv Limit Key State Shaping 1 123456789012345 2 1 50M 1M 500K E D 2 vlan 4 1 60M 2M 500K E D 3 filter 7 20 2M 1M 500K E D 4 5 1 2M 1M 500K D D 5 512 1 2M 1M 500K E D 10 10 1 1M 0K 0K 500K sip E D 11 11 1 100M 80M 500K 2M sip E D 12 12 1 2M 1M 500K E D 13 13 1 3M 1M 500K E D 14 14 1 4M 400K 100K E D 15 15 1 2M 1M 500K E D

This command displays information about any configured contracts and the BWM policies applied to the contracts. Table 4-31 BWM Contract Information
Field Contract Policy Description

Displays the BWM contract number. Displays specific information about a policy applied to a contract. Includes the following:
The policy number applied to the contract Prec: the precedence applied to the policy Hard: the hard limit applied to the policy Soft: the soft limit applied to the policy Resv: the reserve limit applied to the policy

124

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 4-31 BWM Contract Information
Field Per User Description These two columns display information for an ipuser limit, if applied to the contract. Includes the following: Limit: the user rate limit applied to the ipuser. Key: If an ipuser rate limit is enforced, this field displays whether the user limit is enforced on a source IP address (sip) or a destination IP address (dip). Displays whether the BWM contract is enabled (E) or disabled (D).

State Traffic Shaping

Displays whether Traffic Shaping is enabled (E) or disabled (D) for this contract.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

125

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/security Security Information
This command displays information about the current security settings that includes: rate threshold for security logging
whether the out-of-order IP fragment packets have the option of allow or deny on the filters

the current IP addresses in the Access Control List (ACL) the current UDP blast protection settings the current port security settings
Current security settings: seclog 128 fragment allow pdepth none Current IP address ACL settings: Number Address Mask -------- ---------------- ---------------Current UDP blast protection settings: UDP Port ----------1-5000 Packet Rate (per second) -----------------------20

Port security state:

126

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/info/swkey Software Enabled Keys
For optional Layer 4 switching software, the information would be displayed as follows:
Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Bandwidth Management Security Pack Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Inbound Linklb Intelligent Traffic Management

Software key information includes a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. For information on ordering optional software license keys, see “How to Get Help” on page 18.

/info/dump Information Dump
Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

127

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

128

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

315393-J, January 2005

CHAPTER 5

The Statistics Menu
You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics.

/stats Statistics Menu
[Statistics Menu] port - Port Stats Menu l2 - Layer 2 Stats Menu l3 - Layer 3 Stats Menu slb - Server Load Balancing (L4-7) Stats Menu bwm - Bandwidth Management Stats Menu mp - MP-specific Stats Menu sp - SP-specific Stats Menu security - Security Stats Menu snmp - Show SNMP stats ntp - Show NTP stats pm - Port Mirroring Stats Menu mgmt - Management Port Stats dump - Dump all stats

315393-J, January 2005

129

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats)
Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. To view menu options, see page 131. l2 Displays Layer 2 Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 144. l3 Displays Layer3 Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 148. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing (SLB) Menu. To view menu options, see page 167. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Menu. To view menu options, see page 198. mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated. To view menu options, see page 205. sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays Switch Processor-Specific Menu. To view menu options, see page 210. security Displays Security Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 212. snmp Displays SNMP Statistics. See page 218 for a sample output and description of SNMP statistics. ntp <clear> Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. See page 222 for a sample output and a description of NTP Statistics. You can execute the clear command option to delete all statistics. pm Displays Port Mirroring Statistics Menu. To view menu options, see page 224. mgmt Displays interface statistics for the Management Port. See page 224 for sample output. dump Dumps all switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. For details, see page 225.

130

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/stats/port <port number> Port Statistics Menu
This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
[Port Statistics Menu] brg - Show bridging ("dot1") stats ether - Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats if - Show interface ("if") stats ip - Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats link - Show link stats rmon - Show RMON stats dump - Dump port stats clear - Clear all port stats

Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port)
Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 132 for a sample output and the description of statistics. ether Displays Ethernet (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 133 for a sample output and the description of statistics. if Displays interface statistics for the port. See page 136 for a sample output and the description of statistics. ip Displays IP statistics for the port. See page 138 for a sample output and the description of statistics. link Displays link statistics for the port. See page 139 for a sample output and the description of statistics. rmon Displays Remote Monitor (RMON) statistics for the port. See page 140 for a sample output and the description of statistics. dump Displays all the port statistics.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

131

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) (Continued)
Command Syntax and Usage clear This command clears all the statistics on this port.

/stats/port <port number>/brg
Bridging Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port.
Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: dot1PortOutFrames: dot1PortInDiscards: dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: dot1StpPortForwardTransitions:

63242584 63277826 0 0 NA NA 0

Table 5-3 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg)
Statistics dot1PortInFrames Description The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames. Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is, filtered) by the Forwarding Process. The total number of Forwarding Database entries, which have been or would have been learnt, but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. If this counter is increasing, it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing, it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent.

dot1PortOutFrames

dot1PortInDiscards

dot1TpLearnedEntry Discards

132

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu

315393-J, January 2005

It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges. The number of frames discarded by this port due to an excessive size.2 Command Reference Table 5-3 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg) Statistics dot1BasePortDelay ExceededDiscards Description The number of frames discarded by this port due to excessive transit delay through the bridge. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user). It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges. The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. dot1BasePortMtu ExceededDiscards dot1StpPortForward Transitions /stats/port <port number>/ether Ethernet Statistics This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: dot3StatsFCSErrors: dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsSQETestErrors: dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: dot3StatsLateCollisions: dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsAlignment Errors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check.0. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 133 .3 Layer Management.Alteon OS 22. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.

This count does not include frames received with frametoo-long or frame-too-short errors. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.31998 Edition. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object. according to the conventions of IEEE 802.Alteon OS 22.0. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.2. January 2005 . This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.6.802. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.4. dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames dot3StatsSQETestErrors 134 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. section 7. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts.2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsFCSErrors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check.3 Layer Management. The SQE TEST ERROR is set in accordance with the rules for the verification of the SQE detection mechanism in the PLS Carrier Sense Function as described in IEEE Std. A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sub layer for a particular interface. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision. ifOutMulticastPkts. ifOutMulticastPkts. Note: Coding errors detected by the physical layer for speeds above 10 Mb/s will cause the frame to fail FCS check. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 135 . The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than one slotTime into the transmission of a packet. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. In particular. The count represented by an instance of this object does not include frames involved in collisions. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt.2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions Description A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a particular interface. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.0. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a transmission attempt.Alteon OS 22. dot3StatsLateCollisions dot3StatsExcessive Collisions dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors 315393-J. the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object.

A count of individual MAC frames for which the transmission (successful or otherwise) on a particular interface occurs after the frame has experienced exactly the number of collisions specified by the index. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. No other instance of dot3CollFrequencies would be incremented in this example.0. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object. January 2005 . The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. a frame which is transmitted after experiencing exactly 4 collisions would be indicated by incrementing only dot3CollFrequencies [4].2 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsFrameTooLongs Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.Alteon OS 22. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors dot3CollFrequencies /stats/port <port number>/if Interface Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object. an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. For example. or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters Octets: 51697080313 UcastPkts: 65356399 BroadcastPkts: 0 MulticastPkts: 0 Discards: 0 Errors: 0 ifHCOut Counters 51721056808 65385714 6516 0 0 0 136 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. In particular.3 Layer Management. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.

and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub. including the MAC header and FCS. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 137 . For a MAC layer protocol. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. This does include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames received on this interface. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer. The number of packets.layer. For a MAC layer protocol.2 Command Reference Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCInOctets Description The number of octets in valid MAC frames received on the interface. including those that were discarded or not sent. The number of packets. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.Alteon OS 22. including the MAC header and FCS. This does not include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface.0. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. ifHCInUcastPkts ifHCInBroadcastPkts ifHCInMulticastPkts ifHCInDiscards ifHCInErrors ifHCOutOctets ifHCOutUcastPkts ifHCOutBroadcastPkts ifHCOutMulticastPkts ifHCOutDiscards 315393-J. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. The number of packets delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub) layer. The number of octets transmitted in valid MAC frames on this interface. including those that were discarded or not sent.layer. dot3StatsFrameTooLongs. and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors and dot3StatsSymbolErrors. dot3StatsFCSErrors. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. The sum for this interface of dot3statsAlignmentErrors. The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer. and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer. including those that were discarded or not sent.

0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways.Route option processing was successful. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipTtlExceeds: ipLANDattacks: 0 0 0 0 0 0 ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: 0 0 Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. Class E). /stats/port <port number>/ip Interface Protocol Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions. including those received in error. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. dot3StatsLateCollisions.0. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. and the Source. This count includes invalid addresses (for example. this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch).2 Command Reference Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCOutErrors Description The sum for this interface of: dot3statsSQETestErrors. January 2005 . dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors and dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors. 0. ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 138 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch).Alteon OS 22.0. The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.0.

Alteon OS 22. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 139 . The number of IP datagram for which an ICMP TTL exceeded message was sent.0. Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 4 Table 5-7 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link) Statistics linkStateChange Description The total number of link state changes. The number of packets that have the same source and destination IP address. but which were discarded (for example. for lack of buffer space).2 Command Reference Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. ipInDelivers ipTtlExceeds ipLANDattacks /stats/port <port number>/link Link Statistics This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port. 315393-J. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP).

4 ) + ( Octets × 0. respectively. 000 The result of this equation is the percent value of utilization. and the number of seconds in the interval is Interval. RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 129677 1485 734 712 0 0 0 0 0 0 954 578 35 26 16 8 Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsDrop Events Description The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources. The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). If greater precision is desired. it is just the number of times this condition has been detected.0. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/rmon RMON Statistics This menu option enables you to display the remote monitor statistics of the selected port. This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of utilization (which is the percent utilization of the ethernet segment). the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval. The differences in the sampled values are Pkts and Octets. These values are used to calculate the utilization as follows: Pkts × ( 9. etherStatsOctets 140 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Note that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped.8 ) Utilization = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Interval × 10.Alteon OS 22.6 + 6.

The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).2. The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 milliseconds and 150 milliseconds. but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment.5 (10Base-5) and section 10.Alteon OS 22. etherStatsBroadcastPkts etherStatsMulticastPkts etherStatsCRCAlign Errors etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts etherStatsFragments etherStatsJabbers 315393-J. inclusive.0. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.3. and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 141 .1. The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits.4 (10Base-2). but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. but including FCS octets). This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits. broadcast packets.) The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. and multicast packets) received. Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE802.3 section 8. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.2 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsPkts Description The total number of packets (including bad packets. Note that this does not include multicast packets. The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. (A runt is a packet that is less than 64 bytes. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits.1. The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits. These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms.

1. The value returned will depend on the location of the RMON probe. January 2005 .3 (10Base-2) of IEEE standard 802.3k) plus receiver collisions observed on any coax segments to which the repeater is connected. A repeater port must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).3 defines a collision as the simultaneous presence of signals on the DO and RD circuits (transmitting and receiving at the same time). Thus probes placed on a station and a repeater.0. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Thus a probe placed on a repeater port could record more collisions than a probe connected to a station on the same segment would. if three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. etherStatsPkts64Octets etherStatsPkts65to127Octets etherStatsPkts128to255Octets etherStatsPkts256to511Octets etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets 142 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2. Note also that an RMON probe inside a repeater should ideally report collisions between the repeater and one or more other hosts (transmit collisions as defined by IEEE 802. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). 14. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).2 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsCollisions Description The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.2.Alteon OS 22.3 states that a station must detect a collision. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). in the receive mode. Section 8. should report the same number of collisions.3.1. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Probe location plays a much smaller role when considering 10Base-T.1.3 (10Base-5) and section 10. A 10Base-T station can only detect collisions when it is transmitting.4 (10Base-T) of IEEE standard 802.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 143 .0.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/dump Port Dump Statistics Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: 1284 dot1PortOutFrames: 142 dot1PortInDiscards: 130 dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: 0 dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: NA dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: NA dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: 0 dot3StatsFCSErrors: 0 dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsSQETestErrors: NA dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: 0 dot3StatsLateCollisions: 0 dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: NA dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: 1 dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: 0 dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: NA -----------------------------------------------------------------Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters ifHCOut Counters Octets: 124166 19560 UcastPkts: 39 27 BroadcastPkts: 631 14 MulticastPkts: 614 101 Discards: 130 0 Errors: 1 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: 0 ipInAddrErrors: 0 ipForwDatagrams: 0 ipInUnknownProtos: 0 ipInDiscards: 0 ipInDelivers: 0 ipTtlExceeds: 0 ipLANDattacks: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------ 315393-J.

January 2005 .Show STG stats Table 5-9 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2) Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays Forwarding Database statistics.0. To view statistics and their description. 144 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. stg Displays Spanning Tree Group statistics.Show LACP stats stg . see page 147. To view statistics and their description. see page 146. see page 145.Show FDB stats lacp . lacp <port number (1 to max num ports)> Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol statistics.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 123840 1406 698 669 0 0 0 0 0 0 906 548 35 25 16 8 /stats/l2 Layer 2 Statistics Menu [Layer 2 Statistics Menu] fdb . To view statistics and their description.

Number of entry lookups in the Forwarding Database. FDB statistics are described in the following table: Table 5-10 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/l2/fdb) Statistic creates current lookups finds find_or_c’s deletes hiwat Description Number of entries created in the Forwarding Database. and unsuccessful searches. Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database. Number of successful searches in the Forwarding Database. Number of unsuccessful searches made in the Forwarding Database. Number of search failures in the Forwarding Database.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/fdb FDB Statistics FDB statistics: creates: current: lookups: finds: find_or_c's: max: 9611 58 850254 5832 11874 16384 deletes: hiwat: lookup fails: find fails: overflows: 9553 65 151373 0 0 This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database.0. Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 145 . finds. lookup fails find fails overflows max 315393-J. including the number of new entries.Alteon OS 22. Number of entries overflowing the Forwarding Database. Number of maximum Forwarding Database entries supported by the switch. Number of entries deleted from the Forwarding Database. Number of entries found or created in the Forwarding Database.

0.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/lacp LACP Statistics >> Layer 2 Statistics# lacp 1 port 1 Valid LACPDUs received Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted - 9394 0 0 0 0 8516 0 0 Table 5-11 LACP Statistics Parameters (/stats?l2/lacp) Field Description Valid LACPDUs received The number of LACPDUs that the switch received on this port. The number of valid Marker Responses that the switch received on this port. The number of LACPDUs transmitted out of this port. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.The number of Marker Responses transmitted out of this port. Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted The number of valid Marker PDUs that the switch received on this port. The number of illegal LACP subtype received on this port. The number of unknown version or TLV type that the switch received on this port. mitted 146 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of Marker PDUs transmitted out of this port. Marker Rsp PDUs trans.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 147 .0. Xmt Cfg 315393-J. Displays the number of configuration BPDUs transmitted.------------------1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 8 0 0 9 139046 176 10 0 0 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 18 0 0 19 0 0 20 0 0 21 0 0 22 0 0 23 0 0 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 27 0 0 28 0 0 Xmt Cfg ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xmt TCN ---------0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-12 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg) Field Port Rcv cfg Rcv TCN Description Displays the port number.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Statistics Spanning Tree Group 1: Port Rcv Cfg Rcv TCN ----. Displays the number of configuration BPDUs received Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages received.

arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics.Dump layer 3 stats Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays OSPF statistics Menu.Show VRRP stats dns .Show ARP stats vrrp .Clear IP stats dump .0. route Displays route statistics.Show ICMP stats if .2 Command Reference Table 5-12 Spanning Tree Group Statistics Parameters (/stats/l2/stg) Field Xmt TCN Description Displays the number of TCN (Topology Change Notification) messages transmitted /stats/l3 Layer 3 Statistics Menu [Layer 3 Statistics Menu] ospf . See page 159 for sample output.Show TCP stats udp .Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .Show DNS stats icmp .OSPF Statistics Menu ip . ip Displays IP statistics. See page 157 for sample output.Show IP interface ("if") stats tcp . See page 150 for sample output. 148 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Show route stats arp .Show IP stats route .Show UDP stats ifclear . See page 155 for sample output.Clear IP interface ("if") stats ipclear .

See page 160 for sample output. See page 163 for sample output. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) See page 159 for sample output. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics. If you want to capture dump data to a file. See page 161 for sample output.2 Command Reference Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage vrrp When virtual routers are configured. See page 167 for sample output. tcp Displays TCP statistics. dns Displays Domain Name Server/System (DNS) statistics. icmp Displays ICMP statistics. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays IP interface statistics for the management processors. ifclear Clears IP interface statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging Layer 3 switch performance. See page 165 for sample output.Alteon OS 22. ipclear Clears IP statistics. udp Displays UDP statistics. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. dump Dumps all Layer 3 switch statistics. 315393-J.0. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP interface statistics. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 149 .

See page 151 for sample output and details. 150 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Show global stats aindex .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf OSPF Statistics Menu [OSPF stats Menu] general .Show interface(s) stats Table 5-14 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays global statistics.0.Show area(s) stats if . January 2005 . if <interface number (1-256)> Displays interface statistics. aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays area index statistics.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 151 .2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf/general OSPF Global Statistics The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.Alteon OS 22. OSPF stats ---------Rx/Tx Stats: Pkts hello database ls requests ls acks ls updates Nbr change stats: hello start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down Timers kickoff hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export Rx -------0 23 4 3 7 9 Tx -------0 518 12 1 7 7 Intf change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer backup nbr change 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 4 2 0 0 2 0 5 514 1028 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J.0.

The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.Alteon OS 22. The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.0. Description Tx Pkts Rx Hello Tx Hello Rx Database Tx Database Rx ls Requests Tx ls Requests Rx ls Acks Tx ls Acks Rx ls Updates Tx ls Updates 152 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) Statistics Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. January 2005 . The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces. Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either: a) Has an unexpected DD sequence number b) Unexpectedly has the init bit set c) Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet. The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave relationship has been negotiated. The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers.Alteon OS 22. in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. and sequence numbers have been exchanged. in the initial state of a neighbor conversation) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. in an adjacency's final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets.0. The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is. The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Nbr Change Stats: hello The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces. January 2005 . an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 153 Description Start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down 315393-J. The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors.

The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas. The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. Description unloop wait timer backup nbr change Timers Kickoff: hello The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of interfaces. indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired. The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired. The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas. January 2005 . The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces. retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export 154 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.0. The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired. connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas. The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired. The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 5-15 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Intf Change Stats: hello down loop The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas.

including those received in error. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers. other format errors. and so forth. version number mismatch.Alteon OS 22. this counter will include only those packets. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. and the Source. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways.0. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. time-to-live exceeded. The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. 0. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). Class E). This count includes invalid addresses (for example. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 155 .2 Command Reference /stats/l3/ip IP Statistics IP statistics: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipOutDiscards: ipReasmReqds: ipReasmFails: ipFragFails: ipRoutingDiscards: ipReasmTimeout: 3115873 35447 500504 2334166 4 0 0 0 0 5 ipInHdrErrors: ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: ipOutRequests: ipOutNoRoutes: ipReasmOKs: ipFragOKs: ipFragCreates: ipDefaultTTL: 1 0 0 1010542 4 0 0 0 255 Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. including bad checksums. errors discovered in processing their IP options.0. ipInHdrErrors ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 315393-J.Route option processing was successful.

The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be. Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams. The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination. because their Don't Fragment flag was set.0.assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out. The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch). which meet this no-route criterion. but which were discarded (for example. for lack of buffer space). for lack of buffer space). The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.assembled. The number of failures detected by the IP re.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down. January 2005 . for example. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. The number of IP datagrams successfully re. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. and so forth). but which were discarded (for example. The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity (the switch). ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails ipFragCreates 156 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. errors. The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity (the switch). The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received.

2 Command Reference Table 5-16 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipRoutingDiscards Description The number of routing entries. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries.------------. The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch). whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. ipDefaultTTL ipReasmTimeout /stats/l3/route Route Statistics Route statistics: ipRoutesCur: 3 ipRoutesHighWater: 3 ipRoutesMax: 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP Route statistics: SP ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax --. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 157 . The maximum number of seconds. which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid.------------------. which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch).------------1 3 3 4096 2 3 3 4096 3 3 3 4096 4 3 3 4096 -----------------------------------------------------------------RIP statistics: ripInPkts: ripDiscardPkts: BGP statistics: bgpInPkts: bgpBadPkts: bgpRoutesAdded: bgpRoutesCur: bgpRoutesIgnored: 0 ripOutPkts: 0 ripRoutesAgedOut: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 bgpOutPkts: bgpSessFailures: bgpRoutesRemoved: bgpRoutesFailed: bgpRoutesFiltered: 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22.

The total number of routes that were added to the routing table. The total number of current BGP routes. The total number of outstanding routes in the route table. January 2005 . The total number of routes ignored because the peer was not connected locally or multihop was not configured. The total number of BGP packets dropped. bgpRoutesFiltered 158 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Description ripRoutesAgedOut BGP statistics: bgpInPkts bgpOutPkts bgpBadPkts bgpSessFailures bgpRoutesAdded bgpRoutesRemoved bgpRoutesCur bgpRoutesFailed bgpRoutesIgnored The total number of BGP packets received.2 Command Reference Table 5-17 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics Route Statistics & SP Route Statistics: ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax RIP statistics: ripInPkts ripOutPkts ripDiscardPkts The total number of good RIP advertisement packets received. The maximum number of supported routes. The total number of RIP advertisement packets sent. The total number of failed sessions.Alteon OS 22. The total number of BGP packets sent. The total number of BGP routes that failed to add in the routing table. The total number of routes that were removed from the routing table. The total number of RIP advertisement packets received that were dropped. The total number of routes learned via RIP that has aged out. The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table. The total number of routes dropped by the filter.0.

If the master fails.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/arp ARP statistics This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics. The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported. based on a number of priority criteria.--------------. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.0.--------------------. When virtual routers are configured. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 159 . The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table.--------------1 1 1 8192 2 1 1 8192 3 1 1 8192 4 1 1 8192 Table 5-18 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp) Statistics arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax Description The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table. /stats/l3/vrrp VRRP Statistics Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. MP ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: 2 arpEntriesHighWater: 2 arpEntriesMax: 8192 -----------------------------------------------------------------SP ARP statistics: SP arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax --. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address.

160 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: dnsBadRequests: 0 0 dnsOutRequests: 0 Table 5-20 DNS Statistics (/stats/l3/dns) Statistics dnsInRequests dnsOutRequests dnsBadRequests Description The total number of DNS request packets that have been received. The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped. The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted. The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed: VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: vrrpOutAdvers: vrrpBadVersion: vrrpBadAddress: vrrpBadPassword: 0 0 0 0 0 vrrpBadAdvers: vrrpBadVrid: vrrpBadData: vrrpBadInterval: 0 0 0 0 Table 5-19 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp) Statistics vrrpInAdvers vrrpBadAdvers vrrpOutAdvers vrrpBadVersion vrrpBadVrid vrrpBadAddress vrrpBadData vrrpBadPassword vrrpBadInterval Description The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been received.0. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped. /stats/l3/dns DNS Statistics This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics.

The number of ICMP Redirect messages received. The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received. bad length. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. icmpInErrors icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps icmpInAddrMasks 315393-J. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 161 . Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/icmp ICMP Statistics ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: icmpInDestUnreachs: icmpInParmProbs: icmpInRedirects: icmpInEchoReps: icmpInTimestampReps: icmpInAddrMaskReps: icmpOutErrors: icmpOutTimeExcds: icmpOutSrcQuenchs: icmpOutEchos: icmpOutTimestamps: icmpOutAddrMasks: 245802 41 0 0 244350 0 0 0 0 0 253777 0 0 icmpInErrors: icmpInTimeExcds: icmpInSrcQuenchs: icmpInEchos: icmpInTimestamps: icmpInAddrMasks: icmpOutMsgs: icmpOutDestUnreachs: icmpOutParmProbs: icmpOutRedirects: icmpOutEchoReps: icmpOutTimestampReps: icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 1393 0 0 18 0 0 253810 15 0 0 18 0 0 Table 5-21 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInMsgs Description The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received. and so forth). The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.0. stop sending data) messages received. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.

The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send. The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.0. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. since hosts do not send redirects. January 2005 . this object will always be zero.Alteon OS 22. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter's value. The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. stop sending data) messages sent. For a host. icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps 162 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.2 Command Reference Table 5-21 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs Description The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.

The number of packets. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing. The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer).0. This object is deprecated in favor of ifInMulticastPkts and ifInBroadcastPkts. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 163 . For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support protocol multiplexing the number of transmission units received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. For packet-oriented interfaces. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The number of packets.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/if <interface number> Interface Statistics IP interface 1 statistics: ifInOctets: 48948386 ifInNUCastPkts: 167895 ifInErrors: 0 ifOutOctets: 27100789 ifOutNUcastPkts: 218652 ifOutErrors: 0 ifInUcastPkts: ifInDiscards: ifInUnknownProtos: ifOutUcastPkts: ifOutDiscards: ifStateChanges 220553 0 0 441938 0 1 Table 5-22 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifInOctets Description The total number of octets received on the interface.Alteon OS 22. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer). the number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. this counter will always be 0. ifInUcastPkts ifInNUCastPkts ifInDiscards ifInErrors ifInUnknownProtos 315393-J. the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. including framing characters. For packet-oriented interfaces.

the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors. including framing characters. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifStateChanges 164 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. January 2005 . which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.0. including those that were discarded or not sent. including those that were discarded or not sent. the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. This object is deprecated in favor of ifOutMulticastPkts and ifOutBroadcastPkts.Alteon OS 22. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. The number of outbound packets.2 Command Reference Table 5-22 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifOutOctets Description The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface. The number of times an interface has transitioned from either down to up or from up to down. For packet-oriented interfaces. and which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted.

when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). tcpRtoMin tcpRtoMax tcpMaxConn tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens 315393-J. In particular. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch) can support. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic.0. measured in milliseconds. this object should contain the value -1. In particular. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.2 Command Reference /stats/l3/tcp TCP Statistics TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: tcpRtoMax: tcpActiveOpens: tcpAttemptFails: tcpInSegs: tcpRetransSegs: tcpCurBuff: tcpCurInConn: tcpCurLstnConn: tcpAllocTCBFails: 4 240000 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 tcpRtoMin: tcpMaxConn: tcpPassiveOpens: tcpEstabResets: tcpOutSegs: tcpInErrs: tcpCurConn: tcpCurOutConn: tcpOutRsts: 0 1600 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 Table 5-23 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpRtoAlgorithm Description The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets. The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 165 . an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793.Alteon OS 22. measured in milliseconds.

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSEWAIT state. The total number of remotely-initiated TCP connections. The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag. The total number of TCP ports on which the switch is listening.that is. The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack. January 2005 .0. The total number of segments received. This count includes segments received on currently established connections. including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets. plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state. the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. The total number of segments sent. The total number of segments retransmitted . including those received in error.Alteon OS 22. bad TCP checksums). The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened. The total number of segments received in error (for example.2 Command Reference Table 5-23 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpAttemptFails Description The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state. tcpEstabResets tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpCurBuff tcpCurConn tcpCurInConn tcpCurOutConn tcpCurLstnConn tcpOutRsts tcpAllocTCBFails 166 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of switch-originated TCP connection requests.

Show FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats rtsp . udpNoPorts /stats/slb Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu] sp .SLB Switch SP Stats Menu gslb .0. The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.Show DNS SLB stats wap .Show WAP SLB stats maint .Show maintenance stats sip .Alteon OS 22. The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch).Show auxiliary session table stats dump .Clear non-operational Server Load Balancing stats aux .Show Layer 7 stats ssl .Show SSL SLB stats ftp . January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 167 .Show SIP SLB stats clear .Show real server group stats virt .Show virtual server stats filt .Dump all SLB statistics 315393-J.Global SLB Stats Menu real .2 Command Reference /stats/l3/udp UDP Statistics UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: udpInErrors: 54 0 udpOutDatagrams: udpNoPorts: 43 1578077 Table 5-24 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp) Statistics udpInDatagrams udpOutDatagrams udpInErrors Description The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch. The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port.Show RTSP SLB stats dns .Show filter stats layer7 .Show real server stats group .

see page 170. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. see page 179. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the total number of times any filter has been used. See page 187 for sample output.Alteon OS 22. See page 182 for sample output. 168 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server. See page 180 for sample output. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the following real server statistics: Number of times the real server has failed its health checks Number of sessions currently open on the real server Total sessions the real server was assigned Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server Real server transmit/receive octets See page 179 for sample output.2 Command Reference Table 5-25 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the server load balancing statistics menu. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. see page 174. layer7 Displays Layer 7 statistics. For per-service octet counters.0. see page 179. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group. January 2005 . To view menu options. ssl Displays SSL server load balancing statistics. See page 181 for sample output. See page 190 for sample output. Real server transmit/receive octets. gslb Displays the Global SLB Statistics menu. group <real server group number (1-256)> Displays the following real server group statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. For per-service octet counters. For more information. Real server transmit/receive octets. rtsp Displays RTSP SLB statistics. See page 186 for sample output. See page 181 for sample output. ftp Displays FTP SLB parsing and NAT statistics. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the following virtual server statistics: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server.

set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.2 Command Reference Table 5-25 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dns Displays DNS SLB statistics. sip Displays SIP SLB statistics. dump Dumps all switch SLB statistics. To view the statistics reset by this command. See page 194 for sample output. See page 192 for sample output. aux Displays auxiliary session table statistics. See page 191 for sample output. refer to Table 5-48 on page 196. wap Displays WAP SLB statistics. 315393-J. This command does not reset the switch and does not affect the following counters: Counters required for Layer 4 and Layer 7 operation (such as current real server sessions). All related SNMP counters. clear [y|n] Clears all non-operating SLB statistics on the Alteon Application Switch. resetting them to zero. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. To save dump data to a file.0. maint Displays SLB maintenance statistics. See page 196 for sample output.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 169 .

Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing SP Statistics Menu] real . /stats/slb/sp/real <real server number> SP Real Server Statistics Port 1 Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Octets: 3 3 24 170 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Show auxiliary session table stats clear .Show filter stats maint . maint Displays the SP maintenance statistics.Show maintenance stats aux .Show real server group stats virt . See page 170 for a sample output.Clear SP stats Table 5-26 SP Statistics Menu options (/stats/slb/sp) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays real server statistics of the switch port. clear Deletes all the SP statistics. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays statistics of the filter.Show real server stats group . group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays real server group statistics of the switch port.Show virtual server stats filt . See page 172 for a sample output.0. aux Displays the statistics of the auxiliary session table. See page 171 for a sample output. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays statistics of the virtual server. See page 171 for a sample output. January 2005 . See page 171 for a sample output.

-------200.-------1 200.10.100 40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/filt <filter number> SP Filter Statistics SP 1 Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 2 315393-J.10.100.-------.-------.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/group <real group server number> SP Real Group Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.100.-------.10.---------.-------1 200.10.--------------.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/virt <virtual server number> SP Virtual Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.--------------.100.--------------.15 20 77 12 ---.100.---------. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 171 .-------.15 20 77 12 ---.14 20 60 9 2 200.14 20 60 9 2 200.10.--------------.100.0.---------.Alteon OS 22.---------.

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/maint SP Maintenance Statistics SP 1 SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: Non TCP/IP frames: UDP datagrams: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: IP fragment sessions: IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: 524276 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-27 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds).Alteon OS 22. Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled. Terminated Sessions Allocation Failures UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs 172 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .0. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on.

There are no real servers (in the case of redirection filters. When there are no available session entries. This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online.This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has sions processed so far. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because of one of the following reasons: 1. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit.Alteon OS 22. IP fragment table full This counter indicates how many times session table is full.0. Free service pool entries 315393-J. No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks No TCP Control Bits Invalid reset packet drops Total IP fragment ses. but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN.) 3. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 173 . 2. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports. The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header.2 Command Reference Table 5-27 SP Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/sp/maint) Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. They matched an active filter with the deny action set. Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards This represents the current number of fragment sessions. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client.

Clear all Global SLB stats dump . To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen.Alteon OS 22.Show Global SLB virtual server stats site .Show all Global SLB stats Table 5-28 Global SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Where the real server number represents the real server ID on this switch.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb Global SLB Statistics Menu [Global SLB Statistics Menu] real . see page 177. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the network.Show Global SLB maintenance stats clear . network <network. To view an example. see page 176. January 2005 . rule <rule. see page 175. clear Deletes all Global SLB statistics.Show Global SLB remote site stats network . site <remote site. maint To view an example and description of Global SLB maintenance statistics.0. dump Displays all Global SLB statistics. geo Displays Global SLB statistics for the geographical preference. 174 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the rule. see page 175.Show Global SLB rule stats geo .Show Global SLB network preference stats rule .Show Global SLB geographical preference stats maint . under which the remote server is configured. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen.Show Global SLB remote real server stats virt . 1-64> Displays Global SLB statistics for the remote site.

com Server IP address Site DNS directs HTTP redirects -----. v# represents a local virtual server number r# represents a remote site.gslb.----------. under which the remote server is configured.--------------. the following statistics can be viewed: Number of DNS responses directed to the remote real server Number of HTTP redirects to the remote real server /stats/slb/gslb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics Global SLB virtual server 1 http service stats: Domain: www.--------------. Since each remote sites is configured on its peers as if it were a real server (with certain special properties). 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.10 5 0 0 -----. The remote site number.example.200. IP Address Site DNS directs IP address of the server.200. The number of DNS responses that return the IP address of the corresponding server.----------.200.---.200.-------------v1 200.1 0 0 r2 200. the number represents the real server ID on this switch.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb/real <real server number> Real Server Global SLB Statistics Real server 1 global stats: DNS directs: HTTP redirects: 3210 12 For any remote real server configured for Global Server Load Balancing.-------------Totals 0 0 Table 5-29 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt) Field Server Description Type of server configuration and server ID number.0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 175 .---.

0.Alteon OS 22. The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 1. The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 1. /stats/slb/gslb/site Global SLB Site Statistics Global SLB remote site 1 stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: 386 0 0 768 348 Table 5-30 Global SLB Site Statistics Parameters (/stats/slb/gslb/site) Field Bad remote site packets received DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received Description The number of bad packets received from remote site. The number of remote site updates sent using DSSP version 2.2 Command Reference Table 5-29 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/virt) Field HTTP redirects Description The number of HTTP requests redirected to the corresponding server. The number of remote site updates received using DSSP version 2. January 2005 . 176 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.

0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 177 . check your syslog for configuration error messages. If bad updates or dropped packets occur. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets sent to the remote sites. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version one updates/packets received from the remote sites.Alteon OS 22.0 Table 5-31 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint) Field Bad remote site packets received Description The number of bad packets received from the remote site. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets received from the remote sites. Bad updates or dropped packets usually indicate that there is a configuration problem at local or remote GSLB switches.0.0. The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) version two updates/packets sent to the remote sites.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb/maint Global SLB Maintenance Statistics Global SLB maintenance stats: Bad remote site packets received: DSSPv1 remote site updates sent: DSSPv1 remote site updates received: DSSPv2 remote site updates sent: DSSPv2 remote site updates received: DNS queries received: Bad DNS queries received: DNS responses sent: HTTP requests received: Bad HTTP requests received: HTTP responses sent: Hostname domain hits: Network domain hits: Basic domain hits: No server selected for hostname domain: No server selected for network domain: No server selected for basic domain: No matching domain: Last no result domain: Last source IP: 0 0 0 127746 85164 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0. DSSPv1 remote site updates sent DSSPv1 remote site updates received DSSPv2 remote site updates sent DSSPv2 remote site updates received 315393-J.

The number of times no server was selected after matching the basic domain name. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the hostname configured.Alteon OS 22. The number of HTTP responses sent by the switch that includes HTTP redirects.0. HTTP responses sent Hostname domain hits Network domain hits Basic domain hits No server selected for hostname domain No server selected for network domain No server selected for basic domain No matching domain Last no result domain Last source IP 178 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the network domain name configured. Bad HTTP requests received The number of bad/dropped client HTTP requests. The number of times the DNS queries received did not match the host name. The source IP address of the last DNS query or HTTP request received. domain name. The number of times the DNS queries received matched for the basic domain name configured. HTTP requests received The number of HTTP requests received. or the network domain configured. The domain in the last DNS query received that did not match the host name.2 Command Reference Table 5-31 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/gslb/maint) Field DNS queries received Bad DNS queries received DNS responses sent Description The number of DNS queries received. Client HTTP GET request packets that do not contain the entire URL are considered bad and are dropped. The number of times no server was selected after matching the network domain name. The number of DNS responses sent by the switch that includes DNS directs and DNS error responses. The number of times no server was selected after matching the host name domain. The number of bad DNS queries received. or the network domain configured. domain name.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 179 . and 10. Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Per Service Octet Counters For each load-balanced real server. These counters are then added to report the total octets for each virtual server. The total number of octets sent by the particular real server.21 for FTP services on the same physical server. not per service. the octet counters represent the combined number of transmit and receive bytes (octets). Table 5-32 Real Server SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/real) Statistics Current sessions Description The total number of outstanding sessions that are established to the particular real server.1.1.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/real <real server number> Real Server SLB Statistics Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Highest sessions: Octets 129 65478 4343 523824000 NOTE – Octets are provided per server.Alteon OS 22. unless configured as described in “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179. The octet counters are provided per server–not per service. Configure a separate IP address for each service on each server being load balanced. you can configure IP address 10.20 for HTTP services.0.1. The highest number of sessions ever recorded for the particular real server. you can accomplish this through the following configuration: 1. If you need octet counters on a perservice basis.1. For instance. 315393-J. The total number of sessions that have been established to the particular real server.

15 20 77 12 ---.-------1 200.10.--------------.2 Command Reference 2. two groups would be configured: one for handling HTTP and one for handling FTP. 4. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group.10. Thus. configure a real server with a real IP address for each service above. For per-service octet counters. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. January 2005 . configure one real server group for each type of service.14 20 60 9 2 200. Continuing the example above. If there were five physical servers providing the two services (HTTP and FTP). 10 real servers would have to be configured: five for the HTTP services on each physical server.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 Real server group statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group.Alteon OS 22.---------.100. and group each appropriate real server IP address into the group that handles the specific service.---------. 3. /stats/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.--------------. and five for the FTP services on each physical server.-------. Configure a virtual server and add the appropriate services to that virtual server. On the Alteon Application Switch. two real servers would be configured for the physical server (representing each real service). in keeping with our example. 180 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.100. Real server transmit/receive octets.0. On the Alteon Application Switch. see the procedure on “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179.-------.

100.100.-------200. Real server transmit/receive octets. see “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 179. For per-service octet counters.10. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server.---------.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 181 . below the real server IP addresses.14 20 60 9 2 200.100.10.-------.20 40 309 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 NOTE – The virtual server IP address is shown on the last line.15 20 77 12 ---.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Statistics Virtual server 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---. 315393-J.0.--------------.-------1 200. Virtual server statistics include the following: Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server.10.--------------. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.---------. /stats/slb/filt <filter number> Filter SLB Statistics Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 1011 You can obtain the total number of times any filter has been matched.-------.

str Displays SLB string statistics. See page 183 for a sample output.0. See page 184 for a sample output.Show SLB String stats maint .Show URL Redirection stats str .The total number of HTTP requests forwarded from straight to the gin server hits origin server.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu [Layer 7 Statistics Menu] redir . January 2005 . /stats/slb/layer7/redir Layer7 Redirection Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total URL based web cache redirection stats: cache server hits: origin server hits: straight to origin server hits: none-GETs hits: 'Cookie: ' hits: no-cache hits: RTSP cache server hits: RTSP origin server hits: HTTP redirection hits: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-34 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Description Total cache server hits The total number of HTTP requests redirected to the cache server. Total none-GETs hits The total number of none GET requests forwarded to the origin server. Total origin server hits The total number of HTTP requests forwarded to the origin server. 182 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. maint Displays Layer 7 maintenance statistics.Show Layer 7 Maintenance stats Table 5-33 SLB Layer 7 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/layer7) Command Syntax & Usage redir Displays URL Redirection statistics. See page 182 for a sample output. Total straight to ori.Alteon OS 22.

com 3 www. The total number of RTSP requests forwarded to the origin server.com 4 www.junk.[abcdefjhijklm]*.abc. The total number of RTSP requests redirected to the cache server. The total number of HTTP requests that were redirected by redirection filter.com 5 www.org 7 www.2 Command Reference Table 5-34 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Total 'Cookie:' hits Total no-cache hits Total RTSP cache server hits Total RTSP origin server hits Total HTTP redirection hits Description The total number of cookie requests forwarded to the origin server. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 183 .[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.org Hits 1527115 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-35 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/str) Statistics ID SLB String Hits Description The user-defined strings being used in URL matching.0.com 6 www. 315393-J.[abcdefghijklm]*. The total number of requests containing no-cache header forwarded to the origin server.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*. The total number of instances that are load-balanced due to matching of the particular URL ID. /stats/slb/layer7/str Layer 7 SLB String Statistics SLB String stats: ID SLB String 1 any 2 www.Alteon OS 22.

January 2005 .0 Clients reset by switch on server side Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.1: 0 Invalid HTTP methods: 0 Aged delayed binding sessions: 0 Half open connections: 0 Switch retries: 0 Random early drops: 0 Requests exceeded 9000 bytes: 0 Invalid 3-way handshakes: 0 Exceeded max frame size: 0 Out of order packet drops: 0 Current SP[1] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[2] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[3] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP[4] memory units: 1260 Lowest: Current SP memory units: 5040 Current SEQ buffer entries: 0 Highest: Current Data buffer use: 0 Highest: Current SP buffer entries: 0 Highest: Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc: 0 Total SEQ Buffer Allocs: 0 Total SEQ Frees: Total Data Buffer Allocs: 0 Total Data Frees: Alloc Fails . This means that when the switch could not connect to the real sever and the client’s retries exceeded the threshold due to delayed binding.Ubufs: Max sessions per bucket: 0 Max frames per session: Max bytes buffered (sess): 0 1260 1260 1260 1260 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Clients reset by switch on client side Description The number of reset frames sent to the client by the switch during server connection termination. The total number of connection swapping between different real servers in supporting multiple HTTP/1.1 184 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.0.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7/maint Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics Layer 7 maintenance stats: Clients reset by switch on client side: 0 Clients reset by switch on server side: 0 Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1. The number of reset frames sent to the server by the switch during server connection termination due to delayed binding.Seq buffers: 0 Alloc Fails .Alteon OS 22.1 client requests. the switch will send a reset frame to the client to terminate the connection.

2 Command Reference Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Invalid HTTP methods Description The total number of HTTP requests that contain invalid methods sent by the client. The number of outstanding data buffers used. The total number of sequence buffer allocated.2 The total number of sequence buffer allocations. The total number of GET requests that exceeded 4500 bytes. The total number of aged delayed binding sessions caused by failed connection initialization between the switch and the server. The total number of dropped frames because of invalid 3-way hand shakes. The total number of SYN frames dropped when the buffer is low.0. The highest number of sequence buffers ever used. The total numbers of outstanding TCP connections that are half opened.Alteon OS 22. Aged delayed binding sessions Half open connections Switch retries Random early drops Requests exceeded 4500 bytes Invalid 3-way handshakes Exceeded max frame size Out of order packet drops: Current SP memory units Current SEQ buffer entries Highest SEQ buffer entries Current Data buffer use Highest Data buffer use Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc Total SEQ Buffer Allocs Total SEQ Frees 315393-J. The total number of TCP packets dropped because they were received out of order. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 185 . The highest number of data buffers ever used. The total number of switch retries to connect to the real server. The total number of sequence buffer is freed. The total number of switch-generated frames that exceeded the maximum allowed frame size. It is incremented when the switch responds to TCP SYN packet and decremented upon receiving TCP SYN ACK packet from the requester. The currently available SP memory units. The number of outstanding sequence buffers used.

The number of times sequence buffer allocation failed.---------.2 The total of number buffers freed. The maximum number of items (sessions) allowed in the session table hash bucket chain. 186 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .-------.-------Unique SessionIds 0 0 0 SSL connections 0 0 0 Persistent Port Sessions 0 0 0 Table 5-37 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats SessionId allocation fails Total number of SSL ID reassignments Description Debug stats for SSL SessionId based persistence. Max frames per session The maximum number of frames to be buffered per session.Ubufs Max sessions per bucket Description The total number of buffers allocated to store client request. /stats/slb/ssl SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats: SessionId allocation fails: Total number of SSL ID reassignments: 0 0 Current Total Highest Sessions Sessions Sessions ------------------------.Alteon OS 22.0.Seq buffers Alloc Fails .2 Command Reference Table 5-36 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Total Data Buffer Allocs Total Data Frees Alloc Fails . The number of times the URL data buffer allocation failed. The number of times allocation of a session table entry failed when attempting to store a SessionId in the table. Max bytes buffered (sess) The maximum number of bytes to be buffered per session.

The number of different TCP connections using SSL service. The number of SessionIds maintained to allow for persistence across different client ports.Dump Filter Statistics Menu] active FTP NAT filter stats FTP SLB parsing server stats FTP maintenance stats all FTP SLB/NAT stats Table 5-38 FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/ftp) Command Syntax and Usage active Shows active FTP SLB parsing and filter statistics. maint Shows maintenance statistics. See page 189 for sample output.Show dump . dump Shows all FTP SLB/NAT statistics. This number shows the number of unique SSL sessions seen on the switch.Show maint . See page 188 for sample output. the total sessions seen on the switch since last reset and the high water mark of current sessions for the following: Unique SessionIds Many SSL sessions can use the same SessionId. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 187 .Alteon OS 22. See page 188 for sample output. SSL connections Persistent Port Sessions /stats/slb/ftp File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu [FTP SLB parsing and active .Show parsing . See page 189.0. these should all bind to the same server. parsing Shows parsing statistics. 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 5-37 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics Description The table shows the Current Sessions.

The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs FTP SLB parsing.0. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client. The number of times the switch creates a new index due to port command from the client. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the Switch needs for packet adjustment. /stats/slb/ftp/parsing Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics Total FTP SLB Parsing Stats(PASV): Total FTP: Total New FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-40 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/parsing) Statistics Total FTP Description The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/active Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats(PORT): Total FTP: Total New Active FTP Index: Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-39 Active FTP Slb Parsing and Filter statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/active) Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats (PORT) Total FTP Total New Active FTP Index Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff Description The number of times the switch receives the port command from the client. Total New FTP SLB parsing Index FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff 188 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections.

The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client. The number of times the switch could not switch mode from active to passive and vice versa. Total FTP NAT Filtered The total number of FTP NAT filter sessions that occurred.0. Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff FTP mode switch error The total number of new data sessions created for FTP NAT filter in active mode. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs for FTP SLB parsing. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 189 . /stats/slb/ftp/dump FTP SLB Statistics Dump Total FTP : Total FTP NAT Filtered: Total new active FTP NAT Index: Total new FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: FTP mode switch error: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-42 FTP SLB Statistics Dump (/stats/slb/ftp/dump) Statistics Total FTP Description The total number of FTP sessions that occurred. The total number of times the adjustment between ACK and SEQ occurred on the filter.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/maint FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics FTP mode switch error: 0 Table 5-41 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/maint) Statistics FTP mode switch error Description The number of times the switch is not able to switch modes from active to passive and vice versa.

---------.---------.---------.---------. Redirect ConnectionDenied BufferAllocs AllocFailures 190 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.---------.0. The total number of times the connection got redirected. January 2005 . The total number of times the connections got denied due to shortage of resources or the real server being down. The total number of times the buffer allocation failed.---------. The total number of buffer allocations used.-------0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-43 RTSP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/rtsp) Statistics ControlConnection UDP Streams Description The total number of TCP connections for RTSP control connection.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/rtsp RTSP SLB Statistics Control UDP Connection Buffer Alloc SP Connection Streams Redirect Denied Allocs Failures -.---------. The number depends upon the type of media player being used. The total number of UDP connections for data channels.---------.Alteon OS 22.---------.---------.---------1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 -.

The total number of out of memory and other unexpected errors the user gets while processing the DNS query. Total number of domain name parse errors Total number of failed real server name matches Total number of DNS parsing internal errors 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. The total number of times the user failed to find a real server which has the same layer 7 strings that match the domain name to be resolved. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 191 .2 Command Reference /stats/slb/dns DNS SLB Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total number number number number number number number of of of of of of of TCP DNS queries: UDP DNS queries: invalid DNS queries: multiple DNS queries: domain name parse errors: failed real server name matches: DNS parsing internal errors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-44 DNS SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/dns) Statistics Total number of TCP DNS queries Total number of UDP DNS queries Total number of invalid DNS queries Total number of multiple DNS queries Description The total number of DNS queries that received through TCP connections. The total number of DNS queries that have short or invalid domain names to be resolved.0. Currently only one domain name resolution per request is supported. The total number of DNS queries that contain more than one domain name to be resolved. The total number of malformed DNS queries received. The total number of DNS queries received through UDP requests.

Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client. incorrect VIPs incorrect Vports no available real server requests to wrong SP The number of session add/delete requests sent to the wrong SP. Indicates instances where the switch ran out of available bindings for a port. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit.SP dead: 0 req fails.SP dead: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs: 0 acct wrap reqs: 0 acct start reqs: 0 acct update reqs: 0 acct stop reqs: 0 acct bad reqs: 0 acct reqs(FIP): 0 acct reqs(no FIP): 0 add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails.Alteon OS 22. This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured.0. January 2005 .SP dead: 0 req fails. WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions: 0 allocation failures: 0 incorrect VIPs: 0 incorrect Vports: 0 no available real server: 0 requests to wrong SP: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails.DMA: 0 Table 5-45 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions allocation failures The number of session bindings currently in use. 192 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/wap WAP SLB Statistics This command displays all the Radius and WAP related counters.

January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 193 . RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs acct wrap reqs The number of RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of RADIUS Accounting Stop frames received.DMA 315393-J. The number of bad RADIUS Accounting frames received.Alteon OS 22.0. The number of add/delete requests failed due to DMA write failure. The number of add/delete request failures due to dead target SP. acct start reqs acct update reqs acct stop reqs acct bad reqs add session reqs del session reqs req fails. The number of RADIUS Accounting Update frames. The number of WAP session add requests via RADIUS snooping.SP dead req fails.SP dead The number of WAP session add requests via TPCP. The number of wrapped RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of add-request failures due to dead target SP. The number of WAP session delete requests via RADIUS snooping.2 Command Reference Table 5-45 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs req fails. The number of RADIUS Accounting Start frames received.

2 Command Reference /stats/slb/maint SLB Maintenance Statistics SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: UDP datagrams: Non TCP/IP frames: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Backup server activations: Overflow server activations: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: No TCP control bits: Invalid reset packet drops: Total IP fragment sessions: Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: Free Service pool entries: 2097104 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8192 SLB Maintenance statistics are described in the following table.Alteon OS 22. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. Table 5-46 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported. January 2005 . Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured.0. 194 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. Terminated Sessions Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled. UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on. Allocation Failures Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds).

Invalid reset packet drops Total IP fragment sessions Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards IP fragment table full Free service pool entries This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has processed so far. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online.2 Command Reference Table 5-46 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client. This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because they matched an active filter with the deny action set. This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 195 .0. but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit.Alteon OS 22. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports. This counter indicates how many times session table is full. No Available Real Server Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks No TCP Control Bits The number of packets that were dropped because the packet had no control bits set in the TCP header. This represents the current number of fragment sessions. 315393-J.

Total number of SIP Total number of packets received with methods not known to the Unknown Method packets SIP parser on the switch. Total number of SIP Incomplete Messages Total number of packets received which do not have the complete SIP message in a single packet. The total number of errors encountered during server processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet.0. /stats/slb/clear Clearing the SLB Statistics The following statistics are reset to zero when the clear command is given and confirmed: Table 5-48 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Real server stats: Description Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Real server group stats: Virtual server stats 196 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/slb/sip SIP SLB Statistics SIP Stats: Total number Total number Total number Total number of of of of SIP SIP SIP SIP Client Parse Errors Server Parse Errors Unknown Method packets Incomplete Messages : : : : 0 0 0 0 Table 5-47 SIP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/sip) Statistics Total number of SIP Client Parse Errors Total number of SIP Server Parse Errors Description The total number of errors encountered during client processing when parsing an incoming SIP packet.

per port Description Total firings Real server stats: Octets.0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 197 . Total sessions Total firings: Octets Per real server: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Per server group: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Redir: Total cache server hits Total origin server hits Total none-GETs hits Total 'Cookie: ' hits Total no-cache hits LB: ID SLB String hits Total Sessions Highest Sessions Total FTP Total FTP NAT Filtered Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Global SLB stats URL SLB and Redirection stats SSL SLB stats FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats Real server stats Real server group stats Virtual server stats 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. Total sessions Real server group: Octets.2 Command Reference Table 5-48 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Filter stats SLB switch port stats. Total sessions Virtual server: Octets.

See page 200 for details.BW Contract stats rcont . see page 199. hist Displays bandwidth management history statistics.Show BWM IP user stats for iplimit contracts dump .Show BWM maint statistics ipusers .Alteon OS 22. maint Displays bandwidth management maintenance statistics.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm BWM Statistics Menu [Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu] port . Each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/contract on page 281. clear Clears all bandwidth management statistics. See page 204 for sample output. See page 201 for details. January 2005 . ipusers Displays Bandwidth Management IP user stats for iplimit contracts. See page 203 for sample output. cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics. rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics. To view menu options.BW Contract rate stats hist .Dump all BWM statistics clear . See page 204 for sample output.0.Switch Port Contract Stats Menu cont .Clear BWM statistics Table 5-49 Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Switch Port Contract Statistics Menu. 198 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.BW History stats maint . dump Displays all bandwidth management statistics.

Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300.---------.Alteon OS 22.---------.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 . the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session. rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics.BW Contract stats rcont .------. See page 199 for a sample output.BW Contract rate stats Table 5-50 Management Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm/sp) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/port <port number> BWM Switch Processor Statistics [Bandwidth Management Port Statistics Menu] cont . January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 199 .--------------. For example: >> AAS_2424 . You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>. /stats/bwm/port <port number>/cont BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.-----1 cont1 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 674252832 1798583472 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 772710 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/port <port number>/rcont BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen. zero for infinite 315393-J. If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen.0.

NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only.---------. Discards 200 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.----1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5230 682947936 1822133376 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 773974 0 0 16320 1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5238 684289056 1825753104 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 774114 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/cont <contract number> BWM Contract Statistics BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------. January 2005 . The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.2 Command Reference BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.-----1 cont1 223868832 568900584 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 224149728 568632456 16384 456960 25 cont25 0 0 0 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 401270 0 0 456960 The following description of statistics applies on a specific switch port for all enabled contracts.---------. The contract name.---------.--------------. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.------.------.---------. Table 5-51 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics Contract Name Octets Description The contract number.Alteon OS 22.0.---------.--------------.

NOTE – This command displays enabled contracts only. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 201 . For example: >> AAS_2424 . zero for infinite 315393-J. You can configure the number of CLI lines per screen using the global (hidden) command: lines <number of lines>. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted. the command will continue to repeat its output until you type a key on the console or telnet session.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines ? lines sets lines-per-screen 0-300.2 Command Reference Table 5-51 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics BufUsed Description The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted.Bandwidth Management Statistics# lines Current lines-per-screen: 24 >> AAS_2424 . If the CLI lines are configured at zero per screen. BufMax /stats/bwm/rcont BWM Contract Rate Statistics Use this command to show the rate statistics of all the enabled contracts. This command repeats its output when the printed lines are less than the configured CLI lines per screen. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied.0.Alteon OS 22.

----1 cont1 5222 285408288 735607152 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 285720864 735308784 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 4 517182 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5230 286747296 739228896 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5230 287059872 738930528 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 519400 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5222 288084192 742853160 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 288400992 742550760 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 521578 0 0 456960 Table 5-52 Bandwidth Management Contract Rate Statistics (/stats/bwm/rcont) Statistics Contract Name Rate (in Kbps) Description The contract number. Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax 202 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.---------.Alteon OS 22. The contract name.--------------.---------. Rate at which the packets are going out of the switch on a particular contract. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limits.------.2 Command Reference BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted. The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted.---------. January 2005 .0.

23.80.80.23.23.80. The number of octets discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.23. Indicates the time the packets were received or discarded.80.124 8 filter_number08 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 6 filter_number06 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23. Table 5-53 Bandwidth Management History Statistics (/stats/bwm/hist) Statistics Contract Octets Discards Description The contract number for which history is enabled.23.23. TimeStamp 315393-J.124 10 filter_number10 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.---------.---------------.80.Alteon OS 22.124 256 Default 608 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 Switch IP Cont Name Octets You can dump the stats kept in the SMTP history buffer that get dumped periodically when an E-mail is sent.124 4 filter_number04 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.23. This command is used to keep long term history only for the contracts that are enabled and have history command turned on. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 203 .124 1 filter_number01 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. The number of octets sent out on a particular contract.80.80.23.---------47.124 2 filter_number02 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.---------.0.80.124 9 filter_number09 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.23. The sampling is done at one-minute intervals.124 7 filter_number07 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. Use this command to show the history of all the contracts for which history command is enabled.80.124 5 filter_number05 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/hist BWM History Statistics Discards TimeStamp YyyyMmDd:Hr:Mi/TmZone --------------.---.124 3 filter_number03 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.

Alteon OS 22.---------.0.---------.---------10 0 10 0 0 10 11 0 10 0 0 10 ---------.---------0 20 0 0 20 204 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference /stats/bwm/maint BWM Maintenance Statistics BWM Maint statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for rate limiting contracts Discard pkts 0 Discard octets 0 Out pkts 0 Out octets 0 Transmit failed 0 User Limit entry allocation failures 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for traffic shaping contracts QFull Discard pkts 0 QFull Discard octets 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Transmit failed 0 TDT set when qfull 0 TDT set between soft and hard 0 TDT set at soft 0 /stats/bwm/ipusers BWM IP Users Statistics This command displays the number of BWM IP user entries for each BWM contract for each SP.---------. January 2005 . BWM IP users statistics Contract SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 Total -------.---------.---------.---------.---------.

ucb Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. 4. To view a sample output. 315393-J. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. and 64 seconds.Show CPU utilization mem . To view a sample output and a description of the stats. sfd Displays all Socket File Descriptors that are in use.0.Show All TCP control blocks in use ucb . see page 209. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 205 . to check for leads and load. see page 208. mem Displays memory statistics.Show All UDP control blocks in use sfd . tcb Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. To view a sample output. see page 208.Alteon OS 22.Show Packet and TCP stats tcb . cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1. see page 209. see page 206.Show All Socket FD in use cpu .Show memory stats Table 5-54 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp) Command Syntax and Usage pkt Displays packet statistics.2 Command Reference /stats/mp Management Processor Statistics [MP-specific Statistics Menu] pkt .

Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packets freed from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.0. Total number of packet allocations with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/mp/pkt MP Packet Statistics Packet counts: allocs: mediums: jumbos: smalls: alloc fails: TCP counts: allocs: current: alloc fails: 89262 0 0 0 0 4866 46 0 frees: mediums hi-watermark: jumbos hi-watermark: smalls hi-watermark: packet discards: frees: current hi-watermark: alloc discards: 89262 4 0 4 0 4827 146 0 Table 5-55 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics Packet counts: allocs Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. 206 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. smalls hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Description frees mediums jumbos smalls alloc fails frees mediums hi-watermark jumbos hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

Total number of TCP packet allocation failures from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of times the TCP packet buffers are freed (released) to MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack.0.Alteon OS 22. The highest number of TCP packet allocation from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The packets are discarded because buffer resources are not available or the buffer threshold is reached and the low priority packets are discarded. current alloc fails frees current hi-watermark alloc discards 315393-J. The packets are discarded because MP memory resources are not available. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 207 . The number of TCP packets that are discarded by the MP. Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. TCP counts: allocs Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack.2 Command Reference Table 5-55 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics packet discards Description The number of packets that are discarded by the MP.

2 Command Reference /stats/mp/tcb TCP Statistics All TCP allocated control blocks: 117f6d00: 0.16.0/47.0 117f81a8: 47.Alteon OS 22.16.0.59 80 23 listen established Table 5-56 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb) Statistics 117f6d00/117f81a8 0.80.0.0.0. January 2005 .0.81.59 80/23 listen/established Description Memory Destination IP address Destination port Source IP Source port State /stats/mp/ucb UCB Statistics All UDP allocated control blocks: 161: listen 1985: listen 3122: listen Table 5-57 UCB Statistics on MP (/stats/mp/ucb) Field 161/1985/3122 Listen Description UDP port number State 208 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.6 1331 <=> 47.81.0 0 <=> 0.0.0.27.0.27.0.80.6 0/1331 0.0/47.

133.0.88. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 209 .0.0 server 0 <=> 47.133.0 server 1 -1 17 108c5bd8: 0.0.31 0 <=> 47. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval.88.31 0 <=> 47.0.0 server 3 -1 19 1180a258: 0. CPU utilization: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 100% 100% 100% Table 5-58 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil1Second Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval.0.0.0.31 81 23 22 443 listen listen listen listen TCP TCP TCP TCP /stats/mp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on MP.133.2 Command Reference /stats/mp/sfd MP-Specific SFD Statistics All Socket FD allocated: 0 -1 16 1180b128: 0.31 0 <=> 47.88.0. cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds 315393-J.133.88.Alteon OS 22.0 server 2 -1 18 108d5cfc: 0. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval.0.

2 Command Reference /stats/sp <SP Number> SP Specific Statistics [SP-specific Statistics Menu] maint . clear cpu 210 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . Displays what percentage of the CPU has been utilized. see page 211. Deletes all the maintenance statistics.Show CPU utilization Table 5-59 SP Specific Statistics (/stats/sp) Statistics maint Description Displays internal statistics. Layer 2 FDB maintenance statistics.0.Show maintenance stats clear .Clear maintenance stats cpu . To view a sample output and a description of the stats. See page 211 for a sample output. and MP DOS shield statistics.

2 Command Reference /stats/sp <SP number>/maint SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics Maintenance statistics for SP 1: Receive Letter success from MP: 158648 Receive Letter success from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 4: 0 Receive Letter errors from MP: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 4: 0 Send Letter success to MP: 125516 Send Letter success to SP 2: 0 Send Letter success to SP 3: 6799 Send Letter success to SP 4: 6791 Send Letter failures to MP: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 2: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 3: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 4: 0 learnErrNoddw: 0 resolveErrNoddw: ageMPNoddw: 0 deleteMiss: pfdbFreeEmpty: 0 arpDiscards: 0 icmpDiscards: tcpDiscards: 0 udpDiscards: 0 0 0 0 /stats/sp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics on the Switch Processor (SP). 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 211 .0. CPU utilization for SP 1: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 6% 6% 6% Table 5-60 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil1Second Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last one second interval.Alteon OS 22.

To view a sample output and a description of the statistics. January 2005 . To view a sample output and a description of the stats.Alteon OS 22.Dump all security statistics Command Syntax and Usage dos Displays the DOS Attack statistics menu. The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last 64 second interval. udpblast Displays the UDP Blast statistics menu.IP Address ACL Statistics Menu udpblast . cpuUtil64Seconds /stats/security Security Statistics [Security Statistics Menu] dos . ipacl Displays the IP Address Access Control List statistics menu.UDP Blast Statistics Menu pgroup . To view a sample output and a description of the statistics. see page 216. see page 213. see page 214. 212 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 5-60 CPU Statistics (stats/sp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil4Seconds Description The percentage of CPU utilization as measured over the last four second interval. see page 216. ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting statistics menu.0.Show pattern match group statistics ratelim .Show rate limiting statistics dump . To view a sample output and a description of the stats. pgroup Displays the Pattern Match Group statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics.DoS Attack Statistics Menu ipacl . see page 215.

dump Displays the number of times the packets were dropped on the switch. ScanSynFin. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 213 . Fraggle.Dump all DoS attack statistics clear . on the selected port only.2 Command Reference Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all security statistics. /stats/security/dos DOS Attack Statistics Menu [DoS Attack Statistics Menu] port .Clear all DoS attack statistics help . 315393-J. clear Deletes all DOS attack statistics. help Displays a description of each type of DOS attack by name and how it works. Blat For a description of these different types of DOS attacks. PortZero. LandAttack. Nullscan.DoS attack statistics description Table 5-61 DOS Attacks Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/dos) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the number of times the packets were dropped for each of the following types of DOS attacks. Xmascan.Alteon OS 22.Port DoS attack statistics dump .0. for each of the following types of DOS attacks: Smurf. see “Types of DOS Attacks” on page 214.

Fraggle. PortZero. 214 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. >> /stats/security/dos help Smurf: The ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP(x. You can use the help command to obtain a brief explanation of each type of DOS attack detected by the switch.0.255). Xmascan: TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN. January 2005 . and ScanSynFin. LandAttack.2 Command Reference Types of DOS Attacks Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf. Fraggle: The UDP packet to a broadcast destination IP(x. URG and PSH bits are set. ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet.x.255). clear Deletes all the statistics of accumulated blocked packets. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for a detailed description of DOS attacks. PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets with either source/destination port is zero. Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT. Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros. Xmascan.IP address access control Stats clear . LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal destination IP.x. /stats/security/ipacl IP Access Control List Statistics The following IP Access Control List statistics can be viewed with this command: [IP ACL Statistics Menu] dump .Alteon OS 22. Nullscan. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack.x.x.Clear all access control Stats Table 5-62 IPACL Security Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the accumulated blocked packets for each IP address and mask pair.

2 Command Reference /stats/security/udpblast UDP Blast Statistics [UDP Blast Statistics Menu] dump . The number of blocked packets.Clear all UDP Blast Stats Table 5-63 UDP Blast Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all the accumulated blocked packets for each port. clear Deletes all the accumulated blocked packets. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 215 . Displays the current rate of packet to the UDP port. /stats/security/udpblast/dump UDP Blast Dump Statistics UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets ------------------------Current Packet Rate/Second -------------------------- Table 5-64 UDP Blast Dump Statistics Parameters (/stats/security/udpblast/dump) Field UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/ Second Description UDP ports that experienced UDP blast attacks. See page 215 for a sample output and a description of the statistics. and the current packet rate per second. 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22.UDP Blast Stats clear .

January 2005 . 216 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.0.Alteon OS 22. /stats/security/ratelim Rate Limiting Statistics Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-65 Rate Limiting Statistics (/stats/security/ratelim) Field Total holds down triggered Current per-client state entries Description The total number of packets dropped after the hold-down period expired. The total number of per-client state entries for TCP/UDP/ICMP rate limiting.2 Command Reference /stats/security/pgroup UDP Pattern Match Statistics Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name 1 Hits 0 This menu displays how many times each configured pattern group has been matched and a subsequent filtering action performed. Pattern groups are configured in the “Pattern Matching Menu” on page 350.

0. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 217 .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /stats/security/dump Dump Statistics for Security IP ACL stats: Address Blocked Packets ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/Second ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name Hits 1 0 100 0 101 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 315393-J.

2 Command Reference /stats/snmp SNMP Statistics NOTE – You can reset the SNMP counter to zero by using clear command as follows: >> Statistics# snmp clear SNMP statistics: snmpInPkts: snmpInBadC'tyNames: snmpInASNParseErrs: snmpOutPkts: snmpInTooBigs: snmpInBadValues: snmpInGenErrs: snmpInTotalSetVars: snmpInGetNexts: snmpInGetResponses: snmpOutTooBigs: snmpOutBadValues: snmpOutGenErrs: snmpOutGetNexts: snmpOutGetResponses: snmpSilentDrops: 150097 0 0 150097 0 0 0 2731 131389 0 0 0 1 0 150093 0 snmpInBadVersions: snmpInBadC'tyUses: snmpEnableAuthTraps: snmpInBadTypes: snmpInNoSuchNames: snmpInReadOnlys: snmpInTotalReqVars: snmpInGetRequests: snmpInSetRequests: snmpInTraps: snmpOutNoSuchNames: snmpOutReadOnlys: snmpOutGetRequests: snmpOutSetRequests: snmpOutTraps: snmpProxyDrops: 0 0 0 0 0 0 798464 17593 615 0 1 0 0 0 4 0 SNMPv3 Statistics: snmpUnknownSecurityModels: snmpInvalidMsgs: snmpUnknownPDUHandlers: snmpUnknownContexts: snmpUnavailableContexts: usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels: usmStatsNotInTimeWindows: usmStatsUnknownUserNames: usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs: usmStatsWrongDigests: usmStatsDecryptionErrors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInPkts Description The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service.Alteon OS 22.0. 218 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .

It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message.1 type as a string of eight-bit octets.208). snmpInBadC'tyNames snmpInBadC'tyUses snmpInASNParseErrs snmpEnableAuth Traps snmpOutPkts snmpInBadTypes snmpInTooBigs snmpInNoSuchNames snmpInBadValues snmpInReadOnlys 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 219 . As such. The total number of ASN.Alteon OS 22. and one set of rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER (Basic Encoding Rules. from simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and sequences. this object is provided as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP. The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service. defined in X. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is `read-Only'. BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN.1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue. The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version.0. Note: OSI's method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN. defined in X.2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInBadVersions Description The total number of SNMP Messages. The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing. ASN.209). The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch). which contains the value `read-Only' in the error-status field.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is noSuchName. An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this entity (the switch).

which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is badValue. which have been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP SetRequest Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is too big. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpInTotalReqVars snmpInTotalSetVars snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts snmpInSetRequests snmpInGetResponses snmpInTraps snmpOutTooBigs snmpOutNoSuchNames snmpOutBadValues snmpOutReadOnlys snmpOutGenErrs snmpOutGetRequests 220 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of MIB objects. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs).Alteon OS 22. The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInGenErrs Description The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus is noSuchName. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). January 2005 . The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP GetRequest and Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs).0. The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). Not in use. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is genErr.

The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the context contained in the message was unknown. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 221 . for example. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpOutGetNexts Description The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). GetNextRequest-PDUs. snmpInvalidMsgs snmpUnknownPDUHandlers snmpUnknownContexts snmpUnavailableContexts 315393-J. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. SetRequest-PDUs. no SNMP application had registered for the proper combination of the contextEngineID and the pduType. SetRequest-PDUs. GetBulkRequest-PDUs. and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped because the transmission of the message to a proxy target failed in a manner such that no Response-PDU could be returned. The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). snmpOutSetRequests snmpOutGet Responses snmpOutTraps snmpSilentDrops snmpProxyDrops SNMPv3 Statistics: snmpUnknownSecurityModels The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced a securityModel that was not known to or supported by the SNMP engine.0. GetBulkRequest-PDUs. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the PDU contained in the packet could not be passed to an application responsible for handling the pduType. GetNextRequest-PDUs. and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMPv2 entity which were silently dropped because the size of a reply containing an alternate ResponsePDU with an empty variable bindings field was greater than either a local constraint or the maximum message size associated with the originator of the request. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of GetRequest-PDUs. The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because the context contained in the message was unavailable.Alteon OS 22. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because there were invalid or inconsistent components in the SNMP message. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of GetRequest-PDUs.

2 Command Reference Table 5-66 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels Description The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they requested a securityLevel that was unknown to the SNMP engine or otherwise unavailable. With NTP enabled. Last update time: 18:04:16 Tue Jul 13. NTP statistics: Primary Server: Requests Sent: 17 Responses Received: 17 Updates: 1 Secondary Server: Requests Sent: 0 Responses Received: 0 Updates: 0 Last update based on response from primary server. 2004 222 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they could not be decrypted. usmStatsNotInTimeWindows usmStatsUnknownUserNames usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs usmStatsWrong Digests usmStatsDecryption Errors /stats/ntp NTP Statistics Alteon OS uses NTP (Network Timing Protocol) version 3 to synchronize the switch’s internal clock with an atomic time calibrated NTP server.Alteon OS 22. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced a user that was not known to the SNMP engine. 2004 Current system time: 18:55:49 Tue Jul 13. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they appeared outside of the authoritative SNMP engine's window. the switch can accurately update its internal clock to be consistent with other devices on the network and generates accurate syslogs. The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they didn't contain the expected digest value.0. January 2005 . The total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they referenced an snmpEngineID that was not known to the SNMP engine.

Secondary Server Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the secondary NTP server to synchronize time. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 223 . Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the primary NTP server. Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the primary NTP server. The switch system time when the command /stats/ntp was issued.Alteon OS 22.0. 315393-J. The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last updated. Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server.2 Command Reference Table 5-67 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp) Field Primary Server Description Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the primary NTP server to synchronize time. NOTE – You can issue /stats/ntp/clear command to delete all statistics. Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server. Last update based on response from primary server Last update time Current system time Last update of time on the switch based on either primary or secondary NTP response received.

0.2 Command Reference /stats/pm Port Mirroring Statistics Menu [Port Mirroring Statistics Menu] dump .Alteon OS 22. clear Deletes all the port mirroring statistics. The number of bad packets received. RX packets RX errors 224 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.Clear all Port Mirroring Stats Table 5-68 Port Mirroring Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the port number. /stats/mgmt Management Port Statistics Management port interface RX bytes: RX packets: RX errors: RX dropped: RX overruns: RX frame errors: RX multicast: statistics: 0 TX bytes: 0 TX packets: 0 TX errors: 0 TX dropped: 0 TX overruns: 0 TX carrier errors: 0 TX collisions: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-69 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics RX bytes Description The total number of incoming bytes successfully transferred by the interface. The total number of incoming packets successfully transferred by the interface. CAUTION—Use this command carefully as it will delete all statistics permanently. and the statistics of the traffic on the ingress and egress ports.Port Mirroring Stats clear . January 2005 .

RX overruns RX frame errors RX multicast TX bytes TX packets TX errors TX dropped TX overruns TX carrier errors TX collisions /stats/dump Dump Statistics Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more. The total number of outgoing packets successfully transferred by the interface. The number of packets dropped due to transmission problems. This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance. The number of received packets that were dropped because their size exceeded that of the receive queue.0.2 Command Reference Table 5-69 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics RX dropped Description The number of incoming packets that were dropped due to lack of receive buffers.Alteon OS 22. The total number of outgoing bytes successfully transferred by the interface. 315393-J. The number of multicast packets received. depending on your configuration). set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. The number of packets dropped because size exceeded that of the transmit queue. Collisions occur when two or more stations are transmitting signals at the same time. Not applicable. If you want to capture dump data to a file. January 2005 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 225 . The number of collisions due to congestion on the medium. The number of incoming packets dropped due to IP framing errors. The number of packets dropped due to lack of transmit buffers.

January 2005 .0.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference 226 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-J.

Layer 2 Menu l3 .CHAPTER 6 The Configuration Menu This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making. Important difference are called out in the text.Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg . display more or different information than in the previous version.Security Menu setup . 227 315393-J. To view menu options. port <port number> Displays the Port Configuration Menu.Layer 3 Menu slb .Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security .Port Menu pmirr . /cfg Configuration Menu [Configuration Menu] sys . the menu options under the Server Load Balancing Menu (/cfg/slb) are in Chapter 7.Bandwidth Management Menu l2 . see page 265. January 2005 . To view menu options.System-wide Parameter Menu port . To make finding information easier. and saving switch configuration changes. viewing. see page 231.Step by step configuration set up dump .Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .Port Mirroring Menu bwm .Restore current configuration from tftp server Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System-wide parameter Configuration Menu. Many of the commands. although not new.

For details. “The SLB Configuration Menu”.0. setup Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Configuration Menu. see page 353.2 Command Reference Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. ptcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Backs up current configuration to TFTP server. l2 Displays Layer 2 Configuration Menu. To view menu options. see page 279. security Displays the Security Menu. see page 354. To view menu options. see page 354. To view menu options. While configuration changes are in the pending state. any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved. To view menu options. To view menu options. Applying. see page 348. l3 Displays Layer 3 Configuration Menu. For details. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu. For details.Alteon OS 22. see page 278. and Saving Changes As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters. To view menu options. Also. the changes you make do not take effect immediately. see page 287. gtcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Restores current configuration from TFTP server. see page 299. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them. dump Dumps current configuration to a script file. Viewing. you can do the following: View the pending changes Apply the pending changes Save the changes to flash memory 228 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . see page 353. see Chapter 7. For details.

NOTE – The diff command is a global command. enter the following command at any CLI prompt: # save 315393-J. # apply NOTE – The apply command is a global command. NOTE – All configuration changes take effect immediately when applied. Therefore. you must apply them.0.2 Command Reference Viewing Pending Changes You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt. enter apply at any prompt in the CLI. save them (see below). NOTE – If you do not save the changes. To apply configuration changes. To save the new configuration. To turn STP on or off. you must apply the changes. you can save them to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch. Therefore. they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted. except for starting Spanning Tree Protocol. you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI. and then reset the switch (see “Resetting the Switch” on page 448).Alteon OS 22. Applying Pending Changes To make your configuration changes active. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 229 . Saving the Configuration In addition to applying the configuration changes. you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface.

It is a global command that can be executed from any menu. If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block.Alteon OS 22. Your options include: The active configuration block The backup configuration block Factory default configuration You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 447. For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset. January 2005 . enter the following instead: # save n You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch. The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block. 230 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.0. the changes are saved to the active configuration block.2 Command Reference When you save configuration changes.

To view menu options. see page 237. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 231 .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys System Configuration [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius tacacs ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu TACACS+ Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords.Alteon OS 22. see page 234. see page 239. radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu. Web-based management settings. sshd Displays the SSH Server Menu. Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage syslog Displays the Syslog Menu. 315393-J. see page 240. mmgmt Displays Management Port Menu. To view menu options. To view menu options. To view menu options. tacacs Displays TACACS+ authentication Menu. To view menu options. see page 233.0. and management access list.

see page 258. To view menu options. hprompt disable|enable Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command Line Interface (CLI).2 Command Reference Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu. which is used for sending bandwidth management history information. This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines. sonmp Displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) menu. health Displays system health check menu. If you enable BOOTP. affects both console and Telnet> Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions. see page 244. This command is disabled by default. see page 242. idle <idle timeout in minutes. To view menu options. see page 259. maximum 80 characters> Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. bootp disable|enable Enables or disables the use of BOOTP. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command. the login banner is displayed. date Prompts the user for the system date. January 2005 . The default is 5 minutes. To view menu options. bannr <string. see page 243. notice <max 1024 char multi-line login notice> <'-' to end> Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. To view menu options. the switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu. from 1 to 10080 minutes. access Displays System Access Menu. 232 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. time Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. smtp <SMTP host name or IP address> Sets the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host. When a user or administrator logs into the switch.0. cur Displays the current system parameters.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options.

For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity.17. 192. filter). cur Displays the current syslog settings. 192. The default is 0. host2 <new syslog host IP address (such as. gslb. console disable|enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. which means. sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. see page 234. When necessary.4. facil2 <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed.Alteon OS 22. The default is 0. It is enabled by default.223)> Sets the IP address of the second syslog host.0. disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages. The default is 7. The default is 7. log all the seven severity levels. or enable/disable syslog on all available features.4. 315393-J. log <feature|all> <enable|disable> Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. facil <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. You can choose to enable/ disable specific features (such as vlans. see page 234. which means log all the seven severity levels. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 233 . sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed.17.223)> Sets the IP address of the first syslog host. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/syslog System Host Log Configuration [Syslog Menu] host host2 sever sever2 facil facil2 console log cur Set IP address of first syslog host Set IP address of second syslog host Set the severity of first syslog host Set the severity of second syslog host Set facility of first syslog host Set facility of second syslog host Enable/disable console output of syslog messages Enable/disable syslogging of features Display current syslog settings Table 6-3 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) Command Syntax and Usage host <new syslog host IP address (such as.

This port manages the switch using either telnet CLI. and must be enabled before it can be used. This means that corrective action must be taken immediately. Debug. This means the condition of the system is critical. This means that the system is giving a warning. If this port is disabled. the network ports have to perform all switch management (other than the switch management using the console). You can change the defaults by configuring these features to permanently use the management port. by using the operational commands to set these options on a one-time basis. 1: Alert. the Management port saves consuming a port that could otherwise be used for processing data and traffic. 6: Informational. This means that the system is giving out debug-level messages. /cfg/sys/mmgmt Management Port Configuration Menu The Management port is a Fast Ethernet port that is used exclusively to manage the switch. or in some cases. 4: Warning. This means that the system has errors that should be corrected. broadcast address. If this port is enabled. This port is isolated from and does not participate in the networking protocols that run on the network ports. January 2005 . This means that the system is unusable. and default gateway. 234 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Seven Levels of Severity Following is the description of the seven levels of severity: 0: Emergency. the factory default settings for some of the management features remain with the network ports.0. The Management port must be configured with a static IP address. 5: Notice. subnet mask.Alteon OS 22. 7. 2: Critical. or HTTP. 3: Error. This means that the condition of the system is normal but with significant conditions that need attention. SNMP. This means that the system is working but giving out information about certain unfavorable conditions. While the switch can be managed from any network port.

Set default port for SYSLOG sonmp . gw <gateway address (such as. intr <interval (0 .Set default port for DNS ntp .Set default IP for SONMP hello packets tftp .Set subnet mask gw .Set interval between gateway ping attempts retry . retry <number of attempts (1-120> Sets the number of failed ping attempts before a gateway is declared DOWN.255. 192. mask <subnet mask (such as.4. dns default port mgmt|data Sets DNS over management or data port.Set default port for NTP radius .Set default gateway address intr .Set default port for TACACS+ smtp .Display current configuration Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage port Displays the management port link menu.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN dns .Set IP address mask .Management Port Phy Menu addr .101)> Sets the IP address.Set default port for SMTP snmp .17.4. [Management Port Menu] port . 192. 255.Set default port for SNMP traps syslog .Set default port for RADIUS tacacs .0. 315393-J. see page 237.1)> Sets the IP address for the default gateway. Default is data port. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 235 .255.Enable management port dis .Alteon OS 22.Disable management port cur .Set default port for TFTP ena . To view the menu options.0)> Sets the subnet mask. addr <IP address (such as.2 Command Reference NOTE – The Management port does not support BOOTP.17.60 seconds)> Sets the interval between gateway ping attempts.

Default is data port. radius default port mgmt|data Sets RADIUS over management or data ports. But if it is set to data. 236 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. then the IP address of the data port interface specified by srcif (/cfg/sys/sonmp/srcif) command is used in the hello packets. smtp default port mgmt|data Sets SMTP over management or data ports. tacacs mgmt|data Sets TACACS+ over management or data ports. Default is data port. Default is data port. syslog default port mgmt|data Sets syslog host access over management or data ports. sonmp default port mgmt|data Sets default IP address for SONMP hello packets. When this option is set to mgmt then the Management Port IP address is used in the SONMP hello packets transmitted by the switch. dis Disables the Management port.2 Command Reference Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage ntp default port mgmt|data Sets NTP over management or data ports.0. The default is data port. Default is data port. Default is data port. cur Displays the current configuration.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . Default is data port. snmp default port mgmt|data Sets SNMP trap host over management or data ports. tftp default port mgmt|data Sets TFTP over management or data port. ena Enables the Management port.

By default this command is turned on. sometimes known as Secure Socket Shell.Display current link configuration Table 6-5 Management Port Link Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mgmt/port) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the speed of the link with the Management port. SSH uses RSA public key cryptography for both connection and authentication. and scp . auto on|off Sets auto negotiation for the port. rsh.0. It is widely used by network administrators to control Web and other kinds of servers remotely. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 237 . and passwords are protected by being encrypted.Set link speed mode . rlogin. /cfg/sys/sshd SSH Server Configuration Menu Secure Shell (SSH).slogin.Set full or half duplex mode auto .Alteon OS 22.Set autonegotiation cur . Both ends of the client/server connection are authenticated using a digital certificate.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/mmgmt/port Management Port Link Menu [Management Port Link Menu] speed . SSH commands are encrypted and secure in several ways. and rcp.that are secure versions of the earlier UNIX utilities. Default is any. 315393-J. ssh. mode full|half|any Sets half or full duplex mode. Default is any. is a UNIX-based command interface and protocol for securely getting access to a remote computer. cur Displays the current link configuration. SSH is actually a suite of three utilities .

cur Displays the current SSH server configuration. Table 6-6 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <interval (0-24)> Sets the interval for generating the RSA server key. on Enables the SSH server. ena Enables SCP.2 Command Reference [SSHD Menu] intrval scpadm hkeygen skeygen sshport ena dis on off cur - Set Interval for generating the RSA server key Set SCP-only admin password Generate the RSA host key Generate the RSA server key Set SSH server port number Enable the SCP apply and save Disable the SCP apply and save Turn SSH server ON Turn SSH server OFF Display current SSH server configuration NOTE – For the Alteon Application Switch. hkeygen Generates the RSA host key. scpadm Sets the Secure Copy (SCP)-only admin password. RSA server key generation starts immediately. SSH scripts can be viewed by using the /cfg/dump command (see page 353). this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client. sshport <TCP port number> Sets the SSH server port number. dis Disables SCP. When you enter this command. 238 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. RSA host key generation starts immediately.Alteon OS 22. skeygen Generates the RSA server key. When you enter this command.0. January 2005 .

The default is 3 requests. in seconds. The default is 1645. secsrv <IP address> Sets the secondary RADIUS server address. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 239 .3000.Set secondary RADIUS server address secret .Set secondary RADIUS server secret port .Turn RADIUS authentication ON off . The default is 3 seconds.Set RADIUS server retries timeout .0. between 1500 .Set primary RADIUS server address secsrv . retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server. secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the primary RADIUS server(s).Enable/disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet on . timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)> Sets the amount of time. before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed.Set RADIUS server timeout telnet .Set RADIUS port retries . default 1645> Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured.Turn RADIUS authentication OFF cur .2 Command Reference NOTE – The top four commands are only accessible at the serial port /cfg/sys/radius RADIUS Server Configuration [RADIUS Server Menu] prisrv .Set primary RADIUS server secret secret2 .Alteon OS 22.Display current RADIUS configuration Table 6-7 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Sets the primary RADIUS server address. port <RADIUS port to configure. secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret password between the switch and the secondary RADIUS server(s).

TACACS is an encryption protocol and therefore less secure than TACACS+ and Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) protocols. Also. on Enables the RADIUS server. January 2005 . cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters. off Disables the RADIUS server.0.) TACACS+ protocol is seen as more reliable than RADIUS as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device: TACACS+ is TCP-based so it facilitates connection-oriented traffic. Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections. (Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in Request for Comments 1492. and accounting. It supports full-packet encryption as against password-only in authentication requests. TACACS+ protocol has been implemented on Alteon OS to support the customers that have Cisco’s TACACS+ protocol as their network security feature. Apart from that. /cfg/sys/tacacs TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 6-7 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door for telnet. Supports decoupled authentication. authorization. whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations. RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile. 240 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds. secsrv <IP address> Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address. Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections. between 1500 .2 Command Reference [TACACS+ Server prisrv secsrv secret secret2 port retries timeout telnet on off cur - Menu] Set primary TACACS+ server address Set secondary TACACS+ server address Set primary TACACS+ server secret Set secondary TACACS+ server secret Set TACACS+ TCP port Set TACACS+ server retries Set TACACS+ server timeout (seconds) Enable/disable TACACS+ backdoor for telnet Turn TACACS+ authentication ON Turn TACACS+ authentication OFF Display current TACACS+ configuration Table 6-8 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Defines the primary TACACS+ server address. in seconds. telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for telnet. before a TACACS+ server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The default is 1645.3000. secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the secondary TACACS+ server(s). port <RADIUS port configure. 1-3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS+ server. default 1645> Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured. 1-10> Sets the amount of time.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.0. The default is 3 requests. secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the primary TACACS+ server(s). The default is 3 seconds. retries <RADIUS server retries. on Enables the TACACS+ server. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 241 .

Set secondary NTP server address intrval . /cfg/sys/ntp NTP Server Configuration This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.0. of the switch you are synchronizing from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). The default value is 1440 minutes. this option is disabled. cur Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters. in hours and minutes. This interval of time will be specified in minutes (1-44640). intrval <resync interval in minutes> Specifies how often the switch will re-synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server. January 2005 .Turn NTP service ON off . in HH:MM> Prompts for the NTP time zone offset.Alteon OS 22.Enable/Disable daylight savings time on .Turn NTP service OFF cur .Set NTP timezone offset from GMT dlight . [NTP Server Menu] prisrv . secsrv <secondary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. By default. tzone <offset from GMT.Display current NTP configuration Table 6-9 NTP Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <primary NTP server IP address> Prompts for the IP address of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. 242 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set primary NTP server address secsrv .Set NTP server resync interval tzone .2 Command Reference Table 6-8 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) Command Syntax and Usage off Disables the TACACS+ server.

the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock. cur Displays the current NTP service settings. Table 6-10 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp) Command Syntax and Usage srcif <interface number (1-256)> This command specifies the IP address to be used in the hello packets. By default. this option is disabled. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 243 . on This command enables the SONMP protocol. 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 6-9 NTP Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage dlight disable|enable Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock. on Enables the NTP synchronization service. and turns Ethernet Autotopology on. The topology algorithm is executed by each Alteon switch on which SONMP is enabled. If the interface specified by this command is not up. The following commands add support for the Ethernet Autotopology algorithm and the Bay Topology MIB. then the first interface which is up and running is used in the hello packets. When enabled. off Disables the NTP synchronization service.Alteon OS 22.0. /cfg/sys/sonmp SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration [SONMP Menu] srcif on off cur Set source interface to be used in hello packets Turn Ethernet Autotopology ON Turn Ethernet Autotopology OFF Display current SONMP configuration SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) is a proprietary network management protocol that is used by Nortel Networks Optivitiy Switch Manager (OSM) to discover Alteon Application Switches on the network.

SNMP parameters that can be modified include: System name System location System contact Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string Write community string Trap community strings 244 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of variables known as MIBs (Management Information Base) provided by the managed device (agent). In SNMP model of network management. and turns Ethernet Autotopology off. Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or to modify.Alteon OS 22. If you are running an SNMP network management station on your network. /cfg/sys/ssnmp System SNMP Configuration Alteon OS supports SNMP-based network management.0. cur This command displays the current SONMP configuration. you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs: MIB II (RFC 1213) Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643) Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for SNMP messages.2 Command Reference Table 6-10 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp) Command Syntax and Usage off This command disables the SONMP protocol. January 2005 .

cont <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system contact.Set SNMP write community string trsrc . The default write community string is private.0. The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters. The SNMPv3 packets do not contain this field. wcomm <new SNMP write community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP write community string. see page 247. The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch.2 Command Reference [System SNMP Menu] snmpv3 . The write community string controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters.Set SNMP read community string wcomm .Alteon OS 22. name <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name for the system. NOTE – This command is applicable only to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 traps because only the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap packets contain the source IP address that can be set with this command.Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap" linkt . It can have a maximum of 32 characters.Set SNMP "sysContact" rcomm .Set timeout for the SNMP state machine auth . rcomm <new SNMP read community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP read community string. This command enables the user to select one of the configured interfaces as the source interface using the interface number. locn <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system location. 315393-J.Set SNMP "sysLocation" cont . It can have a maximum of 32 characters.Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap cur . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 245 .Display current system SNMP configuration Table 6-11 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 menu. The default read community string is public.Set SNMP "sysName" locn . To view menu options. trsrc <interface number (1-256)> Defines the interface number for SNMP trap source interface.SNMPv3 Menu name .Set SNMP trap source interface timeout .

0.2 Command Reference Table 6-11 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage timeout <SNMP state machine timeout minutes. The default setting is disabled. cur Displays the current STP port parameters.Alteon OS 22. auth disable|enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. memory is allocated to store the output of the command. The timeout period determines when the resources/memory allocated for the output will be freed. When you use diff and apply. The default setting is enabled. 1-30> Defines the timeout period for SNMP state machine. January 2005 . 246 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. linkt <port> <disable|enable> Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps.

see page 249. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. You can also configure this entry through SNMP.0. You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. see page 250. view <vacmViewTreeFamily number [1-128]> This command allows you to create different MIB views. To view menu options. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 247 . [SNMPv3 Menu] usm view access group comm taddr tparam notify v1v2 cur - usmUser Table menu vacmViewTreeFamily Table menu vacmAccess Table menu vacmSecurityToGroup Table menu community Table menu targetAddr Table menu targetParams Table menu notify Table menu Enable/disable V1/V2 access Display current SNMPv3 configuration Table 6-12 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm <usmUser number [1-16]> This command allows you to create a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user. To view menu options. 315393-J. see page 251. access <vacmAccess number [1-32]> This command allows you to specify access rights.

see page 256. This is also termed as transport endpoint. security level. consisting of message processing model. There may be multiple transport endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters. consisting of a transport domain and a transport address. see page 254. and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. notify <notify index [1-16]> A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions. A group defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular group. To view menu options. 248 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The SNMP MIB provides a mechanism for performing source address validation on incoming requests. taddr <snmpTargetAddr number [1-16]> This command allows you to configure destination information. To view menu options.0. To view menu options. or a particular transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . To view menu options. To view menu options. v1v2 disable|enable This command allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2. see page 253. see page 255. and for selecting community strings based on target addresses for outgoing notifications. cur Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration.2 Command Reference Table 6-12 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) group <vacmSecurityToGroup number [1-16]> A group maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects. see page 257. and security name information. comm <snmpCommunity number [1-16]> The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version-independent SNMP message parameters. tparam <target params index [1-16]> This command allows you to configure SNMP parameters. This command is enabled by default. security model.

The default algorithm is none. If you specify des as the privacy protocol. The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure. otherwise you will get an error message during validation. you need to provide a password. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 249 . This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch. 315393-J.0. authpw If you selected an authentication algorithm using the above command. You need to provide a security name to create the USM entry. privpw This command allows you to create or change the privacy password. priv des|none This command allows you to configure the type of privacy protocol on your switch.Alteon OS 22. then make sure that you have selected one of the authentication protocols (MD5 or HMAC-SHA-96).2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm User Security Model Configuration Menu You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model. auth md5|sha|none This command allows you to configure the authentication protocol between HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96. An SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user. If you select none as the authentication protocol. This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. The options are des (CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption Protocol) or none. [SNMPv3 usmUser name auth authpw priv privpw del cur 1 Menu] Set USM user name Set authentication protocol Set authentication password Set privacy protocol Set privacy password Delete usmUser entry Display current usmUser configuration Table 6-13 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command allows you to configure a string up to 32 characters long that represents the name of the user. you will get an error message. This command allows you to create or change your password for authentication.

mask <bitmask.1.3.Set MIB subtree(OID) which defines a family of view subtrees mask ..Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry cur .2 Command Reference Table 6-13 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the USM user entries. which when combined with the corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees.Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration Table 6-14 SNMPv3 View Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> This command defines the name for a family of view subtrees up to a maximum of 32 characters. cur Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration.1. cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu [SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu] name .Alteon OS 22.Set view name tree . 250 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. max size 32 characters> This command defines the bit mask. which is included in or excluded from the MIB view. cur Displays the USM user entries.Set view type del .1.2.0.0. such as.1.6. max 32 characters> This command defines MIB tree. 1.Set view mask type . del Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry. type included|excluded This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask define a family of view subtrees. tree <object identifier. a string of maximum 32 characters. which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a family of view subtrees. January 2005 .

0.Set prefix only or exact match rview . Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used. For more information on naming the management information.Set notify view index del .Set write view index nview .Set content prefix model .Set security model level .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access View-based Access Control Model Configuration Menu The view-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. The view-based Access Control Model defines a table that lists the locally available contexts by contextName. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. An SNMP entity has access to many contexts. prefix <32 character name> Defines the name of the context. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol.Set read view index wview . 315393-J. An SNMP context is a collection of management information that an SNMP entity can access.Set minimum level of security match . The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.Alteon OS 22. [SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu] name . the SNMP Architecture document.Delete vacmAccess entry cur . level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 251 . see RFC2571.Set group name prefix .Display current vacmAccess configuration Table 6-15 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines the name of the group.

wview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view.Alteon OS 22. nview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view. rview <32 character view name> This is a 32 character long read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view. January 2005 . If the value is set to prefix then the all the rows where the starting octets of the contextName exactly match the prefix are selected. del Deletes the View-based Access Control entry. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted. then all the rows whose contextName exactly matches the prefix are selected. cur Displays the View-based Access Control configuration.2 Command Reference Table 6-15 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access) Command Syntax and Usage match exact|prefix If the value is set to exact. 252 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.0.

uname <32 character name> Sets the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 249.Set USM user name gname .0.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.Set group gname del .Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration Table 6-16 SNMPv3 Group Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group) Command Syntax and Usage model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Defines the security model. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 253 . del Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry.Set security model uname .Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry cur . gname <32 character name> The name for the access group as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access/name on page 251.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu [SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu] model . cur Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration.

name <32 character name> Defines the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 249. max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of up to 255 characters maximum. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu This command is used for configuring the community table entry.Set community index name .Delete communityTable entry cur . 254 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Display current communityTable configuration Table 6-17 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/comm) Command Syntax and Usage index <32 character name> Allows you to configure the unique index value of a row in this table consisting of 32 characters maximum.0. [SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu] index . del Deletes the community table entry. The configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine.Set community string uname . tag <list of tag string.Set USM user name tag .Alteon OS 22.Set community tag del . cur Displays the community table configuration. This table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine. uname <32 character name> Defines a readable 32 character long string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP community name in a security model. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.

0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 255 .Set target transport address port taglist . cur Displays the current Target Address Table configuration. port <transport address port> Allows you to configure a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. addr <transport address ip> Allows you to configure a transport address IP that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. but unique identifier.Display current targetAddrTable configuration Table 6-18 Target Address Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary. taglist <list of tag string. This table of transport addresses is used in the generation of SNMP messages. The configured entry is stored in the target address table list in the SNMP engine.Set target address name addr . max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular operation.Delete targetAddrTable entry cur . [SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu] name . pname <32 character name> Defines the name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam/name on page 256. del Deletes the Target Address Table entry. 315393-J.Set tag list pname .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu This command is used to configure the target transport entry. target address name associated with this entry.Set target transport address IP port .Set targetParams name del .

mpmodel snmpv1|snmpv2c|snmpv3 Allows you to configure the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages. SNMPv1). This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message.Set security model uname . authNoPriv. SNMPv2c.Alteon OS 22. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP engine.Display current targetParamsTable configuration Table 6-19 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary. but unique identifier that is associated with this entry. The parameters include the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3.Set USM user name level .Set message processing model model . The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. or authPriv). level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this entry.Delete targetParamsTable entry cur . [SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu] name .0.Set minimum level of security del . and the security level (noAuthnoPriv. model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages.Set target params name mpmodel . the security name. the security model (for example: USM). The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. 256 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. uname <32 character name> Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table (page 249) on whose behalf the SNMP messages are generated using this entry. January 2005 .

2 Command Reference Table 6-19 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the targetParamsTable entry.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 257 . is selected. tag <list of tag string.Display current notifyTable configuration Table 6-20 Notify Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify) Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name> Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry. /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. that matches the value of this tag. 315393-J.Set notify name tag . cur Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration.Set notify tag del . [SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu] name . Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable.0. and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. max 255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag of 255 characters maximum that contains a tag value which is used to select entries in the Target Address Table. A notification typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions. cur Displays the current notify table configuration. del Deletes the notify table entry.Delete notifyTable entry cur .

Turn system TCP health services OFF cur .Turn system TCP health services ON off . January 2005 .Display current TCP health services configuration Table 6-21 System Health Check Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/health) Command Syntax and Usage add <TCP port (2-65534)> Adds TCP services to listen to the health checks. cur Displays the current TCP health check services configuration.0. on Turns on the TCP health check services. such as 80 for HTTP. Specify a TCP service port number. such as 80 for HTTP. 258 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Remove TCP services from listening on . off Turns off the TCP health check services.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/health System Health Check Configuration Menu [System TCP Health Menu] add .Add TCP services to listen for health check rem . rem <TCP port (2-65534)> Removes TCP services that were added for listening to health checks. Specify a TCP service port number.Alteon OS 22.

snmp disable|read-only|read-write Sets the snmp user access level to either disabled. tnet Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch. ICMP. https Displays HTTPS Server Access Menu. or read-write.0. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the browser-based interface. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 259 . set this to a different port (such as 8080).Display current system access configuration Table 6-22 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu. see page 261. tnport <TCP port number> The TCP port number that the telnet server listens for telnet sessions. It is disabled by default. Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non-standard port.Alteon OS 22. see page 263. see page 260.Set HTTP (Web) server port number snmp . You will see this command only if you are connected to the switch through the console port. To view menu options. user Displays the User Access Control Menu. If Global Server Load Balancing is to be used.Set max rate of ARP.HTTPS (Web) Server Access Menu http . read-only.Enable/disable Telnet access tnport .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access System Access Control Configuration [System Access Menu] mgmt .User Access Control Menu (passwords) https . This command is disabled by default. To view menu options.Set Telnet server port number rlimit . wport <TCP port number (1-65535)> Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content. The default is HTTP port 80. or UDP packets to MP cur . TCP. 315393-J.Management Network Definition Menu user . To view menu options.Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access wport .Set SNMP access control tnet .

[Management Networks Menu] add . Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation. it will cause the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and will create a “Network Down” state on the network.Remove mgmt network definition cur . ICMP. January 2005 . NOTE – If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces. /cfg/sys/access/mgmt Management Networks Menu This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes. Then specify the maximum rate.0. SNMP. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. RIP. Specify which protocol you wish to limit. TCP. 0-65535 (pkts/sec)> Sets switch-wide rate limiting on traffic entering the switch over ARP.2 Command Reference Table 6-22 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage rlimit <arp|icmp|tcp|udp> <max rate. NOTE – The add and rem commands below replace the /cfg/sys/mnet and /cfg/ sys/mmask commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS.Display current mgmt network definitions Table 6-23 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt) Command Syntax and Usage add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet. cur Displays the current configuration. or the Alteon OS browser-based interface. which the maximum number of packets per second that is allowed to enter the switch. 260 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. or UDP protocols.Add mgmt network definition rem .

cur Displays the current configuration. To view menu options. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. /cfg/sys/access/user User Access Control Menu uid usrpw sopw l4opw opw sapw l4apw admpw cur User ID Menu Set user password (user) Set SLB operator password (slboper) Set L4 operator password (l4oper) Set operator password (oper) Set Slb administrator password (slbadmin) Set L4 administrator password (l4admin) Set administrator password (admin) Display current user status NOTE – Passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters. usrpw Sets the user (user) password. Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage uid <User ID.0.Alteon OS 22. The SLB operator manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 261 . He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing configuration menus. which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address. 315393-J. but cannot make any configuration changes. Access includes “user” functions. sopw Sets the SLB operator (slboper)password. 1-10> Displays the User ID Menu.2 Command Reference Table 6-23 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt) Command Syntax and Usage rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Removes a defined network. He or she can view switch status information and statistics. see page 264.

He or she can view all switch information and statistics.2 Command Reference Table 6-24 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage l4opw Sets the Layer 4 operator (l4oper)password. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus. admpw Sets the administrator (admin) password. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. l4apw Sets the Layer 4 administrator (l4admin) password. The super user administrator has complete access to all menus. He or she can view all switch information and statistics. January 2005 . sapw Sets the SLB administrator (slbadmin) password. Access includes “oper” and “l4admin” functions. Access includes “slbadmin” functions. information. The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters. 262 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Access includes “slboper” functions.Alteon OS 22. Note that the Filter Menu options are not accessible to the SLB administrator. Administrator who configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. cur Displays the current user status. Access includes “l4oper” functions. Access includes “l4oper” functions. with the exception of not being able to configure filters. The operator manages all functions of the switch. and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch. opw Sets the operator (oper)password.0. The Layer 4 operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch. The Layer 4 administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.

315393-J.2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/https HTTPS Access Configuration Menu [https Menu] https port generate certSave cur Enable/Disable HTTPS Web access HTTPS WebServer port number Generate self-signed HTTPS server certificate save HTTPS certificate Display current SSL Web Access configuration Table 6-25 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https) Command Syntax and Usage https Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time. user’s name) []: Mr Smith Email (for example. It will take approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate.0. cur Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration. section) []: Alteon Common Name (for example. Then the switch will restart SSL agent. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 263 . to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted. generate Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange. company) []: Nortel Networks Organizational Unit Name (for example.Alteon OS 22.com You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate. city) []: Ottawa Organization Name (for example. email address) []: info@nortelnetworks. For example: Country Name (2 letter code) [ ]: CA State or Province Name (full name) []: Ontario Locality Name (for example. or the Web browser. The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields. certSave Allows the client. port <TCP port number> Defines the HTTPS Web server port number.

Operator. Using this command you can list the current status of the real server including the real server number.Enable user ID .2 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/user/uid System User ID Configuration Menu This feature allows the users to operate the real servers assigned to them. rem <real server number.Remove real server .Set user name .Alteon OS 22. name <8 char max> Defines the user name of maximum eight characters. 264 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . add <real server number.Add real server . Layer 4 Operator. and Administrator.Delete user ID . 1-1023> Assigns a real server access to this user. ena Enables the user ID. with User being the most restricted level.Display current user configuration Table 6-26 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage cos <user|slboper|l4oper|oper|slbadmin|l4admin|admin> Sets the Class-of-Service to define the user’s authority level. the real server name.Set user password . SLB Administrator.Disable user ID . 1-1023> Removes a real server access from this user. You can enable or disable the real servers and change the password for accessing these real servers.0. pswd <15 char max> Sets the user password of up to 15 characters maximum. the operational state of the real server. dis Disables the user ID. and the number of current sessions. Alteon OS defines these levels as: User. SLB Operator.Set class of service . [User ID 1 cos name pswd add rem ena dis del cur Menu] .

and support half or full-duplex operation. You may order the SFP modules from Nortel Networks. Alteon OS 2000 Series The following table displays the number of Fast Ethernet ports and SFP GBIC ports with the numbering of the ports on Alteon OS 2000 series: Table 6-27 Port Configuration and Numbering on Alteon OS 2000 Series Model Alteon 2208 (1U) Alteon 2216 (1U) Alteon 2224 (1U) Alteon 2424 (1U) 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Port Numbers Numbers 1–8 1–16 1–24 1–24 9–10 17–18 25–26 25–28 Fast Ethernet Ports The RJ-45 jack is used for connecting 10/100 Mbps Ethernet segments to the port. SFP GBIC Ports The LC jack is used for connecting Gigabit Ethernet fiber optic segments. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 265 .Alteon OS 22. 315393-J. cur Displays the current user ID configuration.0. The SFP modules are not shipped with the product. The ports are auto-sensing. auto-negotiating. Port configuration is different on Alteon OS 2000 series and 3000 series. /cfg/port <port number> Port Configuration The Port Menu enables you to configure settings for individual switch ports. This command is enabled by default.2 Command Reference Table 6-26 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the user ID.

see page 276. 1-4090> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. 1-256> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for non-IP traffic for this port.Alteon OS 22. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens.Gig Phy Menu pvid .Set BW Contract for non-IP traffic egbw .Enable/Disable RMON for port tag . name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port.Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port iponly . cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. nonip <BW Contract number. pvid <VLAN number.Fast Phy Menu gig . see page 276. The default is set to none. The default number is 1. this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu.Disable port cur . The commands on Alteon OS 2000 series and their description are as follows: [Port 1 Menu] fast .2 Command Reference For more information on connectors. please refer to the Hardware Installation Guide for Alteon OS.Display current port configuration Table 6-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage fast If a port is configured to support Fast Ethernet. To view menu options. gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet.Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames at ingress ena . January 2005 .Set port name cont .Set default port VLAN id name . this option displays the Fast Ethernet Physical Link Menu.Enable port dis . To view menu options.Set default port BW Contract nonip . 266 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set port egress bandwidth Limit rmon .0.

0. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port.Set auto negotiation cur .Display current fast link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. /cfg/port <port number> fast|gig Port Link Configuration [Fast Link Menu] speed . For example.Set flow control auto . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 267 . Using this command. It is disabled by default. 315393-J. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. dis Disables the port.) cur Displays the current port parameters. NOTE – You need Bandwidth Management license to use this command. the egress bandwidth for an FE port will be 100m.Set full or half duplex mode fctl .Set link speed mode . iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. It is disabled by default.Alteon OS 22. The default is 0. you can configure the egress bandwidth limit of the port to match with the bandwidth link of the receiving router or the switch. ena Enables the port. This means that the port’s speed will be taken as the egress bandwidth.2 Command Reference Table 6-28 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage egbw <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the egress bandwidth limit for the port to avoid overloading the receiving router or switch. It is disabled by default. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes.

these options do not appear on the Gigabit Link Menu. fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.Alteon OS 22.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port.0.2 Command Reference NOTE – Since the speed and mode parameters cannot be set for Gigabit Ethernet ports. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected. 268 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the fast and gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. you can set port parameters such as speed. and negotiation mode for the port link. mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode.The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected. Not all options are valid on all ports. cur Displays the current port parameters. flow control. January 2005 . This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu. Table 6-29 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/fast|gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the link speed. Using these configuration menus.

See “Dual-Mode Ports” on page 274 for more details. it can be configured at any speed.0. it is fixed at 1000 Mbps. 7. 2.Alteon OS 22. Four Small Form Pluggable (SFP) GBIC Fiber ports (9–12). These ports are designed to operate at 1000 Mbps and full duplex mode only.2 Command Reference Alteon OS 3000 Series The following table displays the port configuration and numbering on Alteon OS 3408: Table 6-30 Port configuration on Alteon OS 3408 Model Alteon 3408 (1U) 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Port Numbers 1. if 1000 Mbps is selected. and 8) with RJ-45 connectors. Four dual-mode ports (3. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 269 . You can set either interface as the preferred or backup link. 315393-J. However. 5. When the 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC port is selected as the preferred link. These ports have two interfaces each: 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC and 10/100/1000Base-T Copper. and 6). 7. NOTE – For more information on connectors. 2. When the 10/100/1000Base-T copper port is selected as the preferred link. 8 Dual-Mode Port Numbers 3–6 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Numbers 9–12 Port Configuration on Alteon OS 3408 The Alteon OS 3408 contains 12 ports. Their description is as follows: Four 1000BaseT ports (1. full-duplex with autonegotiation turned on. refer to the Alteon OS Hardware Installation Guide Part Number 315393-E. 4. autonegotiation must be turned on. The ports are autonegotiating and support half or full duplex operation.

To view menu options. It is disabled by default. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. It is disabled by default. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. see page 271. 7. The default is set to None. dis Disables the port.0. this option displays the Copper Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu.2 Command Reference Single-Mode ports 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Ports When you select a single-mode copper port (1. 7. you see the menu below: [Port 1 Menu] gig pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-31 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. January 2005 . (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277. It is disabled by default. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. ena Enables the port. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. 2. The default number is 1. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. 2. or 8).) 270 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.

Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Table 6-31 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. 2. you can set port parameters such as speed.Set duplex mode fctl .Set flow control auto .0.Set auto negotiate cur . /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu [GE Copper Link Menu] speed . Table 6-32 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. 2. 7. flow control. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. and negotiation mode for the port link. The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. Not all options are valid on all ports.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 271 315393-J. 7. or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current port parameters. Using these configuration menus. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.Set link speed mode . Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed.

2 Command Reference Table 6-32 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. 2. The default is set to None. To view menu options. The default number is 1. this option displays the SFP Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Fiber SFP Ports When you select a single-mode SFP fiber port (9–12). you see a slightly different menu as below: [Port 9 Menu] gig pvid name cont egbw rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - SFP Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Set port egress bandwidth Limit Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-33 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet.Alteon OS 22. 272 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. 7. January 2005 . cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters. see page 273.0. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port.

2 Command Reference Table 6-33 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. 315393-J. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 273 . and negotiation mode for the port link. It is disabled by default. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. It is disabled by default. Using these configuration menus.Set flow control . (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. you can set port parameters such as flow control. ena Enables the port. Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu [GE SFP Link fctl auto cur Menu] .0. dis Disables the port.Display current SFP gig link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. It is disabled by default.Alteon OS 22.) cur Displays the current port parameters.Set auto negotiate . refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277.

sfp Displays SFP Gigabit Physical Link Menu. cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit Ethernet link port parameters. 274 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 6-34 Single-Mode SFP Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9-12>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.0. Dual-Mode Ports When you select any one of the dual-mode ports (3–6). see page 276. January 2005 . you see the menu below: [Port 3 Menu] cop sfp pref back pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu SFP Gig Phy Menu Set preferred link Set backup link Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-35 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage cop Displays Copper Gigabit Physical Link Menu. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port. To view menu options. see page 277.

iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. The default is set to None. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 275 . The selected port will be used as the preferred port if both the ports are available. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. The default number is 1.0. You cannot set the preferred port as the backup port. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. the port will not switch automatically to the backup port if the preferred port goes down. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. back copper|sfp|none Sets the preference for the backup link if the preferred port is not available.) cur Displays the current port parameters. 315393-J. It is disabled by default. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port.Alteon OS 22. ena Enables the port. It is disabled by default. dis Disables the port. It is disabled by default. If you choose none. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 277.2 Command Reference Table 6-35 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage pref copper|sfp Sets the port preference between copper or SFP mode.

Set flow control auto . The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port.Set duplex mode fctl . Link menu options are described in Table 6-36 and appear on the cop port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. 276 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .Set link speed mode . The choices include: Any for autonegotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. The choices include: Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode.2 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> cop Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration [GE Copper Link Menu] speed . and negotiation mode for the port link. Table 6-36 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>/cop) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters.Set auto negotiate cur . flow control. you can set port parameters such as speed. Not all options are valid on all ports. Using these configuration menus.Alteon OS 22.0.

0.2 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> sfp Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu [GE SFP Link fctl cur Menu] . The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control cur Displays the current SFP Gigabit link port configuration.Alteon OS 22. The port state will revert to its original configuration when the Alteon Application Switch is reset. See the “Operations Menu” on page 433 for other operations-level commands. Temporarily Disabling a Port To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes.Display current SFP gig link configuration Table 6-37 Dual-Mode SFP Gigabit Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3-6>/sfp) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. 315393-J.Set flow control . enter the following command at any prompt: Main# /oper/port <port number>/dis Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port. you do not need to use apply or save. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 277 .

Table 6-38 Port Mirroring menu options (/cfg/pmirr) Command Syntax and Usage mirror disable|enable Enables or disables port mirroring monport <monitoring port (port to mirror to)> Displays port-mirroring menu options that help configure the port. cur Displays the current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports. /cfg/pmirr/monport Port-Mirroring Menu [Port 1 Menu] add .Rem "Mirrored" port and VLANs cur . enable.Add "Mirrored" port and VLANs rem .0. and disable the monitored port. see page 278.Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration 278 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 . To view menu options. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port. you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage. When enabled. The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure. network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port.2 Command Reference /cfg/pmirr Port Mirroring Menu [Port Mirroring mirror monport cur Menu] Enable/Disable Mirroring Configure Monitor Port Display All Mirrored and Monitored Ports and VLANs Port mirroring is disabled by default.Alteon OS 22.

VLAN-based port mirroring allows the user to monitor traffic based on VLANs associated with a port. By default. If you do not specify a VLAN. It is necessary to specify the direction because: If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress). BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic. BWM is turned off. receive higher priority versus non-critical traffic. In order to enable BWM.Alteon OS 22. /cfg/bwm Bandwidth Management Configuration Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications. If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both. or both)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Adds the port to be mirrored. It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic.2 Command Reference Table 6-39 Port-Based Port-Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport) Command Syntax and Usage add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in.0. rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Removes the mirrored port. out. all traffic on that port will be mirrored. Refer to your Application Guide for more information. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. NOTE – BWM is a software key-enabled feature that requires users to purchase a license and a key. users need to enter the Bandwidth Management key using the /oper/swkey command. the frame is sent to the mirrored port. such as e-commerce transactions. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 279 . cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port. You can add specific VLAN(s) to a be monitored even if there are multiple VLANs associated with that port. 315393-J. the frame is sent to the monitoring port.

To view menu options. group <BW Group number (1-32)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Group Menu.Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing ON off .Set the frequency of BWM email in minutes force . 280 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Display current Bandwidth Management configuration NOTE – Up to 256 bandwidth management contracts can be configured on Alteon OS. To manage bandwidth on an Alteon Application Switch. see the Alteon OS 22. Table 6-40 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW contract number (1-256)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Contract Menu. January 2005 . The default is set to 0. For further details.2 Command Reference [Bandwidth Management Menu] cont .Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing OFF cur .0. see the Alteon OS 22. you must create one or more bandwidth management contracts. entries <64k|128k|256k|512k|1024k> Sets the number of entries in the Bandwidth Management IP user table.2 Application Guide. see page 285. The default is set to None. see page 284.2 Application Guide.Enable/disable enforce policies on . For further details.Contract menu policy .Alteon OS 22. frequen <1-1440 minutes. To view menu options. To view menu options. 0 for default behavior> Sets the frequency of Bandwidth Management email in minutes. A bandwidth policy is often based on a rate structure whereby a Web host could charge a customer for bandwidth utilization.Set SMTP server user name entries .Set number of entries in the BWM IP user table frequen . By default. specifying the guaranteed bandwidth rates. Bandwidth policies are bandwidth limita- tions defined for any set of frames.0.0.Policy menu group . see page 281.Group menu user . policy <BW policy number (1-512)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Policy Menu. this option is disabled. The switch uses these contracts to limit individual traffic flows. user <user name> Sets the SMTP user name to whom the history statistics will be mailed.

Enable/disable overwriting IP TOS for this Contract mononly . off Globally disables Bandwidth Management on this switch. This means that no bandwidth limit is applied on the queues.Display current BW Contract configuration Table 6-41 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage timepol <BW Contract time policy number (1-2)> Displays Time Policy Menu. January 2005 .Set Contract name policy .Set user (IP address) limiting type for this contract wtcpwin .Set Contract Policy prec . By default.Enable/disable Saving Contract stats history wtos .0. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 281 315393-J. on Globally enables Bandwidth Management on this switch.Time policy menu name . The packets will exit in the order they came in.Alteon OS 22. /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number> Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration [BW Contract 1 Menu] timepol .Set Contract Precedence history .2 Command Reference Table 6-40 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage force disable|enable Enables or disables the enforcement of bandwidth policy on the traffic. When disabled.Enable/disable traffic shaping for this contract iplimit . see page 283. To view menu options.Enable/disable user (IP address) limiting for this contract iptype . the reordering of the packets does not occur.Enable BW Contract dis .Enable/disable monitor-only mode for this Contract shaping .Enable/disable overwriting TCP Window for this Contract ena .Delete BW Contract cur . name <15 character name> Sets the name for this Bandwidth Management contract. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management configuration.Disable BW Contract del . this option is enabled.

The statistics are generated but no shaping or limiting will apply to this contract. wtos disable|enable Disables or enables overwriting the IP Type of Service (TOS) for this contract. By default. By default. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management contract configuration. If enabled. For details. history disable|enable Disables or enables saving statistics for this contract on the server. This may help reduce the traffic congestion. The default policy number is 64.2 Command Reference Table 6-41 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage policy <Bandwidth policy number (1-512)> Sets the policy number for this Bandwidth Management contract. refer to the Application Guide. The default value is 1. iplimit disable|enable Enables or disables user (IP address) limiting for this contract. prec <Bandwidth precedence value (1-255)> Sets the precedence value for this Bandwidth Management contract. 282 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. This command is used for design and auditing purposes only. By overwriting the default window size. it is enabled.Alteon OS 22. the user can modify the TCP window size to a lower value so that when the packet arrives carrying the bytes within that window size. shaping disable|enable Disables or enables shaping of the traffic for this contract. del Removes this contract from the switch. iptype <sip|dip> Defines the IP type for this contract. In this context. shaping means buffering a packet and keeping it ready to be sent. whether the user (IP address) limiting is enforced by the source IP address (SIP) or the destination IP address (DIP). the receiver of that packet does not have to wait for acknowledgement.0. mononly disable|enable Enables or disables monitor-only mode for this Contract. wtcpwin disable|enable Enables or disables overwriting TCP Window for this Contract. each IP address is limited to the user limit configured in /cfg/bwm/policy on page 284. January 2005 . Do not set the value to lower than 1500 bytes. it is disabled. dis Disables this Bandwidth Management contract. ena Enables this Bandwidth Management contract.

January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 283 .Enable Time Policy disable .Delete Time Policy cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number>/timepol <Contract time policy number> BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu This feature enables the user to configure different policies based on the time of the day using the following menu and commands: [BW Contract 1 Time Policy 1 Menu] day .Alteon OS 22. the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher. If am or pm is not specified.Set Time Policy from hour to .Set Time Policy to hour policy . enable Enables the Time Policy command on the switch. to <1-12am/pm> Sets the end limit of time in hours. policy <BW Policy number.0.Disable Time Policy delete . weekend (Saturday and Sunday) or everyday.Display current Time Policy configuration Table 6-42 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/ timepol) Command Syntax and Usage day <mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun|weekday|weekend|everyday> Defines the day(s) of the week. disable Disables the Time Policy command on the switch. weekdays (Monday to Friday). If am or pm is not specified.Set Time Policy day from .Set Time Policy enable . the switch will default to am for numbers lower than 12 and will default to pm for numbers 13 or higher. from <1-12am/pm> Defines the time from where you need to start the time in hours. 315393-J. The default is everyday. 1-512> Defines the policy number for the contract.

This is the highest amount of bandwidth available to this policy.2 Command Reference Table 6-42 BWM Contract Time Policy Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/ timepol) Command Syntax and Usage delete Deletes Time Policy.Alteon OS 22.0. /cfg/bwm/policy <policy number> Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration [Policy 1 Menu] hard soft resv userlim utos otos buffer del cur Set hard Limit Set soft Limit Set Reservation Limit Set per user (IP address) Limit Set underlimit (soft limit) TOS Set overlimit (soft limit) TOS Set Buffer Limit Delete BW Policy Display current Policy configuration Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol) Command Syntax and Usage hard <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the hard bandwidth limit for this policy. January 2005 . soft <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the soft bandwidth limit for this policy. cur Displays the current Time Policy configuration on the switch. 284 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default value is 2000 kbps. resv <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the reserve limit for this policy. The default value is 500Kbytes. The default value is 1000 kbps. userlim <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the bandwidth limit for each IP address in the contract traffic. This is the amount of bandwidth always available to this policy.

Delete BW Group cur . del Deletes this Bandwidth Management group. cur Displays all current Bandwidth Management Group configurations. /cfg/bwm/group Bandwidth Management Group Configuration Menu [BW Group 1 Menu] add . 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. With this option set to the default value of “0.Display current BW Group configuration Table 6-44 Bandwidth Management Group Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/group) Command Syntax and Usage add <BW Contract number.0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 285 . With this option set to the default value of “0.” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. otos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new otos (over the limit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is over the soft limit. 1-256> Adds a contract to this group. buffer <Maximum buffer space (bytes) (8192-128000)> Sets the buffer limit for this policy. rem <BW Contract number. 1-256> Removes a contract from this group. del Deletes the bandwidth management policy.Add Contract to this group rem .” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. cur Displays the current value of the bandwidth policy configuration.Remove Contract from this group del .2 Command Reference Table 6-43 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol) Command Syntax and Usage utos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new utos (underlimit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is under the soft limit. The default value is 8192 bytes.

2 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cur Bandwidth Management Current Configuration Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement: enabled SMTP server user name: Contract Name Policy Prec Hist TOS State Shaping 1 cont_1 1 1 E E E E 2 cont_2 2 1 E D D D 256 Default -0 E D E D *Default contract gets all the BW that is available on a port after the active contracts reserved BW is taken.Alteon OS 22.0. January 2005 . Policy 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Hard 25M 10M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M Soft 20M 8M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M Resv oTOS uTOS Buffer 500K 150 100 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 286 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

When Nortel multiple STG mode is disabled. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 287 . To view menu options. To view menu options. the Nortel implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. cur Displays the current Layer 2 parameters.0. see page 292. see page 288.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2 Layer 2 Configuration Menu [Layer 2 Menu] stg trunk lacp vlan ntmstg cur Spanning Tree Menu Trunk Group Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu VLAN Menu Enable/disable Nortel multiple STG mode Display current layer 2 parameters Table 6-45 Layer 2 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2) Command Syntax and Usage stg <group number [1-16]> Displays Spanning Tree Group Menu. To view menu options. see page 297. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays VLAN Menu. trunk <trunk group number> Displays Trunk Group Menu. the Cisco implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. When Nortel multiple STG mode is enabled. 315393-J. see page 294. ntmstg disable|enable Enables or disables Nortel Multiple Spanning Tree Group mode. The ntmstg enabled device will not work with the device configured for Cisco implementation of Spanning Tree BPDUs. You need to reset the switch with the command /boot/reset for the Spanning Tree Group configuration to change to ntmstg enabled. lacp Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Menu. To view menu options. The factory default value of this command is Nortel multiple STG mode disabled.

1p Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group on . Spanning Tree can be enabled or disabled for each port.Display current bridge parameters 288 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group remove .Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur . Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802. Each VLAN can be placed in only one Spanning Tree group per switch except for the default Spanning Tree group (STG 1). See your Application Guide for a detailed description of this feature and how to configure Spanning Tree Groups on the switch. This command is turned on by default. Alteon OS supports up to 16 instances of Spanning Trees or Spanning Tree groups. Thus. [Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu] brg .Bridge parameter menu port .Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group clear . If that path fails.Port parameter menu add .Globally turn Spanning Tree ON off .2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Configuration When multiple paths exist on a network. STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology. Multiple Spanning Trees can be enabled on tagged or untagged ports. STP forces redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state. Spanning Tree automatically sets up another active path on the network to sustain network operations. The default Spanning Tree group (1) can have more than one VLAN. Spanning Tree configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path.Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF default . Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path.0. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) detects and eliminates logical loops in a bridged or switched network. When multiple paths exist. All other Spanning Tree groups (2-16) can have only one VLAN associated with it.

Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. STP must be enabled. To view menu options. add <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.2 Command Reference NOTE – When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy. default Resets STG and Group member parameters to factory default. 315393-J. cur Displays the current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters. remove <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 289 . Table 6-46 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stp) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree. see page 291. on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol.0. port <port number> Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu. see page 290. off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol.

The range is 1 to 10 seconds.Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs) fwd . hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)> Configures the bridge hello time. and the default is 20 seconds. The range is 6 to 40 seconds. configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. and the default is 32768.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). The lower the value. January 2005 .0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg/brg Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration [Bridge Spanning Tree Menu] prior . the higher the bridge priority. 0 to disable) cur . STP bridge parameters include: Bridge priority Bridge hello time Bridge maximum age Forwarding delay Bridge aging time Table 6-47 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)> Configures the bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STP root bridge. mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)> Configures the bridge maximum age.Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs] mxage .Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. 290 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. To make this switch the root bridge. fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)> Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STP network. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state.Display current bridge parameters Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STP operation of the switch. The range is 0 to 65535. and the default is 2 seconds.Alteon OS 22.Set bridge Priority [0-65535] hello . The range is 4 to 30 seconds.Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs) aging . and the default is 15 seconds.

cur Displays the current bridge STP parameters.0. set this parameter to 0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 291 .2 Command Reference Table 6-47 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage aging <new bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs. 315393-J. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. When configuring STP bridge parameters.Display current port Spanning Tree parameters Spanning Tree port parameters are used to modify STP operation on an individual port basis. To disable aging. STP port parameters include: Port priority Port path cost STP is turned on by default for the port. the following formulas must be used: 2*(fwd-1) > mxage 2*(hello+1) < mxage /cfg/l2/stg <STG Group Index>/port <port #> Spanning Tree Port Configuration [Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu] prior . The aging time specifies the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the forwarding database. and the default is 300 seconds. 0 for default) on .Turn port's Spanning Tree ON off . 0 to disable)> Configures the forwarding database aging time.Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF cur .Alteon OS 22.Set port Path Cost (1-65535.Set port Priority (0-255) cost .

the lower the path cost. larger virtual link. and the default is 128. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port.2 Command Reference Table 6-48 Spanning Tree Port Menu (/cfg/l2/stp/port) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new port Priority (0-255)> Configures the port priority.0. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together. Best performance is achieved when all ports in a trunk are configured for the same speed. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. Up to eight ports/trunks can belong to the same trunk group. The default is 10 for 100Mbps ports. /cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number> Trunk Configuration Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth and multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk capable devices. combining their bandwidth to create a single.Alteon OS 22. cost <new port Path Cost (1-65535. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. Up to 12 trunk groups can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch. The range is 0 to 255. 292 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. on Enables STP on the port. cur Displays the current STP port parameters. January 2005 . and 1 for Gigabit ports. The range is 1 to 65535. the faster the port. Generally speaking. with the following restrictions: Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group. When trunk groups are configured. A value of 0 indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. Trunking from non-Alteon devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology. off Disables STP on the port. 0 for default)> Configures the port path cost.

Display current Trunk Group configuration Table 6-49 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this trunk group.Remove port from trunk group ena . the trunk group is empty and disabled. cur Displays the current trunk group parameters. dis Turns the current trunk group off. the contract number is 256 for AD3 and 1024 for AD4. del Removes the current trunk group configuration. rem <port number> Removes a physical port from the current trunk group. add <port number> Adds a physical port to the current trunk group.0.Add port to trunk group rem .Set BW contract for this trunk group add . 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 293 . By default.Disable trunk group del . ena Enables the current trunk group. [Trunk group 1 Menu] cont .2 Command Reference By default.Enable trunk group dis .Delete trunk group cur .

3ad standard allows two or more standard Ethernet links to form a single Layer 2 link using the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). This port initiates negotiation with the partner system port by sending LACPDU (Link Aggregation Control Protocol Data Unit) packets. The maximum number of configurable trunk groups are 40: 12 user configurable trunks and 28 LACP trunks depending upon the maximum number of ports in the switch.3ad standard on the Alteon OS. active The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk.0. logical link segment.0. LACP automatically determines which member links can be aggregated and then aggregates them. This protocol allows the user to group several physical ports into one logical port (LACP trunk group) with any switch that supports IEEE 802. When the system initializes. You can configure the trunk groups manually called the static trunks as well as you can configure dynamic trunk group using the IEEE 802.3ad standard called the LACP trunks. The maximum number of active physical ports in any trunk group is eight and the number of standby ports is also eight.Alteon OS 22. The 802. passive The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. It provides for the controlled addition and removal of physical links for the link aggregation. traffic is reassigned dynamically to the remaining links of the LACP trunk group or is assigned to the standby LACP links. 294 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. At the core of the 802. If a link in a LACP trunk group fails. off (default) The user can configure this port to a regular static trunk group.3ad-2000 for a detailed information about the standard. and treating them as if they were part of a single. Link aggregation is a method of grouping physical link segments of the same media type and speed in full duplex. all ports are in off mode by default.2 supports IEEE 802. This port only responds to the negotiation requests sent from an LACP active port.3ad standard is Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Alteon OS 22. Each external port in the Alteon OS can have one of the following LACP modes. January 2005 . NOTE – Refer to IEEE 802.3ad standard (LACP).

Display current LACP configuration Table 6-50 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp) Command Syntax and Usage sysprio <1-65535> Defines the priority value (1 through 65535) for the Alteon OS. and an aggregator for LACP to start negotiation on these ports. NOTE – All ports are in LACP off mode by default. cur Displays the current LACP configuration. port <port number> Displays the LACP Port menu. All the aggregatable ports must have the same LAG ID. The system priority. decides which eight ports should be combined to form a trunk group between two switches. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 295 . an operational key. The default value is long. in conjunction with port priority. [LACP Menu] sysprio . see page 296. System priority is used when there are more than eight ports configured with the same adminkey.0.Alteon OS 22. You can form an active LACP trunk group with all the ports that have the same LAG ID.Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner info port . Please refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for a detailed information on this protocol. You need to assign the same admin key to a group of ports to make them aggregatable. You can choose between short (3 seconds) or long (90 seconds) timeout periods. 315393-J.Set LACP system priority timeout . The link can generate Link Aggregation ID (LAG ID) based on the operational key. To view menu options. Lower numbers provide higher priority. The default value is 32768. Use the following commands to configure LACP on the Alteon OS.LACP port Menu cur . timeout <short|long> Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner. The rest of the ports stay in standby mode to substitute for any failed ports.2 Command Reference Each LACP active or passive port needs an admin.

2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp/port <port number> LACP Port Configuration Menu [LACP Port 1 Menu] mode .0. you can turn LACP off for this port. prio <1-65535> Sets the priority value for the selected port. All ports are in off mode by default. but only respond to the negotiation requests from active ports. you can turn LACP on and set this port to passive mode. Lower numbers provide higher priority.Display current LACP port configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on a selected port. January 2005 . you can turn LACP on and set this port to active. Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational state generated internally) can form an LACP trunk group. adminkey <1-255> Sets the admin key for this port. You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk.Alteon OS 22.Set LACP port admin key cur . active: Using this option. cur Displays the current LACP configuration for this port. Table 6-51 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp/port #) Command Syntax and Usage mode <off for no LACP or active or passive> off: Using this option.Set LACP port priority adminkey . Only active ports initiate negotiation with the partner system port by sending the LACPDU packets. Passive ports do not initiate negotiation. passive: Using this option. 296 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default value is 128.Set LACP mode prio .

[VLAN 1 Menu] name stg cont add rem def jumbo learn ena dis del cur - Set VLAN name Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group Set BW contract Add port to VLAN Remove port from VLAN Define VLAN as list of ports Enable/disable Jumbo Frame support Enable/disable smac learning Enable VLAN Disable VLAN Delete VLAN Display current VLAN configuration Table 6-52 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage name Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1. cont <BW Contract number.2 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number> VLAN Configuration VLANs are commonly used to split up groups of network users into manageable broadcast domains. add <port number> Adds port(s) or trunk group(s) to the VLAN membership. The default contract number is 256 on AD3 and 1024 on AD4. and change the port membership of the VLAN. which is enabled all the time. (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for this VLAN.0. By default. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 297 . The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes. to create logical segmentation of workgroups. delete the VLAN. For more information on configuring VLANs. see “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 34. rem <port number> Removes port(s) or trunk group(s) from this VLAN. 315393-J. stg <Spanning Tree Group index (1-16)> Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group.Alteon OS 22. change the status of the VLAN. and to enforce security policies among logical segments. The default VLAN name is the first one.

By default. dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration.2 Command Reference Table 6-52 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage def <list of port numbers> Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. del Deletes this VLAN. you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on (see the tag command on page 270). cur Displays the current VLAN configuration. jumbo disable|enable Enables or disables jumbo frame support on this VLAN. You cannot remove a port from VLAN #1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. it defines ports between 1-28 for VLAN 1. ena Enables this VLAN. 298 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. You need to reset the switch using /boot/reset command to enable jumbo frames on the switch. Every port must be a member of at least one VLAN.0. learn disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address learning on this VLAN. Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN #1. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. Also. NOTE – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN.

To view menu options. To view menu options see page 308. To view menu options see page 309. To view menu options. 315393-J. route Displays the IP Static Route Menu. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol menu. To view menu options. gw <default gateway number (1-259)> Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 299 . frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. nwf <Network filter number (1-256)> Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. rip1 Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu. see page 302. see page 301. To view menu options. see page 313. To view menu options. see page 304. see page 304.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3 Layer 3 Configuration Menu [Layer 3 Menu] if gw route arp frwd nwf rmap rip1 ospf bgp port dns bootp vrrp rtrid metrc cur Interface Menu Default Gateway Menu Static Route Menu ARP Menu Forwarding Menu Network Filters Menu Route Map Menu Routing Information Protocol Menu Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu Border Gateway Protocol Menu IP Port Menu Domain Name System Menu Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu Set router ID Set default gateway metric Display current IP configuration Table 6-53 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the IP Interface Menu. see page 306.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. rmap <route map number (1-32)> Displays the Route Map Menu.

For more information on gateway metrics. 300 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 6-53 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays the OSPF Menu. see page 315. To view menu options. bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu. see page 347. see page 333. To view menu options.0. The default gateway metric is strict.101)> Defines the router ID. rtrid <IP address (such as. To view menu options. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. cur Displays the current IP configuration. 192. To view menu options. vrrp Displays Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu. see page 332.17. see page 324. metrc strict|roundrobin Sets the default gateway metric for strict or roundrobin. dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. port <port number> Displays the IP Port Menu. bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu. January 2005 . see page 330. see page 331.4.

January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 301 .101)> Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation.0.4.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/if <interface number> IP Interface Configuration [IP Interface addr mask vlan relay ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Set IP address Set subnet mask Set VLAN number Enable/disable BOOTP relay Enable IP interface Disable IP interface Delete IP interface Display current interface configuration The Alteon Application Switch can be configured with up to 256 IP interfaces.255. Each IP interface represents the Alteon Application Switch on an IP subnet on your network. cur Displays the current interface settings. The Interface option is disabled by default. Each interface can belong to one VLAN. 315393-J. dis Disables this IP interface. Table 6-54 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as 192. relay disable|enable Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface.17.Alteon OS 22. mask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. ena Enables this IP interface.255.0)> Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation. It is enabled by default. del Removes this IP interface. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Configures the VLAN number for this interface. though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it.

The default is 8 attempts.Disable default gateway del . This option is disabled by default.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/gw <gateway number> Default IP Gateway Configuration [Default gateway 1 Menu] addr .Set VLAN number prio . The default is 2 seconds. The intr option sets the time between health checks.Display current default gateway configuration NOTE – The switch can be configured with up to 255 gateways. 302 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable default gateway dis . Gateways one to four are reserved for default gateway load balancing. retry <number of attempts (1-120)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative.Set interval between ping attempts retry .17.44)> Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation.4.Set IP address intr . 192. Gateways five to 259 are used for load-balancing of VLAN-based gateways. January 2005 . The range is from 1 to 120 seconds.Delete default gateway cur .0. Table 6-55 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage addr <default gateway address (such as.Enable/disable ARP only health checks ena . The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. intr <0-60 seconds> The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up.Alteon OS 22. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the VLAN to be assigned to this default IP gateway.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN vlan .Set priority of default gateway route arp .

arp disable|enable Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. If you set the priority to high. 315393-J. then the default gateway route will always be preferred over learned default routes (such as from OSPF.0.2 Command Reference Table 6-55 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage prio <high|low> Allows you to change the priority of the default gateway route to either high or low. relative to learned default routes. NOTE – By default learned default route has higher priority than the configured default gateway route. see page 347. dis Disables the gateway. del Deletes the gateway from the configuration. or RIP protocols). cur Displays the current gateway settings. ena Enables the gateway for use. Default Gateway Metrics For information about configuring which gateway is selected when multiple default gateways are enabled. If you set the priority to low. BGP. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 303 . This command is disabled by default. then learned default routes will always be preferred over the default gateway route.Alteon OS 22.

Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet.0.Remove static route cur .Display current ARP configuration 304 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set re-ARP period in minutes . cur Displays the current IP static routes. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation.Add static route rem . ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/route IP Static Route Configuration [IP Static Route Menu] add .0. In any IP communication. the route becomes a black hole route.Display current static routes Up to 128 static routes can be configured. January 2005 . /cfg/l3/arp ARP Configuration Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer. Table 6-56 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route) Command Syntax and Usage add <destination> <mask> <gateway> <interface number> Adds a static route.Static ARP Menu .Alteon OS 22. [ARP Menu] static rearp cur .0. rem <destination> <mask> Removes a static route.. If a gateway address is 0. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. destination subnet mask. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address.0. where any packet routed to this destination will be dropped. and gateway address. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache.

101)> Deletes a permanent ARP entry.x and below allow the user to configure the ARP information but that information cannot be retained over a switch reboot. rearp <2-120 minutes> Defines re-ARP period in minutes.0 and above allows the static ARP configuration to be retained over reboots. Alteon OS 20. del <IP address (such as. NOTE – Alteon OS 21. To view options. cur Displays the current ARP configurations. /cfg/l3/arp/static ARP Static Configuration Menu Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learnt dynamically.Add a permanent ARP entry del . cur Displays current static ARP configuration. 192.0. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 305 . 315393-J.Display current static ARP configuration Table 6-58 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent ARP entry.17. [Static ARP Menu] add .4.2 Command Reference Table 6-57 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage static Displays Static ARP menu.Alteon OS 22. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network.Delete an ARP entry cur . see page 305.

[IP Local Networks Menu] add . This command is disabled by default. Up to five local networks (lnets) can be configured. January 2005 .Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts on . dirbr disable|enable Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts. on Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch.Alteon OS 22. and to remove local networks.0.Remove local network definition cur . To view menu options. /cfg/l3/frwd/local Local Network Route Caching Definition This menu is used for adding local networks by setting the local network address and netmask for the route cache.Globally turn IP Forwarding ON off . cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/frwd IP Forwarding Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Menu] local .Add local network definition rem . Forwarding is turned off by default.Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF cur . see page 306. off Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch.Display current IP Forwarding configuration Table 6-59 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd) Command Syntax and Usage local Displays the menu used to define local network for route caching.Local network definition for route caching menu dirbr .Display current local network definitions 306 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

and the local network mask is the mask which is applied to produce the range.0. By default. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache” on page 307.255.32.255.0.0.127.255. For details.0. Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache The Local Route Cache lets you use switch resources more efficiently. This produces a range that includes all Internet addresses for route caching: 0.32.0. Addresses to be cached are subnets that are directly connected and for which there is an interface configured on the Alteon Application Switch.0.0 255. The default gateways must be within range.0 through 255.255 128. rem <local network address> <local network mask> Removes a definition for a local network. Table 6-60 Local Routing Cache Address Ranges Local Host Address Range 0.0 .2 Command Reference Table 2 IP Local Networks Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd/local) Command Syntax and Usage add <local network address> <local network mask> Adds a definition for a local network.0.255 Address 0.0.0.0.255.0.0.205.32.0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 307 .255.0 NOTE – All addresses that fall outside the defined range are forwarded to the default gateway.Alteon OS 22. The /cfg/l3/frwd/local/add parameters define a range of addresses that will be cached on the Alteon Application Switch. you could configure the parameters as shown in the examples in the following table.0.0 .0 128. the local network address and mask are both set to 0. by reducing the size of the ARP table on the Alteon Application Switch. To determine if a route should be added to the memory cache.0.0.0.255.0 205.255. To limit the route cache to your local hosts.255.0.0 128.0.0.0.255. the destination address is masked (bitwise and) with the local network mask and checked against the local network address.0 Mask 128.0 . cur Displays the current local network definitions.255 205.255. The local network address is used to define the base IP address in the range which will be cached. 315393-J.

2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/nwf Network Filter Configuration [IP Network Filter 1 Menu] addr .0. delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration. 308 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .0.0.0.Disable Network Filter delete . The default address is 0.IP Subnet mask enable . mask <subnet mask (such as.0.Display current Network Filter configuration Table 6-61 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. assign the network filter to a route map.17.Alteon OS 22. The default value is 0.0.44)> Sets the starting IP address for this filter. cur Displays the current the Network Filter configuration. enable Enables the Network Filter configuration. 192.255.255. then assign the route map to the peer.Enable Network Filter disable . disable Disables the Network Filter configuration.0.Delete Network Filter cur .4. For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).0)> Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled.IP Address mask . 255.

NOTE – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure. metric <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric of the matched route. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. aspath <number (1-8)> Displays the Autonomous System (AS) Filter menu. For more information. For more information.0. which affects both inbound and outbound directions. The path with the higher preference is preferred. [IP Route Map alist aspath ap lp metric type prec weight enable disable delete cur 1 - Menu] Access List number AS Filter Menu Set as-path prepend of the matched route Set local-preference of the matched route Set metric of the matched route Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route Set the precedence of this route map Set weight of the matched route Enable route map Disable route map Delete route map Display current route map configuration Table 6-62 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) Command Syntax and Usage alist <number (1-8)> Displays the Access List menu. One to three path preferences can be configured. ap <AS number> [<AS number>] [<AS number>]|none Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. lp <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the local preference of the matched route. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 309 . see page 312.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> Route Map Configuration Menu Route maps control and modify routing information. see page 311.

none—Removes the OSPF metric. weight <value (0-65534)>|none Sets the weight of the route map. disable Disables the route map.2 Command Reference Table 6-62 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage type <value (1|2)>|none Assigns the type of OSPF metric. The smaller the value. cur Displays the current route configuration. The default is type 1. enable Enables the route map. Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics. delete Deletes the route map. Type 2 routes have more cost than Type 2. prec <value (1-255)> Sets the precedence of the route map. January 2005 . Default value is 10.Alteon OS 22. the higher the precedence.0. 310 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

cur Displays the current Access List configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number/alist <access list number> IP Access List Configuration Menu NOTE – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access list you wish to configure. 315393-J. See “/cfg/l3/nwf” on page 308 for details.0. disable Disables the access list. [IP Access List nwf metric action enable disable delete cur - 1 Menu] Network Filter number Metric Set Network Filter action Enable Access List Disable Access List Delete Access List Display current Access List configuration Table 6-63 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist) Command Syntax and Usage nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Sets the network filter number. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies action for the access list. delete Deletes the access list. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 311 . enable Enables the access list. metric <(1-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA.Alteon OS 22.

Set AS Filter action enable . enable Enables the Autonomous System filter. 312 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. [AS Filter 1 Menu] as . disable Disables the Autonomous System filter.Enable AS Filter disable .Alteon OS 22.0. delete Deletes the Autonomous System filter.AS number action . action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action. January 2005 .Display current AS Filter configuration Table 6-64 AS Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/aspath) Command Syntax and Usage as <AS number (1-65535)> Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number.Delete AS Filter cur . cur Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> aspath <autonomous system path> Autonomous System Filter Path NOTE – The rmap number (1-32) and the path number (1-8) represent the AS path you wish to configure.Disable AS Filter delete .

Enable/disable poisoned reverse vip . the natural mask is always applied by the router receiving the update. This option is turned off by default. RIP is one of a class of algorithms known as distance vector algorithms. RIP uses broadcast User Datagram protocol (UDP) data packets to exchange routing information. If information about a network is not received for 90 seconds. 315393-J. RIP sends routing information updates every 30 seconds. The RIP1 Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol.Globally turn RIP ON off . version 1 (RIP1) parameters.Enable/disable vip advertisement on . the metric associated with the network is raised to infinity (U) – the metric is set for 16.Enable/disable listening to route updates deflt . If information about a network is not received for 180 seconds (six update intervals).Display current RIP configuration NOTE – Do not configure RIP1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2.Alteon OS 22.Set update period in seconds spply .Enable/disable listening to default routes statc . [Routing Information Protocol Menu] updat . which means the network has become unreachable. mask information is sent.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip1 Routing Information Protocol Configuration The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol (IGP).0. For RIP1. no mask information is exchanged.Enable/disable supplying route updates lsten . For RIP2.Globally turn RIP OFF cur . January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 313 .Enable/disable supplying static routes poisn . it is removed from the routing table. This update contains known networks and the distances (hop count) associated with each one. The distance or hop count is used as the metric to determine the best path to a remote network or host where the hop count does not exceed 15 hops assuming a cost of one for each network.

If we disable all the real servers using operation command. the switch rejects RIP default routes. This command is disabled by default. spply disable|enable Enables or disables supplying route updates. It is set at 30 seconds by default. it will always be advertised except when it is included in another network route that is already being advertised. cur Displays the current RIP configuration. January 2005 . 314 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. the switch uses only split horizon. If a VIP route exists in a routing table. the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. off Globally turns RIP OFF. the VIP route does not get eliminated from the routing table. This command is disabled by default. Note: If all real servers behind a VIP go down. and will not be advertised. When enabled.0. vip disable|enable Enables or disables the advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes. the switch supplies routes to other routers.2 Command Reference Table 6-65 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip1) Command Syntax and Usage updat <update period (1-120 seconds)> Sets the RIP update period in seconds. and the switch will continue to advertise the route. This command is disabled by default. the route gets removed from the routing table. When disabled. the switch learns routes from other routers. lsten disable|enable When enabled. deflt disable|enable When enabled. but gives them lower priority than configured gateways. on Globally turns RIP ON. When disabled.Alteon OS 22. When enabled. poisn disable|enable This command is disabled by default. statc disable|enable This command is disabled by default. When enabled. the switch supplies static routes. the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers.

refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide.Export default route information on . The backbone acts as the central OSPF area. This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number. known as the backbone.Set the LSDB limit for external LSA default . if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu. [Open Shortest Path First Menu] aindex . The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583.0. which then distributes it to other areas as needed. See page 318 to view menu options. range <range number (1-16)> Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses.Globally turn OSPF OFF cur . virt <virtual link (1-3)> Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link. one area must be designated as area 0.Alteon OS 22. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone.OSPF Summary Range Menu if .OSPF Route Redistribute Menu lsdb . See page 317 to view menu options. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315 . All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone. The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas.OSPF MD5 Key Menu host . See page 321 to view menu options. 315393-J.OSPF Area (index) Menu range .Display current OSPF configuration Table 6-66 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the area index menu.OSPF Interface Menu virt .OSPF Virtual Links Menu md5key .Globally turn OSPF ON off . In any AS with multiple areas.OSPF Host Entry Menu redist . For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf Open Shortest Path First Configuration Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS). See page 319 to view menu options.

See host <host entry number (1-128)> Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. Use none for no default. 316 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. off Disables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch. redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> Displays Route Distribution Menu See page 323 to view menu options. lsdb <LSDB limit (0-2000. See page 322 to view menu options. on Enables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings. 0 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit.0.2 Command Reference Table 6-66 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage md5key <key ID (1-255)> Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. January 2005 . Up to 128 host routes can be configured. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF.Alteon OS 22. default <metric (1-16777215)> <metric-type 1|2>|none Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area.

Alteon OS 22. All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions.Set time interval between two SPF calculations enable .101)> Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number.Enable area disable . Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices.17. routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed. Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes. type transit|stub|nssa Defines the type of area. 192. For example. For example. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 317 .Set area type metric . metric <metric value (1-65535)> Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value.Set authentication type spf .Display current OSPF area configuration Table 6-67 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage areaid <IP address (such as.Delete area cur .Set stub area metric auth .Set area ID type . Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route. NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities. when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone.4. auth none|password|md5 None: No authentication required. the area type must be defined as transit. MD5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex Area Index Configuration Menu [OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu] areaid .0. 315393-J. a stub area is connected to only one other area.Disable area delete . Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate. Typically. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the NSSA but are not distributed into other areas.

enable Enables the OSPF area.101)> Displays the base IP address for the range.Enable/disable hide range . disable Disables the OSPF area.Set area index . delete Deletes the OSPF area. mask <IP address (such as. /cfg/l3/ospf/range OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu [OSPF Summary addr mask aindex hide enable disable delete cur Range 1 Menu] .4.Set IP address .17.17.0.101> Displays the IP address mask for the range. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index used by the Alteon Application Switch.Disable range .Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .2 Command Reference Table 6-67 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage spf <interval (0-255)> Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm.Enable range . 192.Display current OSPF summary range configuration Table 6-68 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP Address (such as. 318 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.4. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration.Set IP mask . 192.Delete range .

disable Disables the OSPF summary range.Alteon OS 22.0. /cfg/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Configuration Menu [OSPF Interface aindex prio cost hello dead trans retra key mdkey enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Set area index Set interface router priority Set interface cost Set hello interval in seconds Set dead interval in seconds Set transit delay in seconds Set retransmit interval in seconds Set authentication key Set MD5 key ID Enable interface Disable interface Delete interface Display current OSPF interface configuration 315393-J. delete Deletes the OSPF summary range. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 319 . cur Displays the current OSPF summary range.2 Command Reference Table 6-68 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage hide disable|enable Hides the OSPF summary range. enable Enables the OSPF summary range.

0. 320 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet. trans <value (0-3600)> Displays the transit delay in seconds. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Assigns an MD5 key to the interface. (A priority value of 127 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. disable Disables OSPF interface. prio <priority value (0-255)> Displays the assigned priority value to the Alteon Application Switch’s OSPF interfaces. January 2005 . delete Deletes OSPF interface. Low cost indicates high bandwidth. retra <value (0-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds. Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. which is set for an interval of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down.) cost <cost value (1-65535)> Displays cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. key <key>|none Sets the authentication key to clear the password. enable Enables OSPF interface.Alteon OS 22. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the interval in seconds between the hello packets for the interfaces. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR).2 Command Reference Table 6-69 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface.

Set authentication key . Default is five seconds. Default is none.Set transit delay in seconds . dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet. Default is one seconds.Set MD5 key ID .0. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the authentication parameters of a hello packet. key <key>|none Displays the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link.0.Set area index . which is set to be in an interval of seconds.Disable interface . mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. trans <value (1-3600)> Displays the delay in transit in seconds. retra <value (1-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds.Set hello interval in seconds .0.0.Delete interface .Set dead interval in seconds .Set retransmit interval in seconds .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/virt OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu [OSPF Virtual aindex hello dead trans retra nbr key mdkey enable disable delete cur Link 1 Menu] . Default is 0.Set router ID of virtual neighbor . Default is 40 seconds.Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 6-70 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index.Enable interface . 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 321 .Alteon OS 22. Default is none. which is set to be in an interval of seconds. nbr <nbr router ID (IP address)> Displays the router ID of the virtual neighbor.

Set area index cost .Enable host entry disable . cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings. delete Deletes OSPF virtual link.Set cost of this host entry enable . aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index of the host. 192. enable Enables OSPF host entry.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .Display current OSPF host entry configuration Table 6-71 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as.2 Command Reference Table 6-70 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage enable Enables OSPF virtual link. cost <cost value [1-65535]> Displays the cost value of the host.101)> Displays the base IP address for the host entry.Disable host entry delete .17.Delete host entry cur . disable Disables OSPF host entry.4. disable Disables OSPF virtual link.Set host entry IP address aindex . /cfg/l3/ospf/host OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu [OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu] addr .0. 322 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

315393-J.Remove rmap from route redistribution list export . enter all. To remove all 32 route maps. Removes routing maps from the rmap list. To add specific route maps. enter routing map numbers one per line. rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) . NULL at the end. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol. cur Displays the current OSPF host entries. enter none.To add all the 32 route maps. NULL at end. /cfg/l3/ospf/redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu. To remove specific route maps.2 Command Reference Table 6-71 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage delete Deletes OSPF host entry. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. cur Displays the current route map settings. export <metric (1-16777215)><metric type (1|2)> |none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified. This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 323 . enter all.. |all Removes the route map from the route redistribution list. enter routing map numbers one per line.Alteon OS 22. [OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu] add ..0.Display current route-maps added Table 6-72 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist) Command Syntax and Usage add (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>)|all Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list.Add rmap into route redistribution list rem .Export all routes of this protocol cur .

it is called internal BGP (iBGP). it is called external BGP (eBGP).Alteon OS 22. You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or between different autonomous systems. When run between different autonomous systems. /cfg/l3/bgp Border Gateway Protocol Configuration Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. up to 16 chars> Sets the authentication key up to 16 characters for this OSPF packet.0. rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your upstream provider(s). cur Displays the current MD5 key configuration. When run within an autonomous system. BGP is defined in RFC 1771. 324 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet. BGP is turned off by default. fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. January 2005 .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu [OSPF MD5 Key key delete cur 1 Menu] Set authentication key Delete key Display current MD5 key configuration Table 6-73 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key) Command Syntax and Usage key <key. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network. The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static routes.

315393-J. a business enterprise. within an autonomous system.2 Command Reference [Border Gateway peer aggr as pref on off cur - Protocol Menu] Peer menu Aggregation menu Set Autonomous System (AS) number Set Local Preference Globally turn BGP ON Globally turn BGP OFF Display current BGP configuration NOTE – Fixed routes are subnet routes.0. To view menu options. on Globally turns BGP on. see page 326. An autonomous system shares routing information with other autonomous systems using the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. aggr <aggregate number (1-16)> Displays the Aggregation Menu. or use the local preference if you are using iBGP.Alteon OS 22. either a single network or a group of networks that is controlled by a common network administrator on behalf of an administrative entity (such as a university. use the route with the shortest AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP. as <autonomous system number (1-65535)> Sets Autonomous System Number for this autonomous system. Table 6-74 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer number (1-16)> Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer. The path with the higher value is preferred. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 325 . pref <preference (0-4294967294)> Sets the local preference. An autonomous system is assigned a globally unique number called an Autonomous System Number (ASN). see page 329. or a business division). There is one fixed route per IP interface. An autonomous system (AS) is the unit of router policy. Each border router. To view menu options. When multiple peers advertise the same route.

Set keep alive time advert .Set min time between advertisements retry .Set remote IP address ras . Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage redist Displays BGP Redistribution Menu.Remove rmap from in-rmap list remo . 192.Set time-to-live of IP datagrams addi .Alteon OS 22.Enable peer disable . 326 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.4.101)> Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router). which are border routers that exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks. January 2005 .Add rmap into in-rmap list addo . addr <IP address (such as.0. To view the menu options.Redistribution menu addr .0.0.Set hold time alive .Delete peer cur . using dotted decimal notation. The peer option is disabled by default. The default address is 0.Set min time between route originations ttl . see page 328.17. cur Displays the current BGP configuration.Set remote autonomous system number hold .0.Add rmap into out-rmap list remi . /cfg/l3/bgp/peer <peer number> BGP Peer Configuration Menu [BGP Peer 1 Menu] redist .Remove rmap from out-rmap list enable .Disable peer delete .Set connect retry interval orig .Display current peer configuration This menu is used to configure BGP peers.2 Command Reference Table 6-74 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage off Globally turns BGP off.

orig <min orig time (1-65535)> Sets the minimum time between route originations in seconds. It is also used to support multi-hops. 3-65535)> Sets the period of time. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that. ena Enables this peer configuration. It is set at 0 by default. remo <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from out-route map list. retry <connect retry interval (1-65535)> Sets connection retry interval in seconds. It is set at 90 seconds by default.Alteon OS 22. hold <hold time (0. that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. would cause the packet to be discarded. 1-21845)> Sets the keep-alive time for the specified peer in seconds. This value is used to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes. advert <min adv time (1-65535)> Sets time in seconds between advertisements. The TTL is determined by the number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 327 . which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. addo <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into out-route map list. dis Disables this peer configuration.0. This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. in seconds.2 Command Reference Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage ras <AS number (0-65535)> Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer. 315393-J. ttl <number of router hops (1-255)> Time-to-live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded. The default number is set at 1. when exhausted. addi <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into in-route map list. alive <keepalive time (0. remi <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from in-route map list.

Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers even though it does not have any default routes in its routing table. default none|import|originate|redistribute Sets default route action.0. /cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu [Redistribution metric default rip ospf fixed static vip cur Menu] Set default-metric of advertised routes Set default route action Enable/disable advertising RIP routes Enable/disable advertising OSPF routes Enable/disable advertising fixed routes Enable/disable advertising static routes Enable/disable advertising VIP routes Display current redistribution configuration Table 6-76 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-4294967294)>|none Sets default metric of advertised routes. you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. cur Displays the current BGP peer configuration. Defaults routes can be configured as import. 328 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. originate. you have to enable that protocol in this redistribute submenu. if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol.2 Command Reference Table 6-75 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this peer configuration. Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. redistribute.Alteon OS 22. or none. Similarly. None: No routes are configured Import: Import these routes. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration. January 2005 .

vip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising VIP routes.4.Enable aggregation disable .2 Command Reference Table 6-76 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage rip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising RIP routes ospf disable|enable Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes. cur Displays the current redistribution configuration. such as 192. [BGP Aggr 1 Menu] addr .Display current aggregation configuration This menu allows you to configure aggregate routing to condense the number of routes between internal and external peer routers. Table 6-77 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address.17. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 329 .Set aggregation network mask enable .Alteon OS 22.101> Adds the IP address to the selected aggregate. static disable|enable Enables or disables advertising static routes. /cfg/l3/bgp/aggr <aggregate number> BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu NOTE – The aggregate number (1-16) represents the aggregation route you wish to configure.Set aggregation IP address mask .Delete aggregation current . fixed disable|enable Enables or disables advertising fixed routes.0. 315393-J.Disable aggregation delete .

Turn Forwarding ON off . current Displays the current aggregate configuration. the port forwarding option is turned on.0.Turn Forwarding OFF cur .Alteon OS 22. off Disables IP forwarding for the current port.255.0> Sets the IP mask for the selected aggregate.255.2 Command Reference Table 6-77 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage mask <IP subnet mask. disable Disables the selected aggregate. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings. By default. /cfg/l3/port <port number> IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Port 1 Menu] on . Table 6-78 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/port) Command Syntax and Usage on Enables IP forwarding for the current port. enable Enables the selected aggregate. 330 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. such as 255.Display current port configuration The Layer 3 Port Menu allows you to turn IP forwarding on or off on a port-by-port basis. delete Deletes the selected aggregate. January 2005 .

Alteon OS 22. 192. For example: mycompany. Use dotted decimal notation.Set IP address of secondary DNS server dname . 192.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/dns Domain Name System Configuration Menu [Domain Name System Menu] prima .Set IP address of primary DNS server secon . dname <dotted DNS notation>|none Sets the default domain name used by the switch.com cur Displays the current Domain Name System settings. If the primary DNS server fails. 315393-J. Enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation. secon <IP address (such as.4.Set default domain name cur . and tftp commands. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping.17.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. the configured secondary will be used instead. traceroute.17. and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 331 .4.0.101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server.Display current DNS configuration The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network. Table 6-79 Domain Name System Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns) Command Syntax and Usage prima <IP address (such as.

cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF cur .0.Set IP address of second BOOTP server on .101)> Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the Alteon Application Switch. Table 6-80 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. addr2 <IP address (such as.Globally turn BOOTP relay ON off . on Globally turns on BOOTP relay.17.Display current BOOTP relay configuration The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server.17. BOOTP relay menu is turned off by default. 332 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. 192.Set IP address of BOOTP server addr2 .101)> Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server.4. 192.4. January 2005 . off Globally turns off BOOTP relay.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bootp Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu [Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu] addr .

To view menu options.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp VRRP Configuration Menu [Virtual Router vr vrgroup group if track hotstan on off holdoff cur Redundancy Protocol Menu] VRRP Virtual Router Menu VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup Menu VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu VRRP Interface Menu VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Enable/disable hot-standby processing Globally turn VRRP ON Globally turn VRRP OFF Globally VRRP hold off time Display current VRRP configuration Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. allowing for full active/active redundancy between its Layer 4 switches. see page 345. used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity. This menu is used for configuring up to 1024 virtual routers on this switch. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. see page 338. If the master fails.0. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 333 . see page 334. Table 6-81 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage vr <virtual router number (1-1024)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. For more information on VRRP. see the “High Availability” chapter in your Alteon OS 22. Group options must be configured when using two or more Alteon switches in a hotstandby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. To view menu options. VRRP is disabled. vrgroup <virtual router vrgroup number (1-16)> Displays VR Group Menu. based on a number of priority criteria.0. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. see page 341. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. To view menu options.2 Application Guide. Alteon OS has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well. By default. group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu.

Alteon OS 22. By default. off Globally disables VRRP on this switch.0.Set renter priority .Delete virtual router . this option is disabled. in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other. a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for configuring up to 256 virtual routers for this switch. This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router.2 Command Reference Table 6-81 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot standby processing. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number> Virtual Router Configuration Menu [VRRP Virtual track vrid addr if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router 1 Menu] .Disable virtual router .Set IP address . holdoff <0-255 seconds> Globally suspends VRRP operation for the specified interval. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. on Globally enables VRRP on this switch.Set advertisement interval .Enable or disable preemption . cur Displays the current VRRP parameters.Enable or disable sharing . 334 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set interface number .Priority Tracking Menu . To view menu options.Set virtual router ID . January 2005 .Enable virtual router . see page 346.

0.4. even if it must preempt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. The default value is 1.17. 315393-J. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. see page 336.101)> Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. The default value is 1. If there is a tie. If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above. The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255.2 Command Reference Virtual routers are disabled by default. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. The default value is 100. The default value is 1. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 335 . 192. addr <IP address (such as.Alteon OS 22. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). The vrid of virtual server routers where the virtual router IP address is the same as the virtual server can be between 1 and 1024. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. Table 6-82 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. This preemption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. The default address is 0. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs.0. vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)> Defines the virtual router ID. each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination. During the master router election process. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other.0. To view menu options. This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual router on this switch. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface.0.

even when in backup mode. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met. this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same).Alteon OS 22.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 346).2 Command Reference Table 6-82 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) Command Syntax and Usage preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. Note that even when preem is disabled. By default. When enabled.Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers .Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers . this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration [VRRP Virtual vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu] . January 2005 .Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports .Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN . cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.0. By default.Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports . if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. dis Disables this virtual router. this option is enabled. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing. del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration. this option is enabled. 336 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable/disable tracking other interfaces . ena Enables this virtual router. When enabled.Enable/disable tracking HSRP . an Alteon proprietary extension to VRRP.

This command is disabled by default. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers.0. reals. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 337 .Alteon OS 22. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each IP interface active on this switch.” Other tracking criteria (l4pts. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. This command is disabled by default. If the virtual router preemption option (see preem in Table 6-82 on page 335) is enabled. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master. and hsrp) apply to “virtual server routers.2 Command Reference Criteria are tracked dynamically. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this switch. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch. This command is disabled by default. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. This command is disabled by default. otherwise called “virtual interface routers. Some tracking criteria (vrs. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. ifs. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN.” which perform Layer 4 Server Load Balancing functions. 315393-J. A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. Table 6-83 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled. ports disable|enable When enabled. ifs disable|enable When enabled. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers.

January 2005 . cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.Priority Tracking Menu name . In networks where HSRP is used.Remove virtual router from group prio .Alteon OS 22. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. the group of VIRs and VSRs associated with that customer alone will fail over to the backup switch. optimizing routing efficiency. This command is disabled by default.Set virtual router group name add . If failover occurs on a customer link. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments.Display current VRRP virtual router group configuration 338 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.Delete virtual router group cur . Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. [VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup 1 Menu] track .Set priority for virtual router group ena .2 Command Reference Table 6-83 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrp disable|enable <priority (1-254)> Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover.Add virtual router to group rem . Up to 16 virtual router groups can be configured on the switch. you can group VIRs and VSRs to serve the high availability of a specific customer.Disable virtual router group del . This command is disabled by default.Enable virtual router group dis . The VIRs and VSRs configured for the other customers on the master switch are not affected. When Web hosting is shared between two or more customers on a single VRRP switch.0. /cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup Virtual Router Group Menu This feature allows the failover of individual groups of VIRs and VSRs.

The default value is 100. rem <virtual router number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual router from the group. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. dis Disables the virtual router group. cur Displays the current VRRP virtual router group configuration. del Deletes the virtual router group.0.Alteon OS 22. ena Enables the virtual router group. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 339 . To view menu options. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group.2 Command Reference Table 6-84 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays VRRP priority tracking menu for this virtual router group. During the master router election process. see page 340. 315393-J. add <virtual router number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual router to the group. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. If there is a tie. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup #/track). Each virtual router group can have up to 64 virtual routers. name Defines virtual router group name up to eight characters.

This command is disabled by default. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master.2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup <vrgroup number>/ track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. the priority will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this virtual router group. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master.0. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. January 2005 . ports disable|enable When enabled. Criteria are tracked dynamically. the priority will be increased for each IP interface active on this virtual router group. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 346). l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. 340 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. This command is disabled by default. increasing Layer 4 efficiency.Alteon OS 22. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met. the priority will be increased for each active port on the VLAN on this virtual router group. the priority will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this virtual router group. This command is disabled by default. [VRRP Vrgroup ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur 1 Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP vrgroup tracking configuration Table 6-85 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This command is disabled by default. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers.

Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router.Enable or disable preemption .Alteon OS 22. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router group for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 341 .Set virtual router ID .0.Priority Tracking Menu . This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default.Disable virtual router .Delete virtual router . 315393-J.Enable virtual router . A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. optimizing routing efficiency. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router group. /cfg/l3/vrrp/group Virtual Router Group Configuration [VRRP Virtual track vrid if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router Group Menu] . which forces all virtual routers on the Alteon Application Switch to either be master or backup as a group.2 Command Reference Table 6-85 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrp disable|enable Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover.Set interface number . a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.Enable or disable sharing . In networks where HSRP is used.Set renter priority .Set advertisement interval . Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance on the virtual router group that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments.

When enabled. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). The default switch IP interface number is 1. When enabled. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. The default value is 100.2 Command Reference NOTE – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two Alteon Application Switches in a hot-standby failover configuration. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP. even when in backup mode. Note that even when preem is disabled.0. 342 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). During the master router election process. if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). this option is enabled. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. see page 346. By default. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. The default is 1. January 2005 . share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. where only one switch is active at any time. If there is a tie. vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID for this group. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router. Table 6-86 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. this option is enabled. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. By default.

dis Disables the virtual router group. del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration.0. then the tracking option will be available only under group option. 315393-J. /cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration [Virtual Router vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Group Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers Enable/disable tracking other interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration NOTE – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled. cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored.2 Command Reference Table 6-86 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables the virtual router group.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 343 .

increasing Layer 4 efficiency. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server.2 Command Reference Table 6-87 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. In networks where HSRP is used. This command is disabled by default. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. ports disable|enable When enabled. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch.Alteon OS 22. hsrp disable|enable Enables Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for this virtual router group. 344 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. HSRP is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. January 2005 . This command is disabled by default. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master.0. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. ifs disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. optimizing routing efficiency. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN.

or password (password authentication). January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 345 .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number> VRRP Interface Configuration NOTE – The interface-number (1 to 256) represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured. passw <password> Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface.0. This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth above). [VRRP Interface auth passw del cur - 1 Menu] Set authentication types Set plain-text password Delete interface Display current VRRP interface configuration This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers. Table 6-88 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if) Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication). The IP interface itself is not deleted. cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.

Set priority increment for virtual router tracking ifs . the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu. The default value is 2. hsrp <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for switch ports with Layer 4 client-only processing that receive HSRP broadcasts.0.Set priority increment for L4 real server tracking hsrp .2 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/track VRRP Tracking Configuration [VRRP Tracking Menu] vrs . Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 336).Set priority increment for L4 switch port tracking reals . The default value is 2. l4pts <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for physical switch ports with active Layer 4 processing. The default value is 10.Alteon OS 22.Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process. The default value is 2.Set priority increment for IP interface tracking ports . January 2005 .Set priority increment for HSRP by VLAN tracking cur . ports <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN. Table 6-89 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch. 346 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. reals <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for healthy real servers behind the virtual server router. The default value is 2. The default value is 2.Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking l4pts . ifs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this switch.Set priority increment for HSRP tracking hsrv .

These priority tracking options only define increment values. The switch sends each new gateway request to the next healthy. All gateway requests to the same destination IP address are resolved to the same gateway. enabled gateway in line. at which point the next in line will take over as the default IP gateway. cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 347 . /cfg/l3/metrc <metric name> Default Gateway Metrics If multiple default gateways are configured and enabled. The default value is 10. Table 6-90 Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc) Option strict Description The gateway number determines its level of preference. which are described in the table “Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc)” on page 347. This provides basic gateway load balancing.0.Alteon OS 22. There are two metrics.2 Command Reference Table 6-89 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrv <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for vrrp instances that are on the same VLAN. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu (see page 336) are enabled. Gateway #1 acts as the preferred default IP gateway until it fails or is disabled. a metric can be set to determine which primary gateway is selected. roundrobin 315393-J.

The default is allow. the switch will let through all the out-of-order fragments in filtering. udpblast Displays UDP Blast Menu. port <port number> Displays Port Security Menu. 348 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. Any packets above the current threshold will be logged. cur Displays the current security configuration.2 Command Reference /cfg/security Security Configuration Menu [Security Menu] ipacl pgroup port udpblast seclog fragment pdepth cur IP Address ACL Menu Pattern Match Group Menu Port Security Menu UDP Blast Menu Set rate threshold for security logging Set out of order IP fragments handling in filtering Set packet depth for pattern matching Display current Security configuration Table 6-91 Security Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/security) Command Syntax and Usage ipacl Displays IP address Access Control Menu. seclog <rate threshold (in packets)> Defines the rate threshold for security logging by the number of packets per second. pdepth <# of packets. the switch will drop these packets. The window is in units of packets. When set to allow. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 350. To view menu options.Alteon OS 22. When set to deny. see page 351. see page 352.0. 1-255|none> Defines the search window for pattern matching beginning from the start of the packet stream. To view options. fragment <allow|deny> Sets the handling of out-of-order IP fragment packets during filtering. January 2005 . see page 349. pgroup <pattern group ID (1-128)> Displays Pattern Match Group Menu.

Alteon OS 22. rem <IP address/mask pair index> Removes range of source IP addresses to be denied. 315393-J.Add IP Address/Mask for access control rem . When traffic ingresses the switch.Remove IP Address/Mask for access control cur . cur Displays current IP addresses ranges in Access Control List. defined by the IP address/mask pair index. defined by the IP address/mask pair. then the client traffic is blocked.0. If a match is found.Display All IP address/mask for access control Table 6-92 IP Address ACL Menu Options (/cfg/sec/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <IP mask> Adds range of source IP addresses to be denied.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/ipacl IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu Alteon OS can be configured with IP access control lists (ACLs) composed of ranges of client IP addresses that are to be denied access to the switch. the client source IP address is checked against this pool of addresses. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 349 . [IP ACL Menu] add .

When a pattern group is applied to a deny filter. use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/cur command. [Pattern Match Group 1 Menu] name .2 Command Reference /cfg/security/pgroup <pattern group number> Pattern Matching Menu When a virus or other attack contains multiple patterns or strings. name the pattern group. cur Displays the current configuration of this pattern group. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group.0. rem <SLB string ID> Removes an SLB string from this pattern group. also on page 411. use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add command described on page 411. del Deletes the pattern group. Note: You can only add the binary or ASCII strings to a pattern matching group. group them into a pattern group. and then apply the group to a filter. By applying the patterns and groups to a deny filter.Display current configuration Table 6-93 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup) Command Syntax and Usage name <31 character name>|none Specifies a descriptive name for this pattern group. 350 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. it is useful to combine them into one group and give the group a name that is easy to remember. the switch will match any of the strings or patterns within that group before denying and dropping the packet.Remove SLB string from group del . January 2005 . To view existing strings and their ID numbers.Delete pattern group cur .Set pattern group name add . Configure the binary or ASCII pattern strings. the packet content can be detected and thus denied access to the network. To configure SLB strings.Alteon OS 22. The filtering commands in Alteon OS Advanced Denial of Service Pack allow the administrator to define groups of patterns. add <string ID> Adds a pre-configured SLB string to this pattern group by the string ID number. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group.Add SLB string to group rem .

Enabling this command will allow detection of the following DoS attacks: Smurf: ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP (x. Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros. ipacl disable|enable Enables or disables IP access control List denial on this port. LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal to destination IP.x. Fraggle. cur Displays the current security configuration on this port. udpblast disable|enable Enables or disables UDP blast protection on this port. LandAttack. Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT. 315393-J. Xmascan. [Port 1 Menu] dos ipacl udpblast cur - Enable/disable DOS attack detection Enable/disable IP ACL processing Enable/disable UDP Blast processing Display current port configuration Table 6-94 Port Security Menu Options (/cfg/security/port) Command Syntax and Usage dos disable|enable Enables or disables Denial of Service (DOS) protection on this port. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack. Fraggle: UDP packet sent to a broadcast destination IP (x. PortZero. Nullscan.2 Command Reference /cfg/security/port <port number> Port Security Configuration Menu Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf. Xmascan: TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN.x.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 351 . PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets whose source or destination port is zero.255).x. and ScanSynFin. ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet.0.255). URG and PSH bits are set.x.

2 Command Reference /cfg/security/udpblast UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu Malicious attacks over UDP protocol ports are becoming a common way to bring down real servers. the sum of ranges cannot exceed the maximum of 5000 ports. cur Displays all UDP blast protection ports.Display all UDP blast protection Ports Table 6-95 UDP Blast Protection Menu Options (/cfg/sec/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage add <UDP port number or range (first-last)> [packet rate] Adds UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. 352 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J. default <packet rate> Defines the default packet rate for UDP blast protection. January 2005 . UDP traffic is shut down on those ports. Alteon OS supports up to 5000 UDP port numbers. [UDP Blast Protection Menu] add .Default packet rate for UDP blast protection cur . If the first port number is 300. the last number that can be used is 5300. as well as the maximum packet rate per second. While you can configure multiple port ranges.Remove UDP port/range for UDP blast protection default . When the maximum number of packets/second is reached.Alteon OS 22.Add UDP port/range for UDP blast protection rem .0. thus ensuring that backend servers are not flooded with data and disabled. Alteon OS can be configured to restrict the amount of traffic allowed on any UDP port. UDP traffic will be dropped. You can specify a series of UDP port ranges and the allowed packet limit for that range. rem <UDP port number or range (first-last)> Removes UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. using any integer from 1 to 65535. If the number of packets on this port range exceeds the maximum packet rate per second. The maximum port range is 5000.

The screen display can be captured. January 2005 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 353 . To start the dump program. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP. VLAN parameters. and placed in a script file. at the Configuration# prompt. at the Configuration# prompt. 315393-J. When using Telnet to configure a new switch.” To start the setup program. enter: Configuration# dump The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. “First-Time Configuration.0. see Chapter 2. paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch. BOOTP. and IP interfaces. as described on page 354.2 Command Reference /cfg/setup Setup The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time.Alteon OS 22. edited. Spanning Tree. For a complete description of how to use setup. port speed/mode. IP. enter: Configuration# setup /cfg/dump Dump The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection.

enter: Configuration# gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. at the Configuration# prompt. the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. January 2005 . enter: Configuration# ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. /cfg/gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Restoring the Active Switch Configuration When the gtcfg command is used.0. The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration. and not locked by any application). NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system. NOTE – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad).2 Command Reference /cfg/ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Saving the Active Switch Configuration When the ptcfg command is used. To start the switch configuration upload. at the Configuration# prompt.Alteon OS 22. The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data. If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command. the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with proper permission. To start the switch configuration download. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP server. the apply action will be performed automatically. 354 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-J.

If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand.CHAPTER 7 The SLB Configuration Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. With this software feature. based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature. January 2005 355 . This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for configuring Server Load Balancing (SLB) on the Alteon Application Switch. the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server. In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. 315393-J. it can become overutilized.

see page 372.Alteon OS 22. 356 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for placing real servers into real server groups. see page 399. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the menu for Filtering and Application Redirection. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 401. January 2005 . To view menu options. To view menu options. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for defining virtual servers.0. To view menu options. To view menu options. port <port number> Displays the menu for setting physical switch port states for Layer 4 activity. see page 364.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb SLB Configuration [Layer 4 Menu] real group virt filt port gslb layer7 wap sync adv linklb advhc pip peerpip on off cur Real Server Menu Real Server Group Menu Virtual Server Menu Filtering Menu Layer 4 Port Menu Global SLB Menu Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu WAP Menu Config Synch Menu Layer 4 Advanced Menu Inbound Linklb Menu Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu Proxy IP Address Menu Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Globally turn Layer 4 processing ON Globally turn Layer 4 processing OFF Display current Layer 4 configuration Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the menu for configuring real servers. see page 358. see page 383. gslb Displays the menu for configuring Global Server Load Balancing.

see page 421. To view menu options. When this command is enabled. advhc Displays Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu. Enabling Layer 4 services is not necessary for using filters only to allow. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. When the pip is defined. To view menu options. wap Displays WAP Menu. see page 413. using Layer 2. see page 412.2 Command Reference Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu. without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch. This option can be performed only after the optional Layer 4 software is enabled (see “Activating Optional Software on page 441). All configuration information will remain in place (if applied or saved). This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch. 315393-J. linklb Displays Inbound Link Load Balancing Menu. To view menu options. but the software processes will no longer be active in the switch cur Displays the current Server Load Balancing configuration. pip This menu is used to set the switch proxy IP address using dotted decimal notation.To view options.Alteon OS 22. sync Displays the Synch Peer Switch Menu. peerpip Displays Peer Proxy IP address Menu. To view menu options. see page 430. see page 408. To view menu options. To view menu options. This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses. see page 419.0. see page 431. on Globally turns on Layer 4 software services for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 357 . see page 415. the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch. or NAT traffic. adv Displays the Layer 4 Advanced Menu. deny. off Globally disables Layer 4 services. To view menu options.

Disable real server del .Set Global SLB availability for real server maxcon .Enable/disable Global SLB remote site operation proxy . These filters are not affected by the Server Load Balancing on and off commands in this menu.Enable/disable fast health check operation submac . January 2005 . Application Redirection filters.Delete real server cur . or perform Network Address Translation (NAT) on traffic do not require Layer 4 software to be activated.0.Remove real port from server remote . require Layer 4 software services.Set IP addr of real server name .Set minutes inactive connection remains open backup .Set number of successful attempts to declare server UP addport .Enable/disable client proxy operation fasthc .Set real server name weight .Set backup real server inter .Set weight for real server avail .Enable/disable source MAC address substitution ena .2 Command Reference Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) Filters configured to allow. however.Layer 7 Command Menu ids . /cfg/slb/real <server number> Real Server SLB Configuration [Real server 1 Menu] layer7 . Layer 4 processing must be turned on before redirection filters will work.Add real port to server remport .Display current real server configuration 358 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.Set number of failed attempts to declare server DOWN restr .Enable real server dis .IDS Command Menu rip . deny.Set maximum number of connections tmout .Set interval between health checks retry .

The required parameters are: Real server IP address Real server enabled (disabled by default) Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays the Layer 7 Menu. To view menu options. By default. and the administrator will be warned if the server does not respond. Higher weighting values force the server to receive more connections than the other servers configured in the same real server group. This option sets a threshold as an artificial barrier. A setting of 10 would assign the server roughly 10 times the number of connections as a server with a weight of 1. 315393-J. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server by a natural language keyword value. If no backup servers/server group are configured.Alteon OS 22. If all servers in a real server group for a virtual server reach their maxcon limit at the same time.0. maxcon <maximum connections (0-200000)> Sets the maximum number of connections that this server should simultaneously support.2 Command Reference This menu is used for configuring information about real servers that participate in a server pool for Server Load Balancing or Application Redirection. each real server is given a weight setting of 1. the address entered is PINGed to determine if the server is up. client requests will be sent to the backup/overflow server or backup/overflow server group. By default. client requests will be dropped by the virtual server. Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses metrics (see “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 370). maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each real server. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 359 . weight <real server weight (1-48)> Sets the weighting value (1 to 48) that this real server will be given in the load balancing algorithms. When this command is used. To view menu options.000. see page 363. name <string. the number of maximum connections is set at 20. avail <server weight (1-48)> Displays the currently available real server for Global server load balancing and allows the user to change to another real server for Global server load balancing. rip <real server IP address> Sets the IP address of the real server in dotted decimal format. ids Displays Intrusion Detection Server/system menu. New connections will be issued again to this server once the number of current connections has decreased below the maxcon setting. see page 362. such that new connections will not be issued to this server if the maxcon limit is reached.

the switch pings servers to determine their status. and the session table entry is then removed. the switch will activate the backup real server until the original becomes operative again. The backup server is also used in overflow situations. An interval of “0” disables health checking for the server. using the defined service ports configured as part of each virtual service. When persistent is activated. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts.0. if the real server becomes inoperative.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage tmout <even number of minutes (2-32768)> Sets the number of minutes an inactive session remains open (in even numbered increments). use this option to assign a backup real server number. This option is also used with the Persistent option (see /cfg/slb/virt/pbind). When a client makes a request. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. you can set the number of minutes to wait before removing orphan table entries. For UDP services. TCP/UDP connections will remain registered in the switch's binding table. the switch verifies that real servers and their corresponding services are operational by opening a TCP connection to each service. retry <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this real server inoperative. Determining the health of each real server is a necessary function for Layer 4 switching. The inter option lets you choose the time between health checks. Then. The default is 8 attempts 360 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. In certain circumstances. In order to prevent table overflow. Every client-to-server session being load balanced is recorded in the switch's Session Table. The range is from 1 to 60 seconds. January 2005 . the backup comes online to provide additional processing power until the original server becomes desaturated. Using the tmout option. To prevent loss of service if a particular real server fails. The same backup/overflow server may be assigned to more than one real server at the same time inter <number of seconds between health checks (0-60)> Sets the interval between real server health verification attempts.Alteon OS 22. If the real server reaches its maxcon (maximum connections) limit. The default is 4 attempts restr <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of successful health check attempts required before declaring a UDP service operational. these orphaned entries must be aged out of the binding table. The default interval is 2 seconds. such as when a client application is abnormally terminated by the client's system. Settings must be specified in even numbered increments between 2 and 32768 minutes. the session is recorded in the table. The data is transferred until the client ends the session. this option sets how long an idle client is allowed to remain associated with a particular server. The default setting is 10. For TCP services. backup <real server number (1-1023)>|none Sets the real server used as the backup/overflow server for this real server.

dis Disables this real server from Layer 4 service. See /oper/slb/dis on page 436 for an operations-level command that permits graceful server shutdown. ena You must perform this command to enable this real server for Layer 4 service. del Deletes this real server from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. Use this command with caution. This option should be enabled when the real IP address supplied above represents a remote server (real or virtual) that this switch will access as part of its Global Server Load Balancing network. When enabled. remote disable|enable Enables or disables remote site operation for this server. the real server goes down operationally as soon as the physical port connected to the real server goes down. When enabled. a client request from any application can be proxied using a load-balancing Proxy IP address (PIP). This option. This option. the real server can process virtual server requests associated with its real server group. fasthc disable|enable Enables or disables Fast Health Check operation. With this option enabled (default).Alteon OS 22. See /oper/slb/ena on page 436 for an operations-level command. This command is enabled by default. as it will delete any configuration options that have been set for this real server. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP address translation. 315393-J. when the apply and save commands are used. remport <real server port (2–65534)> Remove multiple service ports from the server.0. disables this real server until it is explicitly re-enabled. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 361 . By default. the real server will go down only after the configured health check interval. this option is disabled. NOTE – This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. submac disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address substitution. A disabled server will no longer process virtual server requests as part of the real server group to which it is assigned. enables this real server for operation until explicitly disabled. This removes the real server from operation within its real server groups. When disabled. when the apply and save commands are used.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage addport <real server port (2–65534)> Add multiple service ports to the server. By default. this option is disabled. This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown.

/cfg/slb/real <server number>/layer7 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration [Real Server 1 Layer 7 Commands Menu] addlb . remlb <URL path ID [1-1024]> Removes the predefined URL loadbalance string ID from the real server.Enable/disable LDAP Write server cur . Table 7-3 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage addlb <URL path ID [1-1024]> Adds the predefined URL loadbalance string ID to the real server. This server gets the client request.Display current real server configuration This menu is used for entering commands and strings for Layer 7 processing. You need to use the write servers when you want to modify the directory on the server. ldapwr disable|enable Enables or disables LDAP write server. 362 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. You need to use read servers when you only want to browse the directory. and embeds the IP address of the real server that will handle the subsequent requests from the client.Enable/disable exclusionary string matching ldapwr . By default. this option is disabled.Remove SLB string for content load balance cookser . By default. assigns the cookie.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current configuration information for this real server. January 2005 .0.Enable/disable cookie assignment server exclude . exclude disable|enable Enables or disables exclusionary string matching.Add SLB string for content load balance remlb . LDAP servers are of two types: read servers and write servers. this option is disabled. The write server can conduct both read and write operations. cookser disable|enable Enables or disables the real server to handle client requests that don’t contain a cookie. This option is used if you want to designate a specific server to assign cookies only.

oid <SNMP health check object identifier to override group OID> Specifies the object identifier (OID).Display current real server configuration Table 7-4 IDS Configuration Menu options (/cfg/slb/real/ids) Command Syntax and Usage idsvlan <vlan number (1-4090> Defines VLAN ID for Intrusion Detection Server. 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 7-3 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current real server configuration. An Intrusion Detection System gathers and analyzes information from various areas within a computer or a network to identify possible security breaches. Note: IDS can only be configured on real servers between one to maximum number of ports on the switch.0. Refer to your Application Guide for more information. cur Displays the current real server configuration. idsport <port number> Defines port for Intrusion Detection Server.Set Port for ID Server oid . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 363 . /cfg/slb/real <real server number>/ids Real server IDS Configuration Menu Intrusion Detection System (IDS) is a type of security management system for computers and networks.Override community string for SNMP HC cur . comm <SNMP health check community string to override group community string> Overrides community string for SNMP health checks.Override OID for SNMP HC comm . This OID overrides the OID for SNMP health checks. [Real Server 1 IDS Menu] idsvlan . which include both intrusions (attacks from outside the organization) and misuse (attacks from within the organization).Set Vlan ID for ID Server idsport .Alteon OS 22.

Each group must consist of at least one real server.Set an advance group health check formula mhash . rmetric Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which port in the real server will be the target of the next client request.Enable real server in this group dis .Display current group configuration This menu is used for combining real servers into real server groups.Remove real server del .Set metric used to select next rport in server content .Set Intrusion Detection Port advhlth .Enable/disable the access to this group for operator ena .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group SLB Configuration [Real server group 1 Menu] metric . See “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 370 for more information. The default setting is leastconns.Add real server rem . Real server groups are used both for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection.Alteon OS 22. Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage metric leastconns|roundrobin|minmisses|hash|response|bandwidth|phash Sets the load balancing metric used for determining which real server in the group will be the target of the next client request. Each real server group should consist of all the real servers which provide a specific service for load balancing.Set health check type backup .Delete real server group cur .Enable/disable VIP health checking in DSR mode ids .Set real server group name realthr .Set minmisses hash parameter viphlth . Each real server can belong to more than one group.0. 364 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable/disable Intrusion Detection Group Flood oper .Set real server failure threshold idsrprt .Set health check content health .Enable/disable Intrusion Detection idsfld . January 2005 .Set backup real server or group name .Disable real server in this group add .Set metric used to select next server in group rmetric .

use HEAD method Sets the type of health checking performed. The same backup/overflow server/server group may be assigned to more than one real server group at the same time. use this option to assign a backup real server/real server group number.0.Alteon OS 22. The content depends on the type of health check specified in the health option (see below). which also means the option is disabled idsrprt <real server port (2-65534)>|any Sets real server port for the Intrusion Detection Server. health link|arp|icmp|tcp|http|httphead|dns|pop3|smtp|nntp|ftp|imap| sslh|radius-auth|radius-acc|script<n>|udpdns|wsp|wtp|wtls|ldap| snmp<n>|tftp|rtsp|sip http . The backup server/server group is also used in overflow situations. The default is tcp.use GET method. Then. a SYSLOG ALERT message is sent to the configured SYSLOG servers stating that the real server threshold has been reached for the concerned server load balancing group. backup r<real server number (1-256)>|g<group number>|none Sets the real server or real server group used as the backup/overflow server/server group for this real server group. If all the servers in the real server group reach their maxcon (maximum connections) limit. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server group by a natural language keyword value. the backup server/server group comes online to provide additional processing power until one of the original servers becomes desaturated. name <maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each Real Server Group. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 365 . the number reaches this minimum limit. 315393-J. the switch will activate the backup real server /server group until one of the original real servers becomes operative again. realthr <real servers (1-15. if the real server group becomes inoperative. If any time. The default threshold is 0.2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage content <filename>|//<host>/<filename>|none This option defines the specific content which is examined during health checks. To prevent loss of service if the entire real server group fails. 0 for disabled)> Specifies a minimum number of real servers available. httphead . See “SLB Health Check Types” on page 367.

AND or OR that are used to manipulate TRUE or FLALSE values. 1-1023> Enables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis. By default the minmiss algorithm uses the upper 24-bits of the source IP address to calculate the real server that the traffic should be sent to when the minmiss metric is selected. Using parenthesis with the boolean operators. viphlth disable|enable Enables or disables VIP health checking in a service. This feature is enabled by default. oper disable|enable Enables or disables the real server group operation. This command also supports a string expression which is up to 128 characters long.Alteon OS 22. you can configure this real server to accept requests from all the groups or any number of groups that this real server is member of. This command allows you to create a boolean expression to health check the real server group based on the state of the virtual services.You can also select all 32-bits of the source IP address to hash to the real server.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage advhlth <(1&2|3. 128>|none Defines an advanced health check formula expression for the real servers.. 1-1023> Disables a real server in this group gracefully or on a per group basis. You will be prompted to enter the number of the real server to add to this group. you can create a boolean expression to state the health of the server group. When viphlth is disabled. You will be prompted for the ID number for the real server to remove from this group. ids disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection Server (IDS) load balancing for the designated real server group. For example. the switch uses RIP to perform all health checks. mhash 24|32 <number of sip bits used for minmisses hash> Defines the minmisses hash parameter for this real server as either 24 or 32 bits. 366 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. However. dis <real server number. add <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to this real server group. This feature can only be configured on real server groups between 1-63. it works only when the service has DSR (Direct Server Return) feature enabled. This command supports two boolean operators.). ena <real server number. or you can also set the formula expression as none. idsfld disable|enable Enables or disables the Intrusion Detection flood. January 2005 . whether DSR is enabled or disabled. if a real server is a member of more than one group. rem <real server number (1-1023)> Remove a real server from this real server group.

Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description link Checks status of port for each server for IDSLB group only. This removes the group from operation under all virtual servers it is assigned to. pings the server. arp Sends an ARP request for Layer 2 health checking. Note: If the content is not specified. cur Displays the current configuration parameters for this real server group. icmp For Layer 3 health checking. The health check options are described in the following table. You can use this command to test the validity and access to the hypertext links or to look for any recent modification to the URL.2 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this real server group from the Layer 4 software configuration. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 367 .0. dns For Domain Name Service. you can specify the type of health check for the group of real servers.1 GETS when a HOST: header is required to check that the URL content is specified in content command. the virtual server will become inoperative. http For HTTP service. Otherwise. tcp Opens and closes a TCP/IP connection to the server for TCP service. Use this command with caution: if you remove the only group that is assigned to a virtual server. check that the domain name specified in content can be resolved by the server. the health check will revert back to TCP on the port that is being load balanced. an HTTP/1. SLB Health Check Types Using the health command.0 GET occurs.Alteon OS 22. httphead Allows the switch to declare if the server is up or not just by locating the URL header and not wait until all the URL contents are received. use HTTP 1. Refer to your Application Guide for their detailed description.

script <n> Enables the use of script-based health checks in send/expect format to check for application and content availability. imap For user mail service. the user and server exchange security certificates.Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description pop3 For user mail service. radius-acc For RADIUS remote access server authentication. The content under /cfg/ slb/adv/waphc (see page 421) must also be configured. radius-auth. 368 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. check that the user specified in content is accessible on the server. and establish a session ID for each session. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the Alteon Application Switch and the server. ftp For FTP services. January 2005 . negotiate an encryption and compression method. udpdns Allows the user to perform health checking using UDP DNS queries. check that the filename specified in content is accessible on the server through anonymous login. nntp For newsgroup services. check that the newsgroup name specified in content is accessible on the server. The secrt value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. <n> denotes the health script number (1-8). wsp Enables connectionless WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server. check that the user:password account specified in content exists on the server. smtp For mail-server services. the network administrator must also configure the /cfg/slb/ secrt parameter. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the serve sslh Enables the switch to query the health of the SSL servers by sending an SSL client “Hello” packet and then verify the contents of the server’s “Hello” response. During the handshake.

and an unbind request. If the server is up. snmp <n> Enables the use of SNMP-based health checks. The health check is successful if the server responds to the RRQ. You must enable UDP to perform SIP load balancing. 315393-J. If there is no content configured the switch will issue an RTSP OPTIONS method. You can perform the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) health check by using SIP PING request. it will send the bind result message and the switch will mark the server as alive. The health check fails if the switch receives an error packet from the real server.2. The LDAP health checks enable the switch to determine if the LDAP server is alive. If content is supplied the switch will issue the RTSP DESCRIBE method. The RTSP health check can operate with or without content. The switch sends an anonymous bind request to the server. This protocol enables the user to request a file from the server. sip Sets the health check type to sip. The content under /cfg/slb/adv/waphc (see page 421) must also be configured wtls Provides Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS) Hello-based health check for encrypted and connection-oriented WTLS traffic on port 9203. tftp Sets the health check type to TFTP. At regular intervals. rtsp Sets the health check type to RTSP. If this is not the response. This health check consists of three LDAP messages over one TCP connection: a bind request.2 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description wtp Enables connection-oriented WTP + WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. The switch must send an unbind request so that the server does not hold resources indefinitely. The switch administrator can choose LDAP version 2 or 3 as both the versions are compatible with Alteon OS 22. the switch transmits TFTP read requests (RRQ) to all servers in the group. <n> denotes the health script number (1-5). a bind result. ldap Sets the health check type to LDAP.0. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 369 .0. If the response to either method is RTSP/200 then the health check passes. the health check will fail.Alteon OS 22.

When minmisses is specified for a real server group performing Application Redirection. new connections are issued to each server in turn: the first real server in this group gets the first connection. January 2005 . This is useful for applications where client information must be retained on the server between sessions. the hash metric uses IP address information in the client request to select a server. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. roundrobin Round robin. you can set a number of metrics for selecting which real server in a group gets the next client request. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained between sessions. This metric is optimized for Application Redirection. The hash metric should be used if the statistical load balancing achieved using minmisses is not as optimal as desired. followed by the third real server.Alteon OS 22. and shut down connections faster than slower servers. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. process. the second real server gets the next connection. leastconns Least connections. due to their ability to accept. and so on. the number of connections currently open on each real server is measured in real time. helping to maximize successful cache hits. the issuing process starts over with the first real server. consider using the hash metric. 370 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. For Application Redirection. it is not as effective as minmisses when servers leave and reenter service.0. This option is the most self-regulating. Minmisses can also be used for Server Load Balancing. With this option. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. hash Like minmisses. For Server Load Balancing.2 Command Reference Server Load Balancing Metrics Using the metric command. If the Load Balancing statistics indicate that one server is processing significantly more requests over time than other servers. with the fastest servers typically getting the most connections over time. With this option. Best statistical load balancing is achieved when the IP address destinations of load balanced frames are spread across a broad range of IP subnets. Server load with this metric becomes most evenly balanced as the number of active clients increases. When all the real servers in this group have received at least one connection. This is particularly useful in caching applications. Although the hash metric can provide more even load balancing at any given instance. When specified for a real server group performing Server Load Balancing. This is particularly useful for maximizing successful cache hits. These metrics are described in the following table: Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description minmisses Minimum misses. The server with the fewest current connections is considered to be the best choice for the next client connection request.

With the phash metric. NOTE – Under the leastconns. it will rehash for that request based on the actual number of servers that are up. Weights are not applied when using the minmisses metrics. the real server weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to the number of octets that the real server processes during a given interval. The weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to a moving average of response time. If the first hash hits a dead server. the switch supports an even load distribution (hash) and stable server assignment (minmiss) even when a server in the group goes down. the first hash will always be the same even if a real server is down. With phash enabled. This can improve load balancing among servers of different performance levels. when real servers are configured with weights (see the weight option on page 359).Alteon OS 22. The response time is used to adjust the real server weights. bandwidth Bandwidth Metric. and phash metrics. With this option. a higher proportion of connections are given to servers with higher weights. This results in a request always being sent to a server that is up. hash. the switch monitors and records the amount of time that each real server takes to reply to a health check. The higher the bandwidth used. With this option. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 371 .2 Command Reference Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description response Real server response time. the smaller is the weight assigned to that server. phash The phash metric utilizes the best features of the hash and minmiss metrics. 315393-J.0. roundrobin.

Configuring a virtual server requires the following parameters: Creating a virtual server IP address Adding TCP/UDP port and real server group Enabling the virtual server (disabled by default) Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage service <virtual port or name> Displays the Virtual Services Menu. see the sport command on page 385.0. Client requests directed to the virtual server’s IP address will be balanced among the real servers available to it through real server group assignments. vip <virtual server IP address> Sets the IP address of the virtual server using dotted-decimal notation. To view services menu options. The virtual port name can be a well-known port name. The allowable port range is from 13 to 65534. January 2005 . The virtual server created within the switch will respond to ARPs and PINGs from network ports as if it was a normal server.Alteon OS 22. the service number. see page 375. To get more information about well-known ports.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Configuration [Virtual Server service vip dname cont weight avail addrule remrule layr3 ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Virtual Service Menu Set IP addr of virtual server Set domain name of virtual server Set BW Contract Set Global SLB weight for virtual server Set Global SLB availability for virtual server Add Global SLB rule to domain Remove Global SLB rule from domain Enable/disable layer 3 only balancing Enable virtual server Disable virtual server Delete virtual server Display current virtual configuration This menu is used for configuring the virtual servers which will be the target for client requests for Server Load Balancing. 372 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. ftp. and so on. such as http.

If the real server to which the client is assigned becomes unavailable.org. addrule <rule. Each rule has metric preference list. . avail Sets the Global SLB availability for the virtual server.0. Each domain has one or more rules. weight Sets the Global server weight for the virtual server. www2. It associates all the connections from the same client with the same real server while any connection exists between them. When the layr3 option is enabled (disabled by default). Rule allows the server selected for GSLB to use different metric preference based on time of the day. the client IP address is used with the client Layer 4 port number to produce a session identifier. The server selected for GSLB selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the preference list of the rule. all services under this virtual server are assigned this BW contract. 1-64> Adds Global SLB rule to domain.gov.edu. The default is rule 1. All the frames that match this virtual server services are assigned this BW contract if the previously assigned contract for the frame has lower or equal precedence of the virtual server contract. layr3 disable|enable Normally. specify the name as none. However.com. see hname below. An example would be foocorp.com. The higher the weight value. The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS. and the Internet group code (. The default is 1. This option is necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is divided across different simultaneous connections. To clear the dname. By default.2 Command Reference Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage dname <34 character domain name>|none Sets the domain name for this virtual server. The maximum number of characters that can be used in a domain name is 34. The domain name typically includes the name of the company or organization. the Layer 4 software will allow the client to connect to a different server.Alteon OS 22. To define the hostname. remrule <rule. The response time of this site is divided by this weight before the best site is assigned to a client. ftp. the BW contract can be changed for a selected virtual server with /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <number>/cont. . and so forth). . and so forth). 315393-J. 1-64> Removes Global SLB rule from domain. and also in applications where TCP fragments are generated. the more connections that will be directed to the local site. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 373 . the switch uses only the client IP address as the session identifier. cont <BWM contract (1-256)> Enter a new Bandwidth Management Contract for this virtual service. It does not include the hostname portion (www. Remote site response times are divided by the real server weight before selection occurs.

January 2005 . dis This option disables the virtual server so that it no longer services client requests. This option activates the virtual server within the switch so that it can service client requests sent to its defined IP address. cur Displays the current configuration of the specified virtual server.Alteon OS 22. 374 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual server.2 Command Reference Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables this virtual server.0. del This command removes this virtual server from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. Use this command with caution.

2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service <virtual port or name> Virtual Server Service Configuration This menu is used for configuring services assigned to a virtual server.Set hash parameter dbind .0.Enable/disable delayed binding udp .Enable/disable DNS query load balancing http .Alteon OS 22.Enable/disable direct access mode sip . See page 380 to view the menu options for configuring virtual services on port 554 for RTSP.Display current virtual service configuration 315393-J.Enable/disable SIP load balancing xforward .Delete virtual service cur .Set hostname httpslb .Enable/disable only substituting MAC addresses dnsslb . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 375 .Enable/disable pip selection based on egress port/vlan del .Set multi response count thash .Set BW cont of an SLB string specific to this service pbind .Set real port hname .Enable/disable remapping UDP server fragments nonat .Set persistent binding type rcount .Enable/disable UDP balancing frag . NOTE – Select virtual service port 554 to configure RTSP traffic. The following example shows a menu for http (port 80) services.Enable/disable X-Forwarded-For for proxy mode epip .Enable/disable HTTP redirects for Global SLB direct .Set HTTP SLB processing cont .Set real server group number rport . [Virtual Server 1 http Service Menu] group .Set BW contract for this virtual service urlcont .

use the command: # hname none httpslb urlslb|host|cookie|browser|urlhash|headerhash|others Load balances on the following applications: urlslb: Enable or disable URL SLB host: Enable or disable for virtual hosting cookie: Enable or disable cookie-based SLB for cookie-based preferential load balancing. starting point of the cookie value.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets a real server group for this service. “www. The default is set at 1. number of bytes to be extracted. To clear the hostname for a service. You will be prompted for the following: Cookie name.Alteon OS 22. you could specify www as the hostname.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service. this is the same as the virtual port (service virtual port). The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example. rport <real server port (0-65534)> Defines the real server TCP or UDP port assigned to this service. to add a hostname for Web services. If a dname of “foocorp.com” was defined (above). If rport is configured to be different than the virtual port defined in /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <virtual port>. 0 for VIP default> Sets a Bandwidth Management contract for this virtual service. January 2005 . others: Requires inputs for a particular header field You may choose to combine or select applications to load balance using the commands and and/or or. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS. For example: httpslb <application> httpslb <application> and|or <application> cont <BWM Contract (0-256). Note: If you enter 0 for the service contract.0. You will be prompted to enter the number (1 to 256) of the real server group to add to this service.foocorp. hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. 376 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. the switch will map the virtual port to this real port. enable/disable checking for cookie in URI browser: Enable or disable SLB. it will carry the value entered for the Virtual Server IP (vip) contract. By default. based on browser type urlhash: Enable or disable URL hashing based on URI headerhash: Hashes on any HTTP header value.

Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple virtual services and each service requires a separate bandwidth. The default number is 1. The connection timeout value (set in the Real Server Menu) is used to control how long these inactive but persistent connections remain associated with their real servers. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 377 . The cookie option uses a cookie defined in the HTTP header or placed in the URI for hashing. and security.Alteon OS 22. since the services are related. all subsequent SSL sessions which present the same session ID will be directed to the same real server. This may be necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is retained on the server over a series of sequential connections. By enabling the sslid option. different services from the same client may not map to the same server.0. Web site search results. 315393-J. In Alteon OS 22. An alternative approach may be to use the real server group metrics minmisses or hash (see Server Load Balancing Metrics). such as with SSL (Secure Socket Layer.0. or multi-page Web forms. The clientip option uses the client IP address as an identifier. see “Cookie-Based Persistence” on page 381. with clientip command enabled. The Alteon Application Switch will examine each server response until the cookie is found. The disable option allows you to disable presistent binding. and associates all connections from the same client with the same real server until the client becomes inactive and the connection is aged out of the binding table. For detailed information on Cookie-Based Persistence. HTTPS).2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract of a string specific to this virtual service. For more information on cookie option. or until the maximum count is reached. if it has previously been enabled for a particular application. The sslid option is for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). SSL provides authentication. HTTP and HTTPs traffic from the same client will map to the same server irrespective of the load balancing metric used. Whereas. The session ID is a value comprising 32 random bytes chosen by the SSL server that gets stored in a session hash table.2. rcount <response count number (1–16)> Sets the maximum response counter for cookie-based persistence. see the Persistence chapter in the Alteon OS 20.2 Application Guide. which is a set of protocols built on top of TCP/IP that allow an application server and user to communicate over an encrypted HTTP session. they will be connected to the most appropriate real server based on the load balancing metric. When the client resumes activity after their connection has been aged out. non-repudiation. pbind clientip|cookie<p|r|i>|sslid|disable Enables or disables persistent bindings for a real server (disabled by default). The default is set at 1024.

see the cache command in Table 7-14 on page 390. and minmisses SLB metrics. or both source IP address and source port. For example. DNS uses UDP and TCP.Alteon OS 22. For example. Disabling HTTP Redirection causes GSLB to use proxy IP address for HTTP. so that frames returning from server to the client do not have to pass through the switch. phash. you must activate UDP balancing for the particular virtual servers that clients will communicate with using UDP. dnsslb disable|enable Enables or disables DNS-based Layer 7 content load balancing. You can configure this option if the service(s) to be load balanced include UDP and TCP. the switch will use default hash parameter. you have to bind to a new server every time. direct disable|enable Enables or disables Direct Access Mode (DAM) on the selected virtual service. January 2005 . Since no session is created. Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash. This option is enabled by default. For more information. disable caching on that filter for optimal performance. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP Redirection for Global server load balancing on a per VIP basis. udp disable|enable|stateless Enables or disables UDP load balancing for a virtual port (disabled by default). Enabling this command protects the server from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. In those environments. nonat disable|enable Enables or disables substituting only the MAC address of the real server (disabled by default). This command takes precedence over the command to globally enable or disable Direct Access Mode on the switch. the source IP address. This option does not substitute IP addresses. This option is used for Direct Server Return (DSR) in an one-armed load balancing setup. When stateless is enabled. which is sip. Note: If applying a filter to the same virtual server IP address on which UDP load balancing is enabled.0. 378 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. If the user does not select any. This option is disabled by default.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. frag disable|enable Enables or disables remapping server fragments for virtual port. no session table entry is created. dbind disable|enable Enables or disables Layer 4 Delayed Binding for TCP service and ports.

Nortel Networks’ MCS is a SIP enabled application Server. The SIP processing occurs at application level in order to parse out messages coming from client side as well as the server side. epip disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP selection based on egress port or VLAN. This feature is applicable only on HTTP protocol. modifying and terminating sessions with one or more participants (documented in RFC3261). you can scan and hash calls based on a SIP Call-ID header to an MCS server.0. When SIP is enabled. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 379 . When enabled. By default. Use this command with caution. you can configure the SP to select proxy IP address based on the egress port or VLAN. Using SIP on your switch. you can load balance Nortel’s MCS (Multimedia Communication Server) proxy servers. xforward disable|enable Enables or disables inserting the X-Forward-For header into the client HTTP request to preserve the client IP information. SIP is a UDP-based application-level control protocol for creating. the SP selects the proxy IP address based on ingress port or VLAN. You need to turn Direct Access Mode (DAM) on to perform SIP load balancing. del This command removes this virtual service from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration.Alteon OS 22. Using the epip command. You can use only minmiss as the load balancing metric since the load balancing is performed based on the Call-ID. 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage sip disable|enable Enables or disables Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server load balancing on the Alteon OS. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual service. cur Displays the current configuration of services on the specified virtual server. X-Forward-For is a special header that stores and identifies the client IP information. you can configure SIP service on the service port 5060 for a virtual server.

If a dname of “foocorp. phash. thash sip|sip+sport Defines hash parameter. dis: If set at disable. use the command: # hname none rtspslb hash|patternMatch|dis This Layer 7 load balancing option sets the type of rtspslb. RTSP will parse the URL and will hash the URL to select a server to load balance.Alteon OS 22. or both source IP address and source port. If the user does not select any. Tunable hash feature allows the user to select different parameters for computing the hash value used by the hash. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example. January 2005 . either hash or patternMatch. the source IP address. patternMatch: If you select this option. [Virtual Server group hname rtspslb thash del cur 1 rtsp Service Menu] Set real server group number Set hostname Set RTSP URL load balancing type Set hash parameter Delete virtual service Display current virtual service configuration Table 7-10 Virtual Server Service Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt 1/service 554) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets real server group number. RTSP will use Layer 4 metrics to select a server to load balance. the switch will match the string or pattern within the URL to select a server based on the string configured on the real server. To clear the hostname for a service.foocorp.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service. to add a hostname for Web services. hash: If you use hash.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service 554 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration This menu displays virtual services configured on service port 554 for RTSP traffic. “www. and minmisses SLB metrics. For example. which is sip. 380 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. you could specify www as the hostname.com” was defined (above). the switch will use default hash parameter.0. The default is hash. the destination IP address. thereby enabling the service. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services.

Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference Table 7-10 Virtual Server Service Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt 1/service 554) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes this virtual service. and has the following command syntax and usage: pbind cookie <mode> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Each parameter is explained in the following table. Cookie-Based Persistence The cookie option is used to establish cookie-based persistence. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 381 . 315393-J. cur Displays the current virtual service configuration.0.

2 Command Reference Table 7-11 Command Syntax and Usage for pbind cookie Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service/pbind cookie) Option <mode> Description Specify the mode for cookie-based persistence. enter e to enable this option.Alteon OS 22. The following three modes are available: p: Passive mode. If you want to look for cookie name or value in the URI. In active cookie mode (or cookie rewrite mode).. Insert cookie mode expiration parameters are as follows: Enter insert-cookie expiration as either: . In this mode. generates the cookie value on behalf of the server.g. Enter the starting point of the cookie value (1-64) Enter number of bytes to extract (1-64). a date <MM/dd/yy[@hh:mm]> (e. and not the network administrator. For more information on Cookie-Based Persistence. Look for cookie in the URI. To look for cookie in the HTTP header. the server responds with the data... and the switch inserts an Alteon persistence cookie into the data packet. enter d to disable this option..g. the extracting length must be 8 or 16. a duration <days[:hours[:minutes]]> (e. 12/31/01@23:59) . 45:30:90) . The switch uses this cookie to bind to the appropriate server. January 2005 . the network administrator configures the Web server to embed a cookie in the server response that the switch looks for in subsequent requests from the same client. When a client sends a request without a cookie. or none <return> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Enter the name of the cookie. For cookie rewrite.. see the Alteon OS 22. r: Rewrite mode.0. The switch intercepts this persistence cookie and rewrites the value to include server-specific information before sending it to the client..2 Application Guide. 382 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. the switch.0. i: Insert mode.

The types of information include: IP protocol TCP/UDP ports TCP flags ICMP message type 315393-J.Set source TCP/UDP port or range dport . page 388) that can be used to provide more information through syslog.Delete filter cur . redirect or perform Network Address Translation on traffic according to a variety of address and protocol specifications.Set vlan id invert .Set filter name smac .Set real server port for redirection nat . and each physical switch port can be configured to use any combination of filters. deny.Alteon OS 22.Set source IP mask dip .Set IP protocol sport .Set action group .Filter Advanced Menu name .0.Set real server group for redirection rport .Set destination TCP/UDP port or range action .Disable filter del .Enable filter dis . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 383 . There are several options available in the Filter Advanced Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv.Set destination IP mask proto .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> SLB Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Menu] adv .Enable/disable filter inversion ena .Set destination MAC address sip . Each filter can be configured to allow.Set which addresses are network address translated vlan .Set source IP address smask .Set destination IP address dmask . This command is disabled by default.Display current filter configuration The switch supports up to 2048 traffic filters.Set source MAC address dmac .

deny. redirect. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the destination MAC address. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. See details below for more information on producing address ranges.255. The default is any. dmac any|<MAC address (such as. For more information. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the dmask below. dip any|<IP address> If defined. The default is any if the destination MAC address is any. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the smask below. or any.255. nat) Enable the filter Add the filter to a switch port Enable filtering on the Alteon Application Switch port Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage adv Displays the Filter Advanced Menu.0)> This IP address mask is used with the dip to select traffic which this filter will affect. smac any|<MAC address (such as. The default is any if the source MAC address is any. traffic with this destination IP address will be affected by this filter. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 387. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 387. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.2 Command Reference The following parameters are required for filtering: Set the address. For more information.0> This IP address mask is used with the sip to select traffic which this filter will affect. 255. see page 388.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options. 255. dmask <IP subnet mask (such as. January 2005 . name <31 character name>|none Allows the user to assign a name to a filter.255. sip any|<IP address> If defined.255. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the source MAC address.0. smask <IP subnet mask (such as. The default is any. traffic with this source IP address will be affected by this filter. or any. and/or protocol that will be affected by the filter Set the filter action (allow. 384 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. masks.

name. traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will be affected by this filter. Listed below are some of the well-known ports: Number 20 21 22 23 25 37 42 43 53 69 70 79 80 109 110 Name ftp-data ftp ssh telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher finger http pop2 pop3 dport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined. 315393-J. traffic with the specified real server TCP or UDP destination port will be affected by this filter. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols. The default is any. or “any”. Specify the protocol number. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 385 . range.Alteon OS 22. Number 1 2 6 17 89 112 Name icmp igmp tcp udp ospf vrrp sport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined. name. name. Specify the port number. or “any”. The default is any. or “any”. range. Specify the port number.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage proto any|<number>|<name> If defined. traffic from the specified protocol is affected by this filter. The default is set at any. just as with sport above.

The default is set at 0. This is used in conjunction with the nat option (mentioned in this table) and can also be combined with proxies. this command specifies whether Network Address Translation (NAT) is performed on the source or the destination information. group <real server group number (1-1024)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. If dest is specified. Perform generic Network Address Translation (NAT). For valid Layer 4 health checks. If source is specified. Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs.0. Discard frames that fit this filter’s profile. To specify the new filter to goto. Also. effectively skipping over a block of filter IDs. Layer 4 processing must be activated (see the /cfg/slb/on command on page 356). The default is group 1 rport <real server port (0-65535)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action.2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage action allow|deny|redir|nat|goto Specifies the action this filter takes: allow deny redir Allow the frame to pass (by default). the frame’s source IP address (sip) and port number (sport) are replaced with the dip and dport values. nat goto 386 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. nat source|dest When nat is set as the filter action (see above). In addition. Define a real server group (1 to 16) to which redirected traffic will be sent. if transparent proxies are used for Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Alteon Application Switch (see the pip option in Table 7-22 on page 399). this must be configured whenever TCP protocol traffic is redirected. This can be used to map the source or destination IP address and port information of a private network scheme to/from the advertised network IP address and ports. The goto action causes filter processing to jump to a designated filter. Redirect frames that fit this filter’s profile. such as for web cache redirection.Alteon OS 22.slb/filt/adv/goto command. This defines the real server TCP or UDP port to which redirected traffic will be sent. January 2005 . use the /cfg. This can be used for building basic security profiles. Filter searching action will then continue from the designated filter ID. the frame’s destination IP address (dip) and port number (dport) are replaced with the sip and sport values. Destination (dest) is set as the default filter. rport must be configured for all Application Redirection filters.

This option allows you to match the VLAN ID of the switch against the VLAN ID of the incoming packet. 315393-J. the filter does not get applied to all the member ports of this VLAN. del Deletes this filter.4090)> Sets the ID of the VLAN that is to be filtered. invert disable|enable Inverts the filter logic. don’t act. to determine if a client request’s destination IP address should be redirected to the cache servers attached to a particular switch. If the conditions for the filter are not met. which means the switch will match any VLAN ID of the incoming packet This command allows filters to be configured on per VLAN basis. A VLAN has a set of member ports. and the smask (source) or dmask (destination) is the mask which is applied to produce the range.0. dis Disables this filter. For example. the destination IP address is masked (bitwise AND) with the dmask and then compared to the dip. But by applying this filter to a VLAN. This option is disabled by default. and applies a filter to a VLAN that already has been configured.2 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage vlan any|<VLAN ID (1 .Alteon OS 22. The default is any. the sip (source) or dip (destination) defines the base IP address in the desired range. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 387 . When a range of IP addresses is needed. ena Enables this filter. You have to manually add the filter to the port. If the conditions of the filter are met. Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters You can specify a range of IP address for filtering both the source and/or destination IP address for traffic. cur Displays the current configuration of the filter. perform the assigned action.

0.Enable/disable delayed binding for redirection pbind .0.Set NAT or L7 lookup session timeout idsgrp .0. you could configure the switch with two filters so that each would handle traffic filtering for one half of the Internet.255 0.0 128.Layer 7 Advanced Menu security .Display current advanced filter configuration 388 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Enable/disable WAN link load balancing dbind .0.Security Menu icmp .Enable/disable pip selection based on egress port/vlan cur .Enable/disable firewall redirect hash method linklb .1p Advanced Menu tcp .Set IDS server group for intrusion detection SLB idshash .0.Enable/disable persistent binding for redirection proxy . January 2005 . To do this.IP Advanced Menu layer7 .Enable/disable logging fwlb .802.Set client proxy IP address cache .2 Command Reference As another example.0.Set hash parameter for intrusion detection SLB thash .0 /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv Advanced Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Advanced Menu] 8021p .0.Set BW contract revcont . you could define the following parameters: Table 7-13 Filtering IP Address Ranges Filter #1 #2 Internet Address Range dip dmask 128.TCP Advanced Menu ip .Alteon OS 22.255 128.0.Set BW contract for the reverse session tmout .Set hash parameter for Filter goto .0.Set ICMP message type cont .0.255.Enable/disable creating session for reverse side traffic proxyip .255.0.0 255.127.0.Enable/disable client proxy epip .0 .0 128.Set GOTO filter ID reverse .Enable/disable caching sessions that match filter log .255.0.255.0 0.

tcp Displays the TCP Flags advanced menu. When filtering is used for IDSLB. idshash sip|dip|both Sets the hash metric parameter for Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing: source IP (sip). To view menu options. revcont <BW Contract.0. To view menu options.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays 8021p Advanced Menu. see page 392. Using this command you can preserve 802. see page 391. For a list of ICMP message types.2 Application Guide. IEEE 802. see Table 7-18 on page 394. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management Contract. 315393-J. see page 397 icmp any|<number>|<type. see the Alteon OS 22. "icmp list" for list> Sets the ICMP message type. each filter added to an IDSLB-enabled port can be assigned a unique IDS real server group. security Displays the filter Security Menu. the contract number is set at 256. 1-1024>|none Sets the IDS server group for intrusion detection server load balancing. or both. idsgrp <real server group number. see page 395. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 389 . By default. destination IP (dip).1p bits in all the frames that pass through the switch. ip Sets IP advanced menu. The default is set at 4 minutes. To view menu options. To view menu options. This command helps you assign a different Bandwidth management contract from the one configured on the ingress filter.0. For a detailed description of filtering and ICMP.1p is the specification for prioritizing the net- work traffic at the Layer 2 level in your switch. tmout <even number of minutes (4-32768)> Sets the session timeout in an even number of minutes. layer7 Displays Layer7 advanced menu. The default is set at any. To view menu options. see page 393. 1-256> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for the reverse traffic session.Alteon OS 22.

Alteon OS 22.0. Exercise caution while applying cacheenabled and cache-disabled filters to the same switch port. a hashing algorithm is used to ensure that inbound packets and outbound packets for a pair of IPSA/IPDA traverse through the same firewall. The option both allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and the destination IP address at the same time. The option sip+sport allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and source port at the same time. Cache is enabled by default. This command allows for the creation of a session entry for reverse traffic to avoid inspecting traffic in both directions. If the dport is 80 or 21. The option dip allows you to perform tunable hash on destination IP address for this filter. If the user does not configure the proxy IP address in the filter. By default. Note: Cache should be disabled if applying a filter to virtual server IP address while performing UDP load balancing (see “udp disable|enable|stateless” on page 378). goto <filter ID> Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage thash auto|sip|dip|both|sip+sport Allows you to choose hash parameter to use for filter redirection. A cache-enabled filter creates a session entry in the switch. linklb disable|enable Enables or disables WAN Link Load Balancing. the switch uses the proxy IP address configured under /cfg/slb/pip command. 390 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. Filter searching will then continue from the designated filter ID. this option is disabled. cache disable|enable Enables or disables caching sessions that match the filter. this option is disabled. so that the switch can bypass checking for subsequent frames that match the same criteria. enabling this option changes the hash of the filter from a WCR hash to a FWLB hash. By default. reverse disable|enable Enables or disables the creation of a session for traffic coming from the reverse side. This option is disabled by default. the action on this filter must be set to goto. log disable|enable Enables or disables generating of syslog messages when a filter is hit. Use this command to specify the new filter to go to. January 2005 . proxyip <IP address> Defines client proxy IP address. fwlb disable|enable To ensure that the stateful inspection behavior of firewalls is maintained. In order to use this feature. The switch uses the configured proxy IP address to replace the client's IP address. The sip option allows you to perform tunable hash on source IP address for this filter. The Default is auto.

this is enabled. If disabled. By default.Set 802. By default. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables client proxy.1p Advanced Menu] value . or when other forms of translation (such as Application Redirection or NAT) are preferred.2 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage dbind disable|enable Enables or disables delayed binding for redirection on this filter. cur Displays the current advanced filter configuration.Alteon OS 22. [802.Enable/disable 802. 315393-J. This is useful when certain traffic must retain original IP address information. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 391 . The 802. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure.1p value match . This option applies only when redir or nat is specified as the filter action.1p value matching cur . epip disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP selection based on egress port or VLAN. you can configure the SP to select proxy IP address based on the egress port or VLAN.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them.1p configuration Table 7-15 8021p Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/8021p) Command Syntax and Usage value <0-7> Defines 802. /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/8021p 802. Enable or disable proxy IP address translation for traffic matching the filter criteria.0.Display current 802.1p Advanced Menu This feature provides the Alteon OS the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802. the SP selects the proxy IP address based on ingress port or VLAN. Using the epip command.1p bits in the packet's VLAN header. pbind disable|enable Enables or disables persistent binding for redirection on this filter. The packets with a higher (non-zero) priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower priority bits value.1p value. any proxy defined for the switch port using the pip command (see page 399) is not performed for traffic meeting the filter criteria.

psh disable|enable Enables or disables TCP PSH (push) flag matching.1p configuration. this option is disabled.Alteon OS 22.Enable/disable TCP RST matching .Enable/disable TCP PSH matching . By default. /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/tcp Advanced Filter TCP Configuration [TCP Advanced urg ack psh rst syn fin ackrst cur Menu] . Table 7-16 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp) Command Syntax and Usage urg disable|enable Enables or disables TCP URG (urgent) flag matching. January 2005 . syn disable|enable Enables or disables TCP SYN (synchronize) flag matching.Display current TCP configuration These commands can be used to configure packet filtering for specific TCP flags. this option is disabled.1p value.Enable/disable TCP FIN matching .Enable/disable TCP ACK matching .Enable/disable TCP URG matching . When the Management Processor needs to reuse the packet to send to the destination.Enable/disable TCP SYN matching . By default. 392 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. By default.0. rst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP RST (reset) flag matching. By default. the switch matches the original priority bits information with the priority bits information after the frame processing is complete.2 Command Reference Table 7-15 8021p Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/8021p) Command Syntax and Usage match disable|enable Enables or disables matching of 802.Enable/disable TCP ACK or RST matching . this option is disabled. By default. cur Displays current 802. ack disable|enable Enables or disables TCP ACK (acknowledgement) flag matching. this option is disabled. this option is disabled.

January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 393 .Set IP Type of Service tmask .Display current IP configuration Table 7-17 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip) Command Syntax and Usage tos <0-255> Sets IP type of service (ToS) and the value of the type of service. For more information on ToS. newtos <0-255> Sets new IP type of service. length <IP packet length (in bytes).Set new IP TOS length .Enable/disable IP option matching cur .Set IP maximum packet length option . By default.2 Command Reference Table 7-16 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp) Command Syntax and Usage fin disable|enable Enables or disables TCP FIN (finish) flag matching. tmask <0-255> Sets IP type of service mask.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.0. 64-65535>|any Defines the limit of IP packet’s length. option disable|enable Enables or disables IP option matching. By default. Any packet exceeding the maximum length will not match the filter. this option is disabled. ackrst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP acknowledgement or reset flag matching. /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/ip IP Advanced Menu [IP Advanced Menu] tos . this option is disabled.Set IP TOS mask newtos . refer to RFC 1340 and 1349. cur Displays the current Access Control List TCP filter configuration.

2 Command Reference Table 7-17 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current advanced IP settings for the selected filter. You can list all ICMP message types with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp list command.0.Alteon OS 22. ICMP Message Types The following ICMP message types are used with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp command. January 2005 . Table 7-18 ICMP Message Types Type # Message Type 0 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 echorep destun quench redir echoreq rtradv rtrsol timex param timereq timerep inforeq inforep maskreq maskrep Description ICMP echo reply ICMP destination unreachable ICMP source quench ICMP redirect ICMP echo request ICMP router advertisement ICMP router solicitation ICMP time exceeded ICMP parameter problem ICMP timestamp request ICMP timestamp reply ICMP information request ICMP information reply ICMP address mask request ICMP address mask reply 394 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.

Add HTTP redirection mapping remrd . For more details.Set BW cont of an URL path specific to this filter addrd . remrd <string id to redirect from (1-512)> <string id to redirect to (2-512)> Removes an HTTP redirection mapping that was added using the addrd command described above.Add string for layer 7 filtering remstr .Remove HTTP redirection mapping addstr .Enable/disable Layer 7 content lookup parseall . Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple filters and each filter requires a separate bandwidth. This information is needed to add to or delete static session entries in the switch’s session table so that it can perform the required persistency for load balancing.Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets cur .Enable/disable WAP RADIUS Snooping rdswap . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 395 .Enable/disable active FTP NAT l7lkup . remstr <string id (1-1024)> Removes the string ID for Layer 7 filtering.Remove string for layer 7 filtering rdsnp . addrd [1>2] Adds an HTTP redirection mapping. please refer to your Application Guide.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/layer7 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu [Layer 7 Advanced Menu] urlcont . Radius snooping allows the Alteon OS to examine RADIUS accounting packets for client information. This command tells the filter that if it matches on the first string id.Enable/disable RADIUS/WAP Persistence ftpa . Strings are defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/ layer7/slb/add. then send back an HTTP redirection message back to the client that contains information in the second string ID. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22.Display current layer 7 configuration Table 7-19 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the URL path BW contract for this filter. addstr <string id (1-1024)> Adds the string ID to this filter for L7 filtering.0. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/ slb/add. rdsnp disable|enable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS snooping on this filter.

0. When enabled. The switch forwards this reply to the RAS. This command is enabled by default.2 Command Reference Table 7-19 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage rdswap enable|disable Enables or disables WAP RADIUS persistence on this filter. However. The “framed IP address” attribute is used to rebind the RADIUS accounting session to a new server. deny. that is PIP:PPORT. it sends a RADIUS accounting start packet on UDP port 1813 to the bound server. this option is disabled. The real server port (RPORT) will be replaced with a proxy port (PPORT). subsequent packets can be ignored. When parseall is disabled. After the RAS receives the Radius accept packet. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables parsing of all packets in a session where layer 7 lookup is being performed. By default. layer 7 lookup is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. When a client in active FTP mode sends a PORT command to a remote FTP server. When combined with a filter action (for example. A WAP client is first authenticated by the RADIUS server on UDP port 1812. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. the switch will look into the data part of the frame and replace the client 's private IP address with a proxy IP (PIP) address.Alteon OS 22. The application switch snoops on the RADIUS accounting start packet for the “framed IP address” attribute. This command replaces the urlp and l7deny commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS. This feature allows for RADIUS and WAP persistence by binding both (RADIUS accounting and WAP) sessions to the same server. January 2005 . ftpa disable|enable Enables or disables active FTP Client Network Address Translation (NAT). The server replies with a Radius Accept or Reject frame. please refer to your Application Guide. the filter performs a lookup on layer 7 content such as HTTP strings or headers. cur Displays the current advanced Layer 7 configuration of the filter including the Radius/Wap persistence settings. some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. this feature enables content-intelligent redirection or content-intelligent deny filtering. redir). l7lkup disable|enable Enables or disables layer 7 lookup on this filter. 396 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. Once this packet is found. For more details.

addgrp <pattern match group id> Adds a pattern group to this filter. When parseall is disabled. This feature enables the switch to detect and block UDP or ICMP-based DOS attacks that slow down or decapitate the servers. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 397 . Once this packet is found. To view menu options see page 398. and ICMP protocols.0. cur Displays the current configuration. 315393-J. pmatch disable|enable Enables or disables pattern matching on this filter. This command is enabled by default. matchall disable|enable Enables or disables matching of all configured patterns before the filter can perform the deny action.Alteon OS 22. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables pattern string lookup (parsing) of all packets in a session where pattern matching is being performed. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. UDP. subsequent packets can be ignored. remgrp <pattern match group id> Removes a pattern group from this filter. some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. Currently. the switch allows rate limiting to be enabled on TCP. Pattern groups are added using the /cfg/security/ pgroup/add command. The protocol-based rate limiting limits the traffic coming from specific clients based on the IP address of the client. However.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu [Security Menu] ratelim addgrp remgrp pmatch matchall parseall cur Rate Limiting Menu Add pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Remove pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable pattern matching Enable/disable match-all criteria for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets Display current Security configuration Table 7-20 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security) Command Syntax and Usage ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting Menu. pattern matching is turned off for the remaining packets in the session.

A time window is a configured period of time (in seconds) during which packets are allowed to be received. cur Displays the current rate limiting configuration. ena Enables the protocol for rate limiting. Rate limiting is applied to the protocol configured on the filter. or ICMP rate limiting. and ICMP. When blocking occurs. UDP. The time window can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. or ICMP rate limiting Disable TCP. The hold-down duration can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. UDP. The supported protocols are: TCP. or ICMP rate limiting Display current rate limiting configuration Table 7-21 Rate Limiting Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security/ ratelim) Command Syntax and Usage maxconn <# of connections in units of 10 (0-255)> Defines maximum connections for rate limiting. 2-65535> Defines hold down duration for rate limiting. January 2005 . 1-65535> Defines time window for rate limiting. UDP. The client is held down for a specified number of minutes.Alteon OS 22. after which new TCP connection requests or packets from the client are allowed once again to pass through.0. UDP. holddur <minutes. dis Disables TCP. the client is said to be held down. any new TCP connection requests or UDP/ICMP packets from the client are blocked. timewin <seconds.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security/ ratelim Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu [Rate Limiting maxconn timewin holddur ena dis cur Menu] Set maximum connections for rate limiting Set time window for rate limiting Set hold down duration for rate limiting Enable TCP. When the number of new connections or packets exceeds the configured limit. 398 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.

or another switch.0.Alteon OS 22. This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable client processing server . 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 399 . it may take some time before the port session information is updated so that the filter changes take effect. Maximizing the number of these ports on the Layer 4 switch will improve the switch’s potential for effective Server Load Balancing. Table 7-22 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) Command Syntax and Usage client disable|enable For Server Load Balancing. NOTE – When changing the filters on a given port.Enable/disable inter-switch processing proxy . re-mapping virtual server IP addresses and port values to real server IP addresses and ports.Enable/disable server processing rts . the port can be enabled or disabled to process client Layer 4 traffic. router. server disable|enable Ports configured to provide real server responses to client requests require real servers to be connected to the Layer 4 switch. When server processing is enabled. expanding your topology options. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally.Remove filter from port idslb .Enable/disable hot-standby processing intersw . This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable filtering add .Enable/disable intrusion detection server load balancing cur .Enable/disable use of PIP for ingress traffic filt . Ports configured to process client request traffic bind servers to clients and provide address translation from the virtual server IP address to the real server IP address.Add filter to port rem . clear the session binding table for the port (see the clear command in Table 8-3 on page 436).2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/port <port number> Port SLB Configuration [SLB port 1 Menu] client .Enable/disable RTS processing hotstan . the switch port re-maps real server IP addresses and Layer 4 port values to virtual server IP addresses and Layer 4 ports.Display current port configuration Alteon OS switch software allows you to enable or disable processing independently for each type of Layer 4 traffic (client and server) on a per port basis. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally. directly or through a hub. To make port filter changes take effect immediately.

cur Displays the current system parameters. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables a proxy for traffic that ingresses this port. This option is used for firewall load balancing or VPN load balancing applications. rather than around it. Proxies are also useful for Application Redirection and Network Address Translation (NAT). client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. Enable rts on all client-side ports to ensure that traffic ingresses and egresses through the same port. this forces response traffic to return through the switch. 400 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. This option is disabled by default. 1-100. In the case of client processing. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot-standby processing. This option is disabled by default. rem <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Removes a filter or a block of filters from use on this port.0. Use this option and the intersw option in conjunction with VRRP hot-standby failover. This option is disabled by default. as is possible in complex routing environments. IDSLB is done at the end of filter processing or at the end of client processing where filtering is not enabled. When the PIP is defined. January 2005 . In Server Load Balancing applications. This option is disabled by default. For example. For example. This option is enabled for ports connected to a peer switch and is disabled by default. intersw disable|enable Enables or disables inter-switch processing.2. When pip is used with Application Redirection filters.This option is disabled by default. each filter’s rport parameter must also be defined (see rport on page 384).Alteon OS 22. 1-100. For more information on using rts.0. see the “Firewall Load Balancing” and “VPN Load Balancing” chapters in the Alteon OS 22.0. IDSLB is enabled on a port and a real server group is designated for IDSLB. filt disable|enable Enables or disables filtering on this port. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. Enabling the filter sets up the Real Server to look into the VPN session table. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. add <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Adds a filter or a block of filters for use on this port. idslb disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing on this port.2 Command Reference Table 7-22 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) rts disable|enable Enables or disables Return to Sender (RTS) load balancing on this port.2 Application Guide. In Alteon OS 22.

The switch performs this periodically on every remote site using Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP). In addition. 315393-J. see page 406. GSLB uses the health and response time to select the server in the GSLB selection engine.Set CPU utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) mincon .Set interval in seconds for remote site updates sesscap . rule <rule (1-128)> Displays the Rule Menu.Alteon OS 22. To view menu options.Enable/disable no remote real SLB encrypt .Set DSSP version 1 or 2 to send out remote site updates port .Enable/disable HTTP redirect based GSLB usern . DSSP is a proprietary protocol that resides above TCP.0.Enable/disable virtual service hostname matching http . GSLB sends the health and response time together with the local session and CPU utilization information that are collectively known as remote site updates. network <network (1-128)> Displays Network Preference Menu.Enable/disable authoritative DNS direct based GSLB hostlk . please refer to your Application Guide. [Global SLB Menu] site . see page 403.Set sessions available capacity threshold dns .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb Global SLB Configuration Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) at any given site performs periodic SLB health checks to determine the health and response time of the remote real server corresponding to the virtual server at the remote site. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 405.Set sessions utilization capacity threshold (DSSPv2) cpucap . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 401 .Enable/disable HTTP redirect to remote real server name norem .Remote Site Menu network .Network Preference Menu rule . For more information.Set TCP port number for DSSPv2 remote site updates sinter .Enable/disable encrypting remote site updates on .Rule Menu version .Globally turn Global SLB ON off .Globally turn Global SLB OFF cur .Display current Global SLB configuration Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage site <remote site (1-64)> Displays the menu for a remote site.

sesscap <Session utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for session utilization capacity. January 2005 . If usern is enabled. this switch will redirect client requests to peer sites if its own real servers fail or have reached their maximum connection limits. in addition to the domain name.0. When disabled. The default configuration is 90%. the hostname specified in the Virtual Service configuration. dns disable|enable Enables or disables DNS direct-based GSLB. 10-7200> Sets the time interval in seconds for remote site updates. When enabled. will be used to resolve the IP address for the domain. mincon <available sessions threshold. but will instead drop requests for new connections and cause the client’s browser to eventually issue a new DNS request.2 Command Reference Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage version <DSSP version 1 or 2> Defines the version of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) that is used to send out the remote site updates. If disabled. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP redirects to peer sites by this switch. 0-65535> Defines the capacity threshold for the sessions available on the real server for GSLB. cpucap <CPU utilization capacity threshold (1-100)> Sets the threshold for the CPU utilization capacity. sinter <remote site updates interval in seconds. This option is enabled by default. This option is disabled by default. The default TCP port is 80. hostlk disable|enable Enables or disables lookups based on host or domain name in a GSLB configuration. The range is between 10 and 7200 seconds. When a site redirects a client to another site using an HTTP redirect. When enabled (default). the client is redirected to the new site's IP address. the switch will not perform HTTP Redirects. port <TCP port number> Sets the TCP port number for remote site updates for Global server load balancing. only the domain name will be used to match.Alteon OS 22. usern disable|enable Enables or disables an HTTP redirect to a real server name. The default configuration is 90%. the client will be redirected to the domain name specified by the remote real server name plus virtual server domain name: <remote real server name> <virtual server domain name> 402 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.

For HTTP protocols. Each site has a virtual server for the domain. the switch will not do remote real server load balancing for non-http protocols. 315393-J. GSLB is turned off. If enabled. Each virtual service has a group of real servers.2 Command Reference Table 7-23 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage norem This command enables or disables no-remote real server load balancing. off Turns GSLB off for this switch. /cfg/slb/gslb/site <site number> GSLB Remote Site Configuration The switch initiates a global server selection to direct client traffic to the best server for a given domain. cur Displays the current Global SLB configuration. Each domain has one or more sites. By default. but will not hand off requests to this switch.Alteon OS 22. If disabled. Each virtual server has a domain name. you need to disable the http parameter in the same menu. the switch will not encrypt the DSSP messages going out of the switch. This option allows the GSLB feature to work with older versions of Web OS that do not encrypt DSSP messages on Activates Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) for this switch. Any active remote sites will still perform GSLB services with each other. The combination of a virtual server and a virtual service is called a domain. if you want to do no-remote-real-server load balancing. Each virtual server has a number of virtual services. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 403 . Each virtual service has a host name. encrypt This command enables or disables encrypting of DSSP updates. This option can be performed only once the optional GSLB software is activated (refer to “Activating Optional Software” on page 441).0.

Enable/disable remote site updates ena . there is a local virtual server but no remote virtual server. disable the updates. If both are enabled. ena Enables this remote site for use with Global Server Load Balancing. The local virtual server has a number of local virtual services Each local virtual service has a group of local or remote real servers.2 Command Reference At a local site for a domain. the switch will not send state updates. The default is set at none. update disable|enable Enables or disables remote site updates. configure the Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) to use a different service port (see the /cfg/sys/access/wport option on page 259).Alteon OS 22.Display current remote site configuration Up to 64 remote sites can be configured. 404 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. enter the IP address of the IP interface for the remote secondary switch here. [Remote site 1 Menu] prima . January 2005 .0. The remote real servers are the virtual servers at the remote sites. Note: When update is enabled.Delete remote site cur . the Alteon OS Web-based interface also uses port 80.Enable remote site dis . If the remote site primary switch fails. Both services cannot use the same port. If enabled (default). If your local firewall does not permit this traffic. By default.Disable remote site del . this switch will send regular Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates to its remote peers using HTTP port 80. name <31 character name>|none Sets the name of the remote site. the local switch will address the remote site secondary switch instead.Set primary switch IP address of remote site secon . Table 7-24 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage prima <server IP address> Defines the IP interface IP address of the primary switch at the remote site used for Global Server Load Balancing.Set remote site name update . Global Server Load Balancing uses service port 80 on the IP interface for DSSP updates.Set secondary switch IP address of remote site name . secon <server IP address> If the remote site is configured with a redundant switch. Use dotted decimal notation. If disabled.

January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 405 .255.0. /cfg/slb/gslb/network <network number> GSLB Network Preference Configuration Menu Network preference selects a server based on the preferred network of the source IP address for a given domain. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.Add remote real server to network remreal .Display current network configuration Table 7-25 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network) Command Syntax and Usage sip <IP address> Defines the source (client) IP address. The preferred network contains a subset of the servers for the domain. 315393-J.Delete network cur .Set source IP and network netmask addvirt .Enable network dis . A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mask option. Up to 128 network preference numbers can be set. del Removes this remote site from operation and deletes its configuration.2 Command Reference Table 7-24 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables this remote site.Alteon OS 22. [Network 1 Menu] sip .Disable network del . cur Displays the current remote site configuration. The switch will no longer use this remote site for Global Server Load Balancing.Remove remote real server from network ena .0)> This IP address mask is used with the source IP (SIP) address to find a correct virtual server IP address to respond to a DNS request. mask <IP subnet mask (such as.255. 255.Set source IP address mask .Add virtual server to network remvirt .Remove virtual server from network addreal .

remreal <real server number (1-1023)> Removes a real server from the network. /cfg/slb/gslb/rule GSLB Rule Configuration Menu Rules allow the GSLB selection to use different metric preferences based on time-of-day. del Deletes the network entry. Each rule has a metric preference list. You can configure one or more rules on each domain. January 2005 . [Rule 1 Menu] metric start end ttl rr dname ena dis del cur - Metric Menu Set start time for rule Set end time for rule Set Time To Live in seconds of DNS resource records Set DNS resource records in DNS response Set network preference domain name for rule Enable rule Disable rule Delete rule Display current rule configuration 406 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. ena Enables the network. cur Displays the current Internet network entry configuration. The GSLB selection selects the first rule that matches the domain and starts with the first metric in the metric preference list of the rule.Alteon OS 22. remvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Removes a virtual server from the network. addreal <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to the network.0. No virtual server is added by default. dis Disables the network.2 Command Reference Table 7-25 GSLB Network Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/network) Command Syntax and Usage addvirt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Adds a virtual server to the network.

Alteon OS 22. del Deletes the rule. The default is 2 records. cur Displays the current rule configuration. A lower value may increase the ability of the GSLB system to adjust to sudden changes in traffic load.0. To view menu options. You can use wildcard “*” while creating the domain name. rr <rr (1-10)> Sets the DNS resource records that how many DNS resource records will be returned in the DNS response. end <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the end time for the rule. but will generate more DNS traffic. The default is zero. Default is none. start <hour (0-23)> <minutes (0-59)> Defines the start time for the rule. The maximum length for the domain name can be 34 characters. ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Specifies the duration (from 0 to 65535 seconds. dis Disables the rule. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 407 .2 Command Reference Table 7-26 GSLB Rule Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-16)> Displays Metric Preference Menu. with default at 60) that the DNS response from the switch (indicating site of best service) will remain in the cache of DNS servers. ena Enables the rule. dname <34 character (wildcard "*" allowed) domain name> | none Defines the domain name for the rule for network preference. 315393-J. but may slow GSLB’s response to sudden traffic changes. Higher numbers may reduce the amount of DNS traffic. The default is zero. see page 408.

Server Load Balancing Menu dbindtm .Display current metric configuration Table 7-27 Global SLB Rule Metric Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric) Command Syntax and Usage gmetric leastconns|roundrobin|response|geographical|network|random|availability|qos|minmisses|hash|local|always|remote|none Defines the metric to select the next real server for GSLB. addnet Allows you to add a network to the selected metric.Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current configuration of the metric.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb/rule/metric Global SLB Rule Metric Menu [Rule 1 Metric 1 Menu] gmetric .Web Cache Redirection Menu slb .0. This command applies only if you select network as the metric.Display current Layer 7 configuration Table 7-28 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage redir Displays the Web Cache Redirection Menu. see page 409. remnet Allows you to delete a network that was added to the selected metric.Add network to gmetric=network remnet .Set metric to use to select next server addnet .Set timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections cur . To view menu options. 408 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. The default is none. /cfg/slb/layer7 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu [Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu] redir .Remove network from gmetric=network cur . January 2005 .

315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 409 . /cfg/slb/layer7/redir Web Cache Redirection Configuration [Web Cache Redirection Menu] urlal .2 Command Reference Table 7-28 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Menu. To view menu options. This option is enabled by default. the switch will redirect all non-GET requests to the origin server. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to a cache server or origin server.Enable/disable no-cache control header to origin servers hash .Alteon OS 22. If this command is disabled. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to the origin server.0.Enable/disable URL hashing based on URI header . cookie disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for cookie to origin servers.Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for Cookie to origin servers nocache . If this command is enabled. cur Displays the current Layer 7 configuration.Enable/disable server loadbalance based on HTTP header cur .Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers cookie . see page 411. This option is disabled by default. dbindtm <10-60 seconds> Sets the timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections. If this command is enabled.Display current WCR configuration Table 7-29 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage urlal disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether all non-GET requests should be redirected to a cache server or origin server. If this command is disabled.

you can set the length of URI that will be used to hash into the cache server by specifying a number from 1-255. If this command is disabled. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect requests that contain Cache-Control: no-cache in HTTP/ 1. If this command is enabled. hash disable|enable <number (1-255)> Enables or disables URL hashing based on the URI.1 header.1 header. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cache-Control: nocache in HTTP/1. cur Displays the current URL expression table. This option is disabled by default. 410 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.0 header to the origin server.0 header to a cache server or origin server. If hashing is enabled.2 Command Reference Table 7-29 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage nocache disable|enable Enables or disables no-cache control header to origin servers. or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1. This option is disabled by default. the switch will only use the host header field to calculate the hash key. If hashing is disabled.0. header disable|enable host|useragent|others Enables or disables server load balancing based on HTTP header.Alteon OS 22. This option is enabled by default. or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1. January 2005 .

The default message is “No available server to handle this request.0 and HTTP 1. If you choose l7lkup string. HTTP allows an open-ended set of methods to be used to indicate the purpose of a request.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/layer7/slb Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu [Server Loadbalance Resource Menu] message . addmeth <Method.Add SLB string for load balance remstr .Remove HTTP method type case .Remove SLB string for load balance rename . rename <SLB string ID> <SLB string> Renames the SLB string for load balancing. The software supports both HTTP 1. Alteon OS 22. The methods GET and HEAD must be supported by all general-purpose servers. All other methods are optional.0. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 411 .Set HTTP error message addstr .Alteon OS 22. you can define a string for server load balancing or a string for Layer 7 lookup. 315393-J.Rename SLB string for load balance addmeth . you will have the option to choose between ascii or binary strings on a specific offset of the IP frame.Display current configuration Table 7-30 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage message <64 byte error message> Sets the message that will be displayed when an error occurs. 1-32> Allows you to add HTTP request methods of maximum 32 characters to your switch software. remstr <SLB string ID> Removes this SLB string from the real server.1 to perform HTTP request methods. These strings will only be used for filtering string pattern matching.Enable/disable case sensitive for string matching cont . A method is case-sensitive.Set BW contract for the SLB string cur . If you choose pattern string.” addstr <l7lkup|pattern> Allows the user to define a string that can be used for server load balancing or filtering by selecting either a Layer 7 look up string or a pattern match.0.2 supports 22 request methods by default. You can see a list of supported default methods by using the command cur in this menu.Add HTTP method type remmeth .

2 Command Reference Table 7-30 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage remmeth <Method ID> Allows you to remove HTTP methods from your switch software.Enable/disable WAP TPCP external notification debug . all load balancing strings and all the request strings arriving on the switch will have to be converted to lower case before doing any string comparison. cur Displays the current WAP configuration 412 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.WAP debug level cur . If you disable case sensitive.Alteon OS 22. debug <wap debug level (0-10)> Sets the debug level for tracing the WAP related messages. Using this command you can do either case sensitive or case insensitive string comparison. /cfg/slb/wap WAP Configuration [WAP Options Menu] tpcp .Display current WAP configuration Table 7-31 WAP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/wap) Command Syntax and Usage tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP external notification for Add/Delete session requests.0. cur Displays the currently configured SLB strings and their associated string IDs (index numbers) and the supported HTTP request methods. This option is disabled by default. case disable|enable Enables or disables case sensitivity for string matching. January 2005 . The default is set at 0. cont <SLB string ID [1-1024]> <BW contract number [1-256]> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for a specified string for the SLB string ID.

January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 413 . This option is disabled by default. This option is enabled by default.Synch Peer Switch Menu filt . This option is enabled by default.Display current Layer 4 sync configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches.0. peerpips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing the peer proxy IP addresses. and VRRP configuration updates using /oper/slb/ synch. This option is enabled by default.Enable/disable syncing persistent session state update . ports disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Layer 4 port configuration. a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch. This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable syncing port configuration prios . Peer proxy IP addresses are used in VRRP Active/Active configuration. filt disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing filter configuration. To view menu options. see page 414. pips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing proxy IP addresses.Alteon OS 22.Set stateful failover update period cur .Enable/disable syncing proxy IP addresses peerpips . Table 7-32 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer switch number (1-2)> Displays the Sync Peer Switch Menu. Peers are sent SLB.Enable/disable syncing filter configuration ports .Enable/disable syncing VRRP priorities pips .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/sync Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration [Config Synchronization Menu] peer . 315393-J.Enable/disable syncing BWM configuration state . FILT. prios disable|enable Enables or disables syncing VRRP priorities. This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable syncing peer proxy IP addresses bwm . Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password.

state disable|enable Enables or disables stateful failover for synchronizing the persistent session state. By default.0. dis Disables the peer for this switch. to the backup switch at the specified update interval. update <seconds. This option is disabled by default.Display current peer switch configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password.0 ena Enables the peer for this switch.Set peer switch IP address ena . The default is 0.0. The active switch sends update packets of new persistent binding entries.Disable peer switch del . Table 7-33 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address> Sets the peer switch IP address. The default value is 30 seconds. 414 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. cur Displays the current Layer 4 synchronization configuration. this option is disabled.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-32 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage bwm disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Bandwidth Management configuration between Master and backup switches. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. This option is enabled by default. 1–60> Sets the stateful failover update interval. if any.Enable peer switch dis . /cfg/slb/sync/peer <peer switch number> Peer Switch Configuration [Peer Switch 1 Menu] addr . a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch.Delete peer switch cur .

0.Set SLB session attack inspection interval allowlim .Set management network mmask .Set management subnet mask pmask . /cfg/slb/adv Advanced Layer 4 Configuration [Layer 4 Advanced Menu] synatk .Enable/disable Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol vstat .Set SLB session attack alert allowable limit submac .Display current Layer 4 advanced configuration Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage synatk Displays SYN Attack Detection Menu.Set virtual and real IP address mask mnet .Alteon OS 22.Session table slow-age (2 min) period bit shift cur .2 Command Reference Table 7-33 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the peer for this switch cur Displays the current peer switch configuration.SYN Attack Detection Menu smtport .Enable/disable Virtual Service Statistics rtsvlan . see page 421.Enable/disable Source MAC address substitution direct .Session table fast-age (1 sec) period bit shift slowage .Service Mapping Table Real Port Menu imask . To view menu options.Enable/disable using VLAN info for real server lookup portbind .Enable/disable Ingress Port For Session Table Binding fastage .Set persistent mask intrval . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 415 .Enable/disable graceful real server failure matrix .Enable/disable Direct Access Mode grace . 315393-J.Enable/disable Virtual Matrix Architecture tpcp .

0)> Sets persistent mask.255.255. In other words. the switch will generate a syslog and an SNMP trap to alert the administrator that the switch is under SLB attack.255.255. management traffic with this source IP address will be allowed direct (non-Layer 4) access to the real servers. By default.255. submac disable|enable Enables or disables Source MAC address substitution.Alteon OS 22. mnet <IP address> If defined. mmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255. Using this command you can add or remove a number of real server service port(s) that will process client traffic by-passing the server. The default is 255. pmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. This option also allows any virtual server to load balance any real server. the source MAC is not modified for the packets going to the servers in an SLB environment. 416 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.255.255.0)> Configures the real and virtual server IP address mask using dotted decimal notation. imask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. Typically. The default is 255.255.255. see page 418. direct disable|enable Enable/disables Direct Access Mode to real servers/services. You can set this limit by using the next command in this menu: allowlim. The default is 255. If the number of sessions exceeds this limit. To view menu options.255.255.255. January 2005 . At the configured interval of time the switch will check if the number of sessions is within the configured limits. the switch will substitute the source MAC address (for the packets going to the server) with the MAC address of the switch. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mmask option. But if you enable this command. intrval <time window for collecting sessions (0-3600)> This command allows you to configure the time interval (from one second to one hour) to specify how frequently you want to check the SLB sessions (attacks) the switch received. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.0)> This IP address mask is used with the mnet to select management traffic which is allowed direct access to real servers.255. this service port’s client request will not be processed by the server processor.0.2 Command Reference Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage smtport Displays Service Mapping Table (SMT) Real Server Port Menu.255. this option is disabled. allowlim <allowable limit (1-2097104)> This command allows you to specify the maximum number of sessions the switch can receive at any given period of time.

Allows existing sessions to remain bound to a server after the server has been placed in the service failed state (for more information.Alteon OS 22. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced configuration.2 Command Reference Table 7-34 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage grace disable|enable Enables or disables graceful real server failure.2 Application Guide). By default. This command is used for security reasons—the UDP port can be closed. a session can remain in the session table for a few minutes. which causes the time to double per increment). vstat disable|enable Enables or disables reporting of virtual service statistics. The default is 0. The default interval is two seconds. The default is 0. If a large value of slowage is used. fastage <shift the fast-age (1sec) period 0-7 bits> Controls how frequently a fastage scan is performed. 315393-J.0. this option is disabled. (Value is set in bits rather than seconds. The default interval is two minutes. The slowage scan is used to remove idle or non-TCP sessions from the session at the specified intervals. matrix disable|enable Enables or disables the use of Virtual Matrix Architecture on the Alteon Application Switch. tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol). Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. By default.0. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. this option is disabled. The fastage scan is used to remove TCP sessions that have been closed with a FIN and sessions that have been identified by the slowage scan as idle for the maximum allowed period. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 417 . If a large value of fastage is used. see “Service Failure” in the Alteon OS 22. slowage <shift the slow-age (2min) period 0-14 bits> Controls how frequently a slowage scan is performed. a session can remain in the session table for months. this option is enabled. By default. portbind disable|enable Enables or disables the inclusion of the ingress port number in the session table look up. rtsvlan disable|enable Enables or disables the use of VLAN for Return to Sender information on the real server.

418 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Set SYN attack detection interval thrshld .0.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/adv/synatk SYN Attack Detection Configuration Menu [SYN Attack Detection Menu] intrval .Display real port configuration Table 7-36 Advanced SMT Real Server Port Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/smtport) Command Syntax and Usage add <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to add a service port to the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor.Add real port remove .Display current SYN attack detection configuration Table 7-35 SYN Attack Detection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/synatk) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <SYN attack check interval in seconds (2-3600)> Sets the interval of SYN attack inspection. /cfg/slb/adv/smtport Advanced SMT Real Server Port Configuration Menu [SMT Real Port Menu] add . thrshld <SYN attack alarm threshold (new half-open sessions/second) (1-100000)> Sets the threshold of SYN attack alarm. January 2005 .Remove real port cur . cur Displays the current SYN attack detection configuration.Set SYN attack alarm threshold cur . cur Displays real port configuration. remove <real server port (2-65534)> This command allows you to remove a service port from the real server that is configured to process client traffic by-passing the server processor.

January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 419 . To view menu options.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb Inbound Link Load Balancing configuration Menu [Inbound Linklb group ttl drecord ena dis cur Menu] Set real server group Set Time to Live of DNS resource records Domain Record Menu Enable Inbound Linklb Disable Inbound Linklb Display current Inbound Linklb configuration Table 7-37 Inbound Link Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-256)> Sets the real server ISP group number.0. dis Disables inbound link load balancing. drecord <domain record number (1-64)> Displays domain record menu. ena Enables inbound link load balancing. ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Sets the time-to-live for DNS resource records. cur Displays current inbound link load configuration. see page 420.Alteon OS 22. 315393-J.

Virt Real Mapping Menu ena . January 2005 .Disable Domain Record del . entry <linklb entry number (1-8)> Displays the link load balancer’s mapping menu for the virtual and real servers. ena Enables the domain records. Default is none. del Deletes the domain records. cur Displays the current domain records.Delete Domain Record cur . 420 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Display current Domain Record configuration Table 7-38 Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu Options (/cfg/slb/ linklb/drecord) Command Syntax and Usage domain <34 character domain name>|none Allows you to configure the domain name.Set Domain Name entry .0. See page 390 to view menu options. dis Disables the domain records.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb/drecord Inbound Link Load Balancing Domain Record Menu [Domain Record Menu] domain .Enable Domain Record dis .

LDAP version secret . cur Displays the current real and virtual server mappings for drecords entries. /cfg/slb/advhc Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu [Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu] script . del Deletes the entry for drecords.Alteon OS 22. dis Disables the entry for drecords.Enable/disable Allow HTTP Health Check on any port ldapver .Set Real Server Number ena .Set RADIUS secret minter . real Defines the real server number for mapping.Set Virtual Server Number real .Delete Entry cur .Display current Entry configuration Table 7-39 Command Syntax & Usage virt <virtual server number.WAP Health Check Menu aphttp .SNMP Health Check Menu waphc .Enable Entry dis .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/linklb/drecord/entry Inbound Link Load Balancing Mapping Menu [Virt Real Mapping 1 Menu] virt . 1-1024> Defines the virtual server number for mapping.Scriptable Health Check Menu snmphc .Set interval of response and bandwidth metric updates cur . January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 421 .Disable Entry del .Display current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration 315393-J.0. ena Enables the entry for drecords.

minter <number of seconds between updates (1-256)> This command sets the interval of response and bandwidth metric updates. see page 426.2 Command Reference Table 7-40 Advanced Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc) Command Syntax and Usage script <health script number (1-16)> Displays the Scriptable Health Check Menu. The default is none. 422 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration. see page 423. To view menu options. you can use HTTP health checks only for HTTP service. Enabling it will allow you to use it on any port. The secret value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. When disabled. like HTTPs.0. January 2005 . By default. the network administrator must configure two parameters in the switch: the /cfg/slb/secret value and the cntnt parameter with a username:password value. secret <1-32 character secret> To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server. ldapver <LDAP version> Sets the LDAP version to 2 or 3. The default is 2. To view menu options. waphc Displays the WAP Health Check Menu. To view menu options. snmphc <SNMP health check number (1-5)> Displays the SNMP Health Check Menu. see page 425. The default is set at 10. this option is disabled.Alteon OS 22. aphttp disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP health checks on any port.

Add binary send command to end of script nsend . The Health Script menu provides commands that can be used to define the health “script.Add binary expect command to end of script nexpect .Add open command to end of script send .Remove last command from script del .Add send command to end of script bsend . Using one or more nsend commands allows you to generate a binary content of more than 256 bytes in length. bsend <hex string> Sends a binary request string in hexadecimal format for the request packet through an open TCP or UDP port to the server. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 423 .Display current script configuration Table 7-41 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage open <real port or name (such as: http)> <tcp|udp> Opens a TCP connection or specifies a UDP port for the health check.Delete script cur . the users can define their own health checks of varied complexity. and the port number. So both TCP and UDP services can be health-checked.0.2 Command Reference / c f g / s l b / a d v h c / s c r i p t <health script number> Scriptable Health Checks Configuration Scriptable health checks provide a robust and extensible way to health check a group of real servers.0.Add depth command to end of script wait .Add additional send binary string to end of script expect . send <text string (TCP). The ASCII and binary-based scripts control how a group of real servers are healthchecked.” The total number of characters cannot exceed 6144 bytes. [Health Script 1 Menu] open . 315393-J. hex string (UDP)> Sends an ASCII request string through an open TCP or UDP port to the server.Add expect command to end of script bexpect . nsend <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the packet generated by the bsend command. With these health checks.Add wait command to end of script close . You need to specify the protocol (TCP or UDP). The Alteon OS 22.Add additional expect binary string to end of script offset .2 allows a maximum of 256 bytes to be entered.Alteon OS 22.Add close command to end of script (TCP only) rem . Up to 32 scripts can be configured.Add offset command to end of script depth .

If the expected response is received within the wait window. nexpect <additional hex string (UDP)> Allows you to append additional content to the original content of the response packet specified by the bexpect command. rem Removes the last entered line from the script. bexpect <hex string> Allows you to configure binary content request string (in hexadecimal format) that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port. The wait window is set in the units of milli-seconds.2 Command Reference Table 7-41 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage expect <text string (TCP). the server does not pass the expect step and the health check fails. otherwise the health check fails. The wait command should follow the offset and depth commands in the script. hex string (UDP)> Allows you to configure an ASCII request string that you can search in each server response packet for successful health check on an open TCP port. offset <offset. or beginning from offset if offset was specified. The wait window starts when the request is sent from the switch. cur Lists the current script configuration.0. depth <depth. del Deletes the current script. 1-1464> Allows you to specify the depth (the window) in bytes beginning from the start of the UDP data area. 1-1464> Allows you to specify the offset from the beginning of the UDP data area to start matching the content specified in the expect command.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . wait <wait window in milliseconds (1-65535)> Allows the user to configure a wait window for the expected response. If you do not see this string in any response packet before the health check interval or the configured wait window expires. to search for the bexpect content. close Closes TCP connection. If you need to specify offset. 424 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. the health check passes. you must do it after executing the bexpect command.

Community string used in the SNMP request packet rcvcnt .7.1. When the invert option is enabled.1.Alteon OS 22.0 max 30 sub-identifiers> Specify the Object Identifier (OID) to be sent in the SNMP GET request packet.1872. the health check fails if the response packet contains the value specified in the receive content (rcvnt) field. cur Displays the current SNMP Health Check configuration. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 425 .Delete SNMP health check cur . an OID is of the form 1.3.3.1.6.2.1.0. the real server weights are dynamically adjusted based on SNMP health check response.2. 315393-J.OID to be sent in the SNMP request packet comm .4.5.11.Enable/disable readjusting of weights based on response del . 1. The format of the OID depends on the MIB file.1. maximum 32 characters> Enter the community string used in the SNMP get request packet.Display current SNMP health check configuration Table 7-42 SNMP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/snmphc) Command Syntax and Usage oid <object identifier. invert disable|enable Enables or disables the inversion of the expected value.6.1.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/snmphc SNMP Health Check Configuration [SNMP Health Check 1 Menu] oid . rcvcnt <expected content an integer value or a string> Enter the content the switch expects to receive from the SNMP agent on the real server. comm <community string.Enable/disable inversion of expected value weight . such as.Expected value in the SNMP response packet invert . The default community string is public. del Deletes the current SNMP health check. weight disable|enable When enabled. for example.

Alteon OS 22. The default port number is 9200. For further details. see page 429.WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu wspport .Enable/disable coupling with RADIUS Accounting Service cur . and the switch verifies the expected response.Display current WAP health check configuration Table 7-43 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wspcnt Displays WSP Health Check Content Menu.WTLS+WSP port number to health check wtlsprt .WSP Health Check Content Menu wtpcnt . January 2005 . see page 428. WTP+WSP.0. To view menu options.WSP port number to health check wtpport . wspport <wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WSP health checks will be performed. [WAP Health Check Menu] wspcnt .WTP port number to health check wtlswsp . deployed on WAP gateways/ servers. Connectionless WSP runs on UDP/IP protocol. Alteon OS provides a content-based health check mechanism where customized WSP packets are sent to the WAP gateways. wtpport <wtp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTP port number to health check. WTLS+WSP. WTLS+WTP+WSP). To view menu options. wtpcnt Displays WTP and WSP Health Check Content Menu. WSP content health checks can be configured in two modes: connectionless and connectionoriented.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc WAP Health Check Configuration Wireless Session Protocol (WSP) is used within the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) suite to manage sessions between wireless devices and WAP content servers or WAP gateways. in a manner similar to scriptable health checks. The default port number is 9201. 426 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. Alteon OS allows you to configure three WAP gateway health check types for all four WAP services (WSP. refer to the Application Guide.WTLS port number to health check couple . Application switches can be used to load balance the gateways in both modes of operation. ports 9200 and 9202 and connectionoriented (WTP) traffic runs on ports 9201 and 9203.

WTLS+WTP+WSP) with Radius Accounting Service. If the health check to any one of the four WAP services or Radius Accounting Service fails. couple disable|enable Enables or disables coupling together of all the four WAP services (WSP. 315393-J. WTP+WSP. cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration.2 Command Reference Table 7-43 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wtlswsp <wtls+wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTLS (Wireless Transport Layer Security) and WSP port number to health check.0. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 427 . The connection-oriented WTLS traffic uses default port 9203.Alteon OS 22. WTLS+WSP. The connectionless encrypted WTLS traffic uses default port 9202. wtlsprt <port number (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WTLS health checks will be performed. then all of the four WAP services and Radius Accounting Service are disabled.

Content to be sent to the WAP gateway rcvcnt .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt WSP Content Health Check [WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset . sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a connectionless WSP request to a WSP gateway. 428 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Display current WSP health check content configuration Table 7-44 WSP Content Health Check Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <Offset in the received WSP packet (0-512)> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packages. cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration. January 2005 . An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of the content of the received packet.Offset in received WSP packet sndcnt . This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway.Content to be received from the WAP gateway cur .Alteon OS 22.0. rcvcnt <receive content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway.

315393-J.CONNECT PDU to be sent to the sndcnt . This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway. The offset value is the number of bytes from the beginning of the WSP PDU.0.Display current WTP+WSP health WAP gateway gateway the WAP gateway check content configuration Table 7-45 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/ waphc/wtpcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <offset in the received WSP PDU> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packets.GET PDU to be sent to the WAP rcvcnt . cur Displays current WTP+WSP health check content configuration.Alteon OS 22. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of WSP PDU of the received packet. sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a WSP request to a WSP gateway. rcvcnt <receive content as a hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway. at which the comparison begins to match with the expected receive content. [WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset .REPLY PDU to be received from cur .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wtpcnt WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu This menu is used for configuring the health check for connection-oriented unencrypted WAP traffic.Offset in received WSP PDU connect . connect <connect content as hexstring> Enter the content for the first switch-generated WSP session packet. This command allows you to customize the headers in the connect message. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 429 .

This command also allows you to remove all ports or VLANs assigned to any proxy IP address.Display current Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-46 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/pip) Command Syntax and Usage type <port|vlan> Defines the base type of the proxy IP address. whether it is port-based or VLAN-based. add <IP address> <port number|vlan number>|<port number-port number|vlan number-vlan number> Allows you to add either a port or a VLAN to a proxy IP address.Set base type of Proxy IP address add . [Proxy IP Address Menu] type . cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration. 430 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J.Remove port or VLAN from Proxy IP address cur .Add port or VLAN to Proxy IP address rem .Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/pip Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu You need to enable proxy IP address processing on the port to use this command. You can configure up to 32 proxy IP addresses on per port or per VLAN basis. January 2005 . rem <<PIP ID> <port#|vlan#>|<port#-port#|vlan#-vlan#>> Allows you to remove a port or a VLAN from a proxy IP address. You can configure multiple proxy IP addresses based on either port or VLAN.

cur Displays the current proxy address configuration of the peer.Display current peer Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-47 Peer Proxy IP Address Menu Options (/cfg/slb/peerpip) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> Allows you to add a proxy IP address to the server load balancing peer. using Layer 2. 315393-J.Rem peer Proxy IP address cur . rem <IP address> Allows you to remove a proxy IP address from the server load balancing peer. the switch is able to forward traffic from the other switch.Add peer Proxy IP address rem .2 Command Reference /cfg/slb/peerpip SLB Peer Proxy IP Address Menu When this command is enabled.Alteon OS 22. [Peer Proxy IP Address Menu] add . This happens because the peer switches are aware of each other’s proxy IP addresses. without performing server processing on the packets of the other switch. This prevents the dropping of a packet or being sent to the backup switch in the absence of the proxy IP address of the peer switch. January 2005 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 431 .0.

0.2 Command Reference 432 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-J. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22.

Change current user password clrlog .Operational Port Menu slb . January 2005 433 . /oper Operations Menu [Operations Menu] port .Operational Bandwidth Management Menu ip . For example.Enter software feature to be removed passwd .Operational IP Menu swkey . 315393-J. but do not alter permanent switch configurations.Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu bwm .Operational Server Load Balancing Menu vrrp .CHAPTER 8 The Operations Menu The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately. the port returns to its normally configured operation.Enter key to enable software feature rmkey . with the understanding that when the switch is reset. you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change). Port Mirroring menu options are accessible only to the Alteon AD4 and Alteon 184 WebSwitches.Send NTP request The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration.Clear syslog messages ntpreq .

January 2005 . slb Displays the Operational Layer 4 Menu. To view menu options.0. To view menu options. For details. To view menu options. swkey <16-hexadecimal digit key to enable software feature> Sets key to enable software feature. To view menu options. ip Displays the IP Operations Menu. see page 439. bwm Operational Bandwidth Management Menu. passwd <15 char max> Allows the user to change the password. 434 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. see page 442. see page 435. For details. see page 439. vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu. To view menu options. the Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu. see page 439. see page 441. clrlog Clears all syslog messages. see page 436. You need to enter the current password in use for validation. ntpreq Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server.2 Command Reference Table 8-1 Operations Menu Options (/oper) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Operational Port Menu.Alteon OS 22. which has one sub-menu/option. rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSL|BWM|Security)> Defines software feature to be removed.

ena Temporarily enables the port.0. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. cur Displays the current settings for the port.Enable port dis . and for changing Remote Monitoring (RMON) status on a port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. dis Temporarily disables the port.Disable port cur .Current port state Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port.Enable/Disable RMON for port ena .Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /oper/port <port number> Operations-Level Port Options [Operations Port 1 Menu] rmon . The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 435 . 315393-J. Table 8-2 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Temporarily enables/disables Remote Monitoring on the port.

see page 438. To view menu options.Global SLB Operations Menu sync . gslb Displays Global SLB Operations Menu. filter.2 Command Reference /oper/slb Operations-Level SLB Options [Server Load Balancing Operations Menu] group . Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the Real Server Group Menu. VRRP and other configurations on peers ena . The real server will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.Real Server Group Menu gslb .Alteon OS 22. January 2005 . 436 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J.Synchronize SLB. Bandwidth Management configuration. To take effect.0. ena <real server number (1-1023)> Temporarily enables a real server. the operations-level Server Load Balancing options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling real servers and synchronizing the configuration between the active/active switches.Clear session table cur . port. and VR priorities on a peer switch (a switch that owns the IP address).Disable real server clear . peers must be configured on the Alteon Application Switch and the administrator password on the switch must be identical. sync Synchronizes the SLB. see page 437. VRRP.Current layer 4 operational state When the optional Layer 4 software is enabled. To view menu options.Enable real server dis .

0 sessions) by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server Using the n (none) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server The real server will be returned to its configured state after a switch reset. cur Displays the current SLB operational state.Disable real server in this group cur .Current server group operational state Table 8-4 Real Server Group Operations Options (oper/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage ena <real server number (1-1023)> Enables real server in this group. dis <real server number (1-1023)> Disables real server in this group. 1-1023> [P . NOTE – This command provides for orderly server shutdown to allow maintenance on a server. January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 437 . see “Disabling and Enabling Real Servers” in the Alteon OS 22. For more information.0 sessions] p|n The disable command is used to temporarily disable real servers as follows: Using the p (persistent) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server (except for persistent http 1.0.Enable real server in this group dis .0. cur Displays current operational state of the server group.Alteon OS 22. /oper/slb/group Real Server Group Operations [Real server group 1 Menu] ena .allow persistent http 1. clear Clears all session tables and allows port filter changes to take effect immediately. 315393-J.2 Application Guide.2 Command Reference Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dis <real server number. NOTE – This command disrupts current SLB and Application Redirection sessions.

Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference /oper/slb/gslb Global SLB Operations Menu [Global SLB Operations Menu] query . 438 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J.0. January 2005 .Query Global SLB selection Table 8-5 Global SLB Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage query Allows you to query the Global site selection.

When this command is executed. the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest). January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 439 .Send BW History to SMTP server Table 8-7 Bandwidth Operations Menu Options (/oper/bwm/sndhist) Command Syntax and Usage sndhist Sends the bandwidth history to a system administrator specified under /cfg/bwm/user (see page 279).2 Command Reference /oper/vrrp Operations-Level VRRP Options.0. /oper/bwm Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options [Bandwidth Management Operations Menu] sndhist .Alteon OS 22.Set virtual router to backup Table 8-6 Virtual Router Redundancy Operations Menu Options (/oper/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage back <virtual router number (1-256)> Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode. 315393-J. There are no other virtual routers available to take master control. After the new election. This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure. [VRRP Operations Menu] back . the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases: This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same) This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled.

Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu Table 8-8 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu.0. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. To view the menu options see page 440. /oper/ip/bgp Operations-Level BGP Options [Border Gateway start stop cur Protocol Operations Menu] Start peer session Stop peer session Current BGP operational state Table 8-9 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage start <peer number (1-16)> Starts the peer session.2 Command Reference /oper/ip Operations-Level IP Options [IP Operations Menu] bgp . stop <peer number (1-16)> Stops the peer session. 440 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J. cur Displays the current BGP operational state.

January 2005 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 441 . Once you have your License Password. Nortel Networks will then provide a License Password. you must register each License Certificate with Nortel Networks and provide the MAC address of the Alteon OS switch that will run the optional software. 2. enter: Operations# swkey 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. Before you can activate optional software. At the Main# prompt. Currently the following software packages are available for purchase and installation: Security Pack Bandwidth Management Global Server Load Balancing To obtain a software key. enter: Main# oper 3. One software license is needed for each switch where the optional software is to be used. Connect to the switch’s command line interface and log in as the administrator (see Chapter 1. you must obtain a software license from your Nortel Networks representative or authorized reseller. perform the following actions: 1.2 Command Reference /oper/swkey Activating Optional Software The swkey option is used for activating any optional software you have purchased for your switch. You will receive a Licence Certificate for each software license purchased. “The Command Line Interface”). At the Operations# prompt.0. NOTE – Each License Password will work only on the specific switch which has the MAC address you provided when registering your Licence Certificate.

enter the code for software to be removed. To deactivate optional software. enter your 16-digit software key code. /oper/rmkey Removing Optional Software The rmkey option is used for deactivating any optional software. For example: Enter Software Key: <16 hexadecimal-digit key to enable software feature (such as. enter the following at the Operations Menu: Operations# rmkey When prompted.Alteon OS 22. you will see the following message: Valid software key entered.0. When prompted. Software feature enabled. January 2005 . Deactivated software is still present in switch memory and can be reactivated at any later time. 123456789ABCDEF)> If the correct code is entered. For example: Enter Software Feature to be removed:[GSLB]||BWM|Security: GSLB 442 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-J.2 Command Reference 4.

you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. January 2005 443 . 315393-J.Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree] .Select config block to use on next boot .Scheduled Switch Reset Menu .Select software image to use on next boot .Upload selected software image via TFTP . The Boot Options Menu provides options for: Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via TFTP /boot Boot Menu [Boot Options sched image conf gtimg ptimg reset cur Menu] .Display current boot options Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.Download new software image via TFTP .CHAPTER 9 The Boot Options Menu To use the Boot Options Menu.

You can set the reboot time.Set switch reset time cancel . or boot. image2. as well as boot software. This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during off-peak hours. you would probably load the new image software into image2. called image1 and image2. A version of the image ships with the switch.Alteon OS 22. For example.2 Command Reference Scheduled Reboot of the Switch This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in future. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1). When you download new software.0. As new versions of the image are released. you can upgrade the software running on your switch. you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1. 444 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J. if your active image is currently loaded into image1. and check the time of the currently set reboot schedule with the help of the following sub-menu: /boot/sched Scheduled Reboot Menu [Boot Schedule Menu] set . if needed.Cancel pending switch reset cur . called boot. cancel a previously scheduled reboot. January 2005 . and comes pre-installed on the device. Upgrading the software image on your switch requires the following: Loading the new image onto a TFTP server on your network Downloading the new image from the TFTP server to your switch Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset Downloading New Software to Your Switch The switch can store up to two different software images.Display current switch reset schedule Updating the Switch Software Image The switch software image is the executable code running on the Alteon Application Switch.

However.0. Enter the hostname or IP address of the TFTP server. Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced: Enter name of switch software image to be replaced ["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image> 3. See “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 331). This sets the default option for the gtimg and ptimg commands.2 Command Reference To download a new software to your switch. Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> The exact form of the name will vary by TFTP server. the file location is normally relative to the TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot). use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch. However. enter: Boot Options# gtimg 2. January 2005 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 445 . The system prompts you to confirm your request. 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. When the above requirements are met. NOTE – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. you will need the following: The image or boot software loaded on a TFTP server on your network The hostname or IP address of the TFTP server The name of the new software image or boot file Setup the TFTP option (/cfg/sys/mgmt/tftp) for the TFTP connection. Enter the name of the new software file on the server. Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4. At the Boot Options# prompt. 1. as described below. You should next select a software image to run. 5. note that you can override this setting with the option provided to these operational commands.

1. enter: Boot Options# image 2. and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset. At the Boot Options# prompt. January 2005 . Enter the desired image: Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded ["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr> <server-file- name> 3. enter: Boot Options# ptimg 2. 1. Enter the name or the IP address of the TFTP server: Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4.2 Command Reference Selecting a Software Image to Run You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot.0.Alteon OS 22. The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset. Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the TFTP server: Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> 446 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J. Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot. Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]: Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch You can upload a software image from the switch to a TFTP server. At the Boot Options# prompt. The system prompts you for information.

This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your Alteon Application Switch was manufactured. At the Boot Options# prompt. January 2005 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 447 . The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block. When you perform the save command. enter: Boot Options# conf 2. you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset: 1. your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block. Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use: The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset.7 Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test" on TFTP server 192. it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default.2 Command Reference 5. The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered. To have the file uploaded.0. Under certain circumstances. Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y Selecting a Configuration Block When you make configuration changes to the Alteon Application Switch.1. This can be useful when a custom-configured Alteon Application Switch is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a different purpose.2.1.1. enter Y. Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]: 315393-J.0. and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset. image2 currently contains Software Version 20. There is also a factory configuration block.Alteon OS 22.

2 Command Reference Resetting the Switch You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur. at the Boot Options# prompt. NOTE – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Protocol to restart. This process can be lengthy. To reset the switch. depending on the topology of your network. 448 Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-J.0. January 2005 .Alteon OS 22. enter: >> Boot Options# reset You are prompted to confirm your request.

Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu arp . The switch administrator enters the switch reset key combination on a device that is attached to the console port. It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting. causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory. The panic option.Uuencode FLASH dump ptdmp .Debugging Menu uudmp . The switch reset key combination is <Shift><Ctrl><->.Clear FLASH dump lsdmp . found in the Maintenance Menu. 315393-J.CHAPTER 10 The Maintenance Menu The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information.IP Route Manipulation Menu debug .System Maintenance Menu fdb .tftp put FLASH dump to tftp server cldmp .Dump state information to FLASH and reboot tsdmp .Tech support dump Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch after any one of the following occurs: The switch administrator forces a switch panic. January 2005 449 . and then causes the switch to reboot. [Maintenance Menu] sys . /maint Maintenance Menu NOTE – To use the Maintenance Menu.ARP Cache Manipulation Menu route . you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.List FLASH dump panic .

see page 451. ptdmp hostname filename [-mgmt| -data] Saves the system dump information via TFTP. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes.2 Command Reference The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. see page 454. lsdmp Displays list flash dump. see page 456. For details. To view menu options. To view menu options. panic Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots. For details. and send it to Nortel Networks Tech Support for debugging purposes. see page 456. see page 455. uudmp Displays dump information in uuencoded format. For details. For details.Alteon OS 22. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. To view menu options. arp Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu. Table 10-1 Maintenance Menu Options (/maint) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Maintenance Menu. To view menu options. 450 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-J. To view menu options. tsdmp Dumps all Alteon Application Switch information. see page 457.You can log the tsdump output into a file. and configuration. cldmp Clears dump information from flash memory. statistics. see page 457. see page 452. see page 451. route Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu.0. debug Displays the Debugging Menu. January 2005 . The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot.

[System Maintenance Menu] flags . 315393-J.Set NVRAM flag word Table 10-2 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys) Command Syntax and Usage flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX> This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group.Show FDB entries referenced by a single port dump .Clear entire FDB The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database.Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port .Show all FDB entries del .Show FDB entries for a single port trunk .Delete an FDB entry clear .Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan . This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions.2 Command Reference /maint/sys System Maintenance Options This menu is reserved for use by Nortel Networks Customer Support group. /maint/fdb Forwarding Database Options [FDB Manipulation Menu] find . January 2005 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 451 .Show FDB entries for a single VLAN refpt . The options are used to perform system debugging.0.Alteon OS 22.

trunk <trunk number (1-12)> Displays all FDB entries for the specified trunk group. /maint/arp ARP Cache Options [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find .Show all ARP entries clear .2 Command Reference Table 10-3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump .Clear ARP cache addr . see page 79.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port . January 2005 .Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt . Use “0” for unknown port number.Alteon OS 22. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays all FDB entries reference by a single port. Enter the MAC address using the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format (such as 08:00:20:12:34:56) or xxxxxxxxxxxx format (such as 080020123456). For details. port <port number.0. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. del <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Removes a single FDB entry. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan .Show ARP address list 452 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-J. 0 for unknown>> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory.

1 00:e0:16:7c:28:82 1 1 empty 47.80. addr Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests.2 Command Reference Table 10-4 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as.16. you can also refer to “ARP Information” on page 93. port.80. dump).17.101)> Shows a single ARP entry by IP address. dump Shows all ARP entries. /maint/arp/port <port number> ARP Entries on a Single Port IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.4. refpt.16.----.17.----------------. port <port number> Displays ARP entries on a single port. vlan.81 00:e0:81:24:ef:3c 1 1 empty 47.--------------47. See page 453 for a sample output. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN.80. clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory.169 00:04:75:db:1c:1a 1 1 empty NOTE – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch.Alteon OS 22.0. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Shows all ARP entries referenced by a single port.----. 192.---. 315393-J. January 2005 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 453 . or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above (find.

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/route IP Route Manipulation
[IP Routing Menu] find - Show a single route by destination IP address gw - Show routes to a single gateway type - Show routes of a single type tag - Show routes of a single tag if - Show routes on a single interface dump - Show all routes clear - Clear route table

Table 10-5 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Shows a single route by destination IP address. gw <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44)> Shows routes to a default gateway. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-19 on page 92 tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Shows routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing tags, see Table 4-20 on page 93 if <interface number (1-256)> Shows routes on a single interface. dump Shows all routes. clear Clears the route table from switch memory.

NOTE – To display all routes, you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 92.

454

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/debug Debugging Options
[Miscellaneous Debug Menu] tbuf - Show MP trace buffer sptb - Show SP trace buffer spall - Show All SPs trace buffers clrcfg - Clear all flash configs vmasp - Show designated SP for IP address

The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation. You can view the following information using the debug menu: Events traced by the Management Processor (MP) Events traced by the Switch Processor (SP) Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs If the switch resets for any reason, the MP trace buffer and SP trace buffers are saved into the snap trace buffer area. The output from these commands can be interpreted by the Nortel Networks Customer Support division. Table 10-6 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug)
Command Syntax and Usage tbuf Displays the Management Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25, 2001; mask: 0x2ffdf748 The buffer information is displayed after the header. sptb <port number (1-4)> Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008 The buffer information is displayed after the header. spall Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30, 2002; mask: 0x00800008. The buffer information is displayed after the header. Displays all SP trace buffers. clrcfg Deletes all flash configuration blocks. vmasp <IP address> Displays the assigned SP (Switch Processor) for this IP address.

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

455

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/uudmp Uuencode Flash Dump
Using this command, dump information is presented in uuencoded format. This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters. You can then contact Nortel Networks Customer Support for help analyzing the information. If you want to capture dump information to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command. This will ensure that you do not lose any information. Once entered, the uudmp command will cause approximately 23,300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file. Using the uudmp command, dump information can be read multiple times. The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory. NOTE – Dump information is not cleared automatically. In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory, you must manually clear the dump region. For more information on clearing the dump region, see page 457. To access dump information, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# uudmp

The dump information is displayed on your screen and, if you have configured your communication software to do so, captured to a file. If the dump region is empty, the following appears:
No FLASH dump available.

/maint/ptdmp <server> <filename> TFTP System Dump Put
Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a TFTP server. NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command, and must be writable (set with proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data. To save dump information via TFTP, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# ptdmp <server> <filename> [-mgmt| -data]

Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the target dump file.
456 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

/maint/cldmp Clearing Dump Information
To clear dump information from flash memory, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# cldmp

The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message:
FLASH dump region cleared.

If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message:
FLASH dump region is already clear.

/maint/panic Panic Command
The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and automatically reboot. To select panic, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
>> Maintenance# panic A FLASH dump already exists. Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]:

Enter y to confirm the command:
Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y

The following messages are displayed:
Loading Image:.......... Alteon Application Switch 2424 Rebooted because of Software PANIC. Booting complete 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003: Version 20.2.7 from FLASH image1, active config block. Jan 9 19:15:32 NOTICE system: link up on port 25 Enter password:

315393-J, January 2005

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

457

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

Unscheduled System Dumps
If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch:
Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved at 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003. Use /maint/uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved.

458

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu

315393-J, January 2005

APPENDIX A

Alteon OS Syslog Messages
The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages: <Time stamp><Log Label>Web OS<Thread ID>:<Message> where <Timestamp> The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour:minute:second format. For example: Aug 19 14:20:30 <Log Label> The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_EMERG, LOG_ALERT, LOG_CRIT, LOG_ERR, LOG_WARNING, LOG_NOTICE, LOG_INFO, and LOG_DEBUG <Thread ID> This is the software thread that reports the log message. The following thread IDs are recorded: stp, ip, slb, console, telnet, vrrp, system, web server, ssh, and bgp <Message>: The log message Following is a list of potential syslog messages. To keep this list as short as possible, only <Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>. Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt, one of the following may be shown: console, telnet, web server, or ssh.

LOG_WARNING
FILTER “filter <filter number> fired on port <port number>, <source IP address> -> <destination IP address>, [<ICMP type>], [<IP protocol>], [<layer-4 ports>], [<TCP f1ags>]”
ntp: ntp cannot contact primary NTP server <ip_address> cannot contact secondary NTP server <ip_address>

315393-J, January 2005

459

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_ALERT
stp: IP vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: gslb: gslb: gslb: gslb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: bgp: vrrp: vrrp: dps: dps: syn_atk tcplim own BPDU received from port <port_id> cannot contact default gateway <ip_address> received errored advertisement from <ip_address> received incorrect password from <ip_address> received incorrect addresses from <ip_address> received incorrect advertisement interval <seconds> from <ip_address> cannot contact real server <ip_address> real server <ip_address> has reached maximum connections received update from <ip_address> for unknown remote server <ip_address> received update from <ip_address> for unknown virtual service received update for unknown remote server <ip_address> from <ip_address> received update for unknown service <ip_address:service> cannot contact real service <ip_address:real_port> real server failure threshold (<threshold>) has been reach for group <group_id> real server <ip_address> disabled through configuration Virtual Service Pool full. gSvcPool=MAX_SERVICES notification (<reason>) received from <BGP peer ip_address> session with <BGP peer ip_address> failed (<reason>) Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> was blocked hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes manual hold down: <ip_address> SYN attack detected: <count> new half-open sessions per second hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes

460

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

315393-J, January 2005

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_CRIT
SYSTEM: temperature at sensor <sensor_id> exceeded threshold SYSTEM: internal power supply failed SYSTEM: redundant power supply failed SYSTEM: fan failure detected SSH can't allocate memory in load_MP_INT

LOG_ERR
mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ntp: isd: stp: stp: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: PANIC at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> VERIFY at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> ASSERT at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> unable to listen to NTP port unable to listen to BOOTP_SERVER_PORT port Error: Error writing STG config to FLASH Error: Error writing config to FLASH Apply not done Save not done “<““apply””|““save””> is issued by another user. Try later” Error: Error writing %s config to FLASH New Path Cost for Port <port_id> is invalid PVID <vlan_id> for port <port_id> is not created RADIUS secret must be 1-32 characters long Please configure primary RADIUS server address STP changes can't be applied since STP is OFF Switch reset is required to turn STP on/off Trunk group <trunk_id> contains ports with different PVIDs Trunk group <trunk_id> has more than <max_trunk_ports> ports

315393-J, January 2005

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

461

Alteon OS 22.0.2 Command Reference

LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli: cli: cli: Trunk group <trunk_id> contains no ports but is enabled Not all ports in trunk group <trunk_id> are in VLAN <vlan_id> Trunk groups <trunk_id> and <trunk_id> can not share the same port

port_mirr: Port Mirroring changes are not applied cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Broadcast address for IP interface <interface_id> is invalid IP Interfaces <interface_id> and <interface_id> are on the same subnet Multiple static routes have same destination Virtual router <vr_id> must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must have preemption enabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router <vr_id> must have an IP address Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same VRID and VLAN as <vlan_id> Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same IP address as <ip_address> Virtual router <vr_id> corresponding virtual server <server_id> is not enabled Hot-standby must be enabled when a virtual router has a PIP address Virtual router <vr_id> IP interface should be <interface_id> Enabled real server <server_id> has no IP address Real server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Real server <server_id> (Backup for <server_id>) is not enabled Real server <server_id> has same IP address as virtual server <server_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as real server <server_id> Real server group <group_id> cannot backup itself Real server <server_id> cannot be added to same group Enabled virtual server <server_id> has no IP address

462

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages

315393-J, January 2005

ports 1-8 must all have a PIP if any one does” Client bindings are not supported with proxy IP addresses DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtual server to support FTP parsing Real server <server_id> and group %u cannot both have backups configured Virtual server <server_id> : port mapping but layer3 bindings Extracting length has to set to 8 or 16 for cookie rewrite mode DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtural server <server_id> to support URL parsing Port filtering must be disabled on port <port_id> in order to support cookie based persistence for virtual server <server_id> Virtual server <server_id>: port mapping but Direct Access Mode Virtual server %lu: support nonat IP but not layer 3 bindings Virtual servers: all that support IP must use same group Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> that include the same real server <server_id> cannot map the same real port or balance UDP Virtual server <server_id>: UDP service <virtual_port> with out-of-range port number 315393-J.0.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> with same IP address must support same layr3 configuration Real server <server_id> cannot be backup server for both real server <server_id> and group <group_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address and vport as virtual server <server_id> RS <server_id> can't exist for VS <server_id> vport <virtual_port> Switch port <port_id> has same proxy IP address as port <port_id> Switch port <port_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> A hot-standby port cannot also be an inter-switch port There must be at least one inter-switch port if any hot-standby port exist “With VMA. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 463 .Alteon OS 22.

0.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Switch cannot support more than <MAX_VIRT_SERVICES> virtual services Switch cannot support more than <MAX_SMT> real services Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must have same L4 config Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must all have a PIP DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for ports <port_id> in order to do URL based redirection “Two services have same hostname. <host_name>. January 2005 . Web server must be moved from TCP port 80” Remote site <site_id> does not have a primary IP address Primary and secondary remote site <site_id> switches must differ Remote sites <site_id> and <site_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and real server <server_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and virtual server <server_id> must use different addresses Only <MAX_SLB_SITES> remote servers are allowed per group Only <MAX_SLB_SERVICES> remote services are supported Enabled external lookup IP address has no IP address domain name must be configured 464 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J.<domain_name>” Direct access mode is not supported with default gateway load balancing SLB Radius secret must be 16 characters long Dynamic NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> must have same smask and dmask NAT filter <filter_id> cannot have port ranges NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes VIP <server_id> NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes RIP <server_id> Redirection filter <filter_id> must be cached Filter with L4 ports configured <port_id> must have IP protocol configured “For Global SLB.

2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Network <static_network_id> has no VIP address duplicate default entry BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> must have an IP address BGP peers <bgp_peer_id> and <bgp_peer_id> have same address BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> have same address as IP interface <ip_interface_id> BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> IP interface <ip_interface_id> is not enabled Filter with ICMP types configured (<icmp_type>) must have IP protocol configure to ICMP “Two services have same hostname.Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 465 . <host_name>.<domain_name>” Loadbalance string must be added to real server <server_id> in order to enable exclusionary string matching intrval input value must be in the range [0-24] unapplied changes reverted unsaved changes reverted Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output cfg_sync_tx_putsn: ABORTED Synchronization TX Error Synchronization TX connection RESET Synchronization TX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization TX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization TX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization RX connection RESET Synchronization RX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization RX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization RX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization connection RCLOSE by peer Synchronization connection RCLOSE before RX 315393-J.0.

Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Synchronization connection early RCLOSE in RX Synchronization connection Wait-For-Close Timeout Synchronization connection Transmit Timeout Synchronization Receive Timeout Synchronization Receive UNKNOWN Timeout Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync Sync receive in progress … cannot start Sync Sync already in progress … cannot start Sync Config Sync route find error Config Sync tcp_open error Config Synchronization Timeout .0.peer:%s config:%s Sync Password Failed-Bad Password Sync receive already in progress … cannot start Sync receive Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync receive 466 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J. Try later” new configuration did not validate (rc = ) new configuration did not apply (rc = ) new configuration did not save (rc = ) Sync config apply error Restoring Current Config Sync rx tcp open error Sync Version/Password Failed-No Version/Password Line Sync Version Failed .Resuming Console thread “<""apply""|""save""> is issued by another user. January 2005 .

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 467 .2 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE system: system: system: system: system: system: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: internal power supply ok redundant power supply present and ok temperature ok fan ok rebooted <last_reset_information> rebooted <last_reset_information> administrator logged in boot config block changed boot image changed switch reset from CLI syslog host changed to <ip_address> syslog host changed to this host second syslog host changed to <ip_address> second syslog host changed to this host Next boot will use active config block user password changed SLB operator password changed L4 operator password changed operator password changed SLB administrator password changed L4 administrator password changed administrator password changed scp <login_level> login “scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">” RADIUS server timeouts Failed login attempt via TELNET from host %s PASSWORD FIX-UP MODE IN USE <login_level> login on Console 315393-J.0.

0.Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE (Continued) mgmt: mgmt: “<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console” PANIC command from CLI port_mirr: “port mirroring is <""enabled""|""disabled"">” vlan: mgmt: mgmt: IP IP vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: Default VLAN can not be deleted <login_level> login from host <ip_address> “<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from” “default gateway <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled"">” default gateway <ip_address> operational virtual router <ip_address> is now master virtual router <ip_address> is now backup “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""diabled""> for real server <server_id>” “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “backup group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group group_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server <server_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “overflow group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” real server <ip_address> operational real service <ip_address:real_port> operational No services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> Services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> session established with <BGP_peer_ip_address> 468 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J. January 2005 .

" server key autogen starts server key autogen completes server key autogen timer timeouts new synch configuration applied new synch configuration saved Synchronizing from <host_name> Synchronizing to <host_name> Config Synchronization Transmit Successful Config Synchronization Receive Successful new configuration VALIDATED 315393-J.2 Command Reference LOG_INFO SYSTEM: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: ssh: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: bootp response from <ip_address> new configuration applied new configuration saved unsaved changes reverted Could not revert unsaved changes "<image1|image2> downloaded from host <ip_address>.0. January 2005 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 469 .Alteon OS 22. file <file_name> <software_version>" serial EEPROM downloaded from host <ip_address> file <file_name> scp <login_level> login "scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">" <login_level> login on Console "<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console" <login_level> login from host <ip_address> "<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Telnet/SSH.

Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .2 Command Reference 470 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-J.0.

mib aosSwitch.mib aosNetwork.mib aosBwm.mib -. IP. and Version 3.APPENDIX B Alteon OS SNMP Agent The Alteon OS SNMP agent supports SNMP Version 1. SNMP Groups) RFC 1573 . UDP. Version 2.mib aosTrap.mib aosPhysical. Detailed SNMP MIBs and trap definitions of the Alteon OS SNMP agent can be found in the following enterprise MIB documents: altroot.mib aosLayer4.EtherLike MIB RFC 1493 .MIB II Extension (IFX table) RFC 1643 .RMON MIB (Statistics.mib aosLayer7. TCP. Alarm. ICMP.SynOptics Registration MIB s5tcs112.mib -. Alteon MIBs are registered as Vendor 1872.Bridge MIB RFC 1757 . Event Groups) RFC 1850 for OSPF 471 315393-J.SynOptics Root MIB s5roo117. Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs: RFC 1213 . History.Ethernet Multi segment Autotopology MIB SNMPv1|v2|v3 traps can be sent to the hosts configured in targetAddr table.mib In addition. January 2005 .MIB II (System. Up to 16 IP addresses can be configured in targetAddr table. Address Translation.mib -.Textual Convention MIB s5emt104. the following SynOptics MIBS are also supported: synro193. Version 3 supports two authentication protocols: MD5 and SHA.mib -. Interface.

Community MIB Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC 1215: ColdStart WarmStart LinkDown LinkUp AuthenticationFailure The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493: NewRoot TopologyChange The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in Alteon OS: Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwDefGwUp altSwDefGwDown altSwDefGwInService altSwDefGwNotInService altSwSlbRealServerUp altSwSlbRealServerDown altSwSlbRealServerMaxConnReached Signifies that the default gateway is alive.3ad MIB for LACP The following SNMPv3 MIBs are supported: RFC 2571 . Signifies that the default gateway is up and in service Signifies that the default gateway is alive but not in service Signifies that the real server is up and operational Signifies that the real server is down and out of service Signifies that the real server has reached maximum connections 472 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-J. Signifies that the default gateway is down.USM MIB RFC 2575 .Alteon OS 22. January 2005 .MPD MIB RFC 2573 .Target MIB RFC 2574 .VACM MIB RFC 2576 .2 Command Reference RFC 1657 for BGP IEEE 802.0.SNMP Frame work RFC 2572 .

altSwTempExceedThreshold 315393-J.Alteon OS 22. A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has been received from a router whose authentication key or authentication type conflicts with this router's authentication key or authentication type. An altSwLoginFailure trap signifies that someone failed to enter a valid username/password combination. Implementation of this trap is optional. The newBackup trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Backup' state. An altSwTcpHoldDown trap signifies that new TCP connection requests from a particular client will be blocked for a pre-determined amount of time since the rate of new TCP connections from that client has reached a pre-determined threshold. An altSwTempExceedThreshold trap signifies that the switch temperature has exceeded maximum safety limits. altSwVrrpAuthFailure altSwLoginFailure altSwSlbSynAttack altSwTcpHoldDown An altSwSlbSynAttack trap signifies that a SYN attack has been detected. January 2005 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 473 .0.2 Command Reference Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwSlbBkupRealServerAct altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeact altSwSlbBkupRealServerActOverflow altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeactOverflow altSwfltFilterFired altSwSlbRealServerServiceUp altSwSlbRealServerServiceDown altSwVrrpNewMaster altSwVrrpNewBackup Signifies that the backup real server is activated due to availablity of the primary real server Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is available Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is overflowed Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is out from overflow situation Signifies that the packet received on a switch port matches the filter rule Signifies that the service port of the real server is up and operational Signifies that the service port of the real server is down and out of service The newMaster trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Master' state.

January 2005 . An altSwFanFailure trap signifies that a fan failure has occured.0.Alteon OS 22. altSwSlbSessAttack altSwFanFailure 474 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-J.2 Command Reference Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description An altSwSlbSessAttack trap signifies that an SLB attack has been detected.

Hold the <Shift> key down and hit D repeatedly until the following message appears: Alteon Application Switch . 1.APPENDIX C Performing a Serial Download You can perform a serial download of the new Alteon Application Switch software if you are upgrading Alteon OS directly from any image. January 2005 475 . Using the serial cable. Start hyper terminal (part of Microsoft Windows) and set the following parameters: Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None 3. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 315393-J. Power on the switch. 2. connect the Console port of an Alteon Application Switch to the serial port of your PC that supports XModem/1K XModem.PPCBoot 2. This procedure requires the following: A computer running terminal emulation software A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics) A binary switch firmware image (not the tftp file used for TFTP download) Use the following procedure to perform a serial upgrade. 4.2.

To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total bytes transferred: 0x4ff400 Extracting images. When the Console Port is successfully communicating with the PC. This file can be downloaded from the CD that is shipped with the switch. Do *NOT* power cycle the switch Updating flash. you will see: CCCC. the switch will be inoperable. wait for a few seconds and power the switch on. "21. otherwise. 8...0_Serial..0.img" (Or the file previously downloaded to the computer) 7.2 Command Reference 5. The switch will boot with the new software load. January 2005 . 6.0. Reconfigure your terminal emulation software with the following parameters (only after you see the message displayed in step 4): Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 115200 8 None 1 None NOTE – You can perform serial downloads at 57600 baud rate by pressing Shift f or at 115200 baud rate by pressing Shift d.. ################################################################# Change your baudrate to 9600 bps and power cycle the switch ! 476 Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 315393-J. Make sure that the new binary firmware file is available on the computer.0.2. NOTE – Although slower. protocol: 1K XMODEM It will take about 15 minutes for the transfer to complete. Power off the switch. Select <Transfer-Send File> and choose the following: file: For example. XMODEM will work too if you choose not to use 1K MODEM.Alteon OS 22.PPCBoot 2.. You should see the following sample log on your screen: Alteon Application Switch . Press <Enter> on the key board of the PC that is connected to the console port of the switch. CAUTION—Do not power off the switch until you see the message: “Change your baud rate to 9600 bps and power cycle switch”. 9..

Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header adherent to the IP specification (for example. TCP. the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s). UDP. and so on. A higher number will win out for master designation. because it translates the destination IP address from the Virtual Server IP address. to that of one of the real servers. In general. January 2005 477 . The destination port (application socket: for example. ICMP. half NAT is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another. network address translation can be said to have taken place. Default is 100. Virtual server-based load balancing uses half NAT by design. The protocol of a frame. or a filter. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 254. OSPF. Preemption Priority Proto (Protocol) Real Server Group 315393-J. In VRRP. Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another. In VRRP. preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority.) A group of real servers that are associated with a Virtual Server IP address. http-80/https-443/DNS-53) Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another address.Glossary DIP (Destination IP Address) Dport (Destination Port) NAT (Network Address Translation) The destination IP address of a frame. No NAT is when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated.

Instead. “Transparently” means that requests are not specifically destined for a Virtual Server IP address that the switch owns. the destination IP address is not translated to that of one of the real servers. An IP addresses that the switch load balances to when requests are made to a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). The action on a filter can be Allow. HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53). Real Server IP Address. Redirect to a Server Group. or transparent Web cache. spam filter. A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual routers. January 2005 . In redirection-based load balancing. With this type of load balancing.2 Command Reference Redirection or Filter-Based Load Balancing A type of load balancing that operates differently from virtual server-based load balancing. or NAT (translation of either the source IP or destination IP address).0. Filters can be configured to filter on the SIP/Range (via netmask). a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation (with preemption enabled). The source IP address of a frame. You can track the following: Vrs: Virtual Routers in Master Mode (increments priority by 2 for each) Ifs: Active IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch (increments priority by 2 for each) Ports: Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each) l4pts: Active Layer 4 Ports. Deny. Protocol.Alteon OS 22. Tracking can be very valuable in an active/active configuration. In VRRP. redirection-based load balancing is designed to load balance devices that normally operate transparently in your network—such as a firewall. This filter intercepts traffic based on certain IP header criteria and load balances it. client or server designation (increments priority by 2 for each reals: healthy real servers (increments by 2 for each healthy real server) hsrp: HSRP announcements heard on a client designated port (increments by 10 for each) An IP address that the switch owns and uses to load balance particular service requests (like HTTP) to other servers. Therefore. requests are transparently intercepted and “redirected” to a server group. DIP/Range (via netmask). a filter is configured in the switch. RIP (Real Server) SIP (Source IP Address) SPort (Source Port) Tracking The source port (application socket: for example. VIP (Virtual Server IP Address) VIR (Virtual Interface Router) 478 Glossary 315393-J. SPort/Range or DPort/Range.

Should the master stop advertising. This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch is assigned. If there is more than one VLAN defined on the Alteon Application Switch. A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco's proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol. and forwards the frame to the server for which it is now destined. are load balanced to a real server contained in the group associated with the VIP. as well as IP interfaces.2 Command Reference Virtual Router A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP. then the VRRP broadcasts will only be sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member. If you have a VRRP address that two switches are sharing. the two switches would fight for ownership of the Virtual Server IP address. These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an address such as 224. refer to RFC 2338. a server would receive the frame that was destined for it's MAC address.0. January 2005 Glossary 479 . the backup will take over ownership of the VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. The server would then drop the frame. then the VRID number needs to be identical on both switches so each virtual router on each switch knows whom to share with. a value between 1 and 255 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address. since the packet would have the DIP of the VIP and not that of the server (RIP). as defined in RFC 2338. In VRRP. This process of replacing the destination IP (VIP) with one of the real server addresses is called half NAT. The master is always advertising via the broadcasts. Network address translation is done back and forth. If they didn’t. Frames come to the switch destined for the VIP. one switch is considered the master and the other the backup. which is owned by the switch. as requests come and go.Alteon OS 22. The switch announces this change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP. and advertisements. VSR is Alteon WebSystems’ proprietary extension to the VRRP specification. Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or listening for advertisements. Virtual Server Load Balancing VRID (Virtual Router Identifier) VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol) VSR (Virtual Server Router) 315393-J. The backup switch is always listening for the broadcasts. If the frames were not half NAT'ed to the address of one of the RIPs. updates the relevant checksums. forcing the packet up to Layer 3. Requests destined for a Virtual Server IP address (VIP).18. For a more detailed description. and the ARP tables in the devices around them would have two ARP entries with the same IP address but different MAC addresses. by the switch.0. A VRRP address that is a shared Virtual Server IP address. The VRRP MAC address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-{VRID}. The switch then replaces the VIP and with one of the real server IP addresses (RIP's). One virtual router is associated with an IP interface. All IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch must be in a VLAN. With VRRP. The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that is always available.0. If the backup switch didn't do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network. Classic load balancing. The switches must be able to share Virtual Server IP addresses.

Alteon OS 22.2 Command Reference 480 Glossary 315393-J. January 2005 .0.

................ 188 active IP interface .......... 33 port speed.......................................... 49 [ ]......................... 453 administrator account ..................... 422 (SLB real server group option) content ........ 358 within real server groups ....................................................................... 344 active port VLAN ................................................................................................ 234............ 230........................................................................ 32... 281 481 315393-J............................. 359................................................ 229 ASCII terminal ................ 262 advertisement of virtual IP addresses ....................................................................................... 365 / command ............................................................................................................................................................ 276 setup..... 312 aspath . 52 access control system .... 344 active switch configuration gtcfg .................................................... January 2005 ............................................ 441 active configuration block ........................ 475 3000 series.................... 274........... 32 link... 400 addr ARP entries.............. 93 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) address list ........................... 20 autoconfiguration duplex mode .......................... saving and loading configuration ............... 386 filter states................................................... 453 IP route tag ...................... 365 backup configuration block .............. 312 autonomous system filter path action ......... 259 action (SLB filtering option) .......... 354 active switch................. 354 add SLB port option ............. 229 applying configuration changes . 32 enable/disable on port ........................................ 354 restoring .................................................. 279 contracts ..................................... 268................................ 17 admpw (system option) ................................................... 32....... 24................................................. 280 bandwidth management contract precedence value ... 33 autonomous system filter action ........................................ 314 aging STP bridge option .............................. 173.................................................... 86 application redirection .. 354 ptcfg ................................................................................................................................ 312 as ............ 230............................................... 282 bandwidth management contract configuration .............................................................................. 447 active FTP SLB parsing statistics ..... 291 STP information ............ 32 auto-negotiation ................................................................................................................................ 27 B backup SLB real server group option ............................ 272.......... 447 backup server activations (SLB statistics) ................ 312 Numerics 1K XModem ................. 195 bandwidth management configuration ....................................................... 386 activating optional software ...................... 344 active Layer 4 processing .......................................... 364 apply (global command) .............. 111 filters ..................................................................Index Symbols (MD5) ............... 269 A abbreviating commands (CLI) ........

......... 52 482 Index 315393-J.. 456 Cisco Ether Channel ......377 BLOCKING (port state)...........................................................................................327 router hops.......................285 hard bandwidth limit .................................................................................................................324 eBGP .................... 49 shortcuts .........440 BPDU....93 keep-alive time ..............................475..............................................................327 IP address...........................172............................................................................................................................. 200 history statistics ..........................................................332 Border Gateway Protocol ................. 297 broadcast IP address ...................................................................289 bridge priority ................ border router ..................................................... 201 contract statistics...................................... 52 conventions used in this manual .............................. 399 command (help) ..........................324 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) operations-level options .......................................................... 19 to 25...................................................................................................285 reserve limit ..............326 IP route tag ..................... bridge parameter menu........325 peer configuration ................................... 292 clear ARP entries ........19 BGP configuration.........................................................................................Alteon OS 22.................284 buffer limit ..................20 serial download ..... January 2005 ...324 in route ................324 iBGP......................................................................... 49 Command-Line Interface (CLI) ..........................290 broadcast IP route tag ...................................... 199 C capture dump information to a file....................... 454 clearing SLB statistics ..............328 remote autonomous system .............................. 19 BWM contract rate statistics................ See Bridge Protocol Data Unit................................... 199 switch processor contract statistics ......... 93 IP route type ...............285 bandwidth management statistics ...........................................................................................................93 configuration.......443 BOOTP ......................................................................................................................................................................................284 soft bandwidth limit ............................................................ 92 broadcast domains ............................327 binary .............................................................................................................................326 redistribution configuration ............... 457 FDB entry ................................................21 setup (enable/disable) ...0.............................................................. 194 binding table ................. 476 BBI ....284 underlimit TOS ............................... 196 client traffic processing ........... 27...........327 peer ..........................30 system option ...86 Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) ................86 STP transmission frequency .........................................476 binding failure .................... 52 stacking ....................................... 17 global commands .86 boot options menu ................................................................................................................................ 47 commands abbreviations ......... 453 dump information ........... 199 switch processor rate contract statistics ..........................................................................198 banner (system option).......................475 binary firmware image .....................284 over the limit TOS ....... 203 port ...............................232 bootstrap protocol .......290 Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters ................................................ 452 routing table .....2 Command Reference Bandwidth Management options operations-level options ...................................232 baud rate console connection . for STP ............................................... 36 Browser-Based Interface ..........439 bandwidth management policy configuration .................. 52 tab completion ............................................................

..... 229 Fast Ethernet ...................................... January 2005 Index 483 ............................... 271.................. 262 operating mode ........................ 270 cost STP information ....... 229 default gateway interval.................................... 301 VLAN tagging ................... 267................................ 173....................................................... 90 interval...................... 194 D date setup........................................................... 240....................... viewing changes ............................. 270............ 195 CPU statistics ............................. 476 content SLB real server group option ............... 276 port link speed .........................0..................... 402 dmask destination mask for filtering ........................ 211 CPU utilization .... 266..................... 306 DISABLED (port state) ........................................................................ 452 deny (filtering) ..................... 24 delete FDB entry . 447 configuration menu ......................................................................... 173. 25 Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) setting update interval ......................... 229 setup ........................................................................... 301 TACACS+ .............................................................................................. 266.................... 302 default gateway IP address .......... 353 switch IP address ............................................ 347 round robin................ 274...................... 271......................................................................... 377 console port communication settings ................. 172.. 449 default gateway information ............... bandwidth management ................. 275 VRRP ...... 306 save changes .. 387 direct (IP route type) ....... 272 IP static route .............. 270... 20 connecting ....... 273.......... 21 connection timeout (Real Server Menu option) ................ 333 configuration block active ............................ 211 cur (system option) ................... 20 serial download settings ................................... 86 disconnect idle timeout . 365 contracts.............. 276 port mirroring .................... 475..... 243 current bindings . 457 315393-J............... 292 counters................... 86 STP port option.................................................................... 271.................................... 160 Domain Name System (DNS) health checks ..... 268...................... 353 setup command ........................ 444 dropped frames (No Server Available) counter .... 368 downloading software ................................................................................... 262 apply changes .............. 447 factory .. 268............... ........................... 387 DNS statistics . 195 dump configuration command .................................................. 313 connecting via console ............................... 92 directed broadcasts.. 276 Gigabit Ethernet ........................................................................ for health checks ................Alteon OS 22........... 243 debugging .... 270............ load balancing for ...................................... 30 system option . 95 diff (global) command........................................................... 20 via Telnet.................................................... 268........... 302 metrics ......... 353 maintenance ............................................................... 209......................................... 447 selection ........... for health checks........................................ 232 daylight savings time ........................... 275 VLAN IP interface ......................... 447 backup...... 353 effect on Spanning-Tree Protocol ........................................................ 292 route cache.............2 Command Reference configuration administrator password ........................................................... 227 configuring routing information protocol ............. 266 flow control ........... 280 copper ports ............ 240 user password ..................................... 449 state information .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 302 dump command .......................................... 261 view changes............. 229 VLAN default (PVID) ............................................................................ 229 dip (destination IP address for filtering) ........... 209................................................................... 304 Layer 4 administrator password . 278 port trunking ..................... 272.... 195 designated port....................... 347 default password ....... No Server Available (dropped frames) ...................

....................................Alteon OS 22................. 338....... retries ....................................292 F factory configuration block ..................39 emulation software ...................... configuring ports for ................ January 2005 ...........................................................................189 full-duplex ...................................306 forwarding database (FDB) .............................................................................. 346 use with VRRP ..................272 File Transfer Protocol ................ 423 SNMP ..... 174 grace graceful real server failure ......................... 32 hash metric ....... 272 global commands........... 49 host routes ........................ 177 global SLB statistics .....93 flag field................. 266...95 flow control ................181 filtered (denied) frames ............................ 338 VRRP priority increment value .................................................................................32 link status ............................................................................. 119 configuring ...........................................................454 G gig (Port Menu option) .............. 27 to 43 fixed IP route tag ................................................... 344 hot-standby failover .......................... 314 Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) use with VLAN-tagged environment ..................................................................................................... 270............................... 270........................... 274.........78 Forwarding Database Menu................ 368 redirection (rport) ............................451 forwarding state (FWD) ............................................................ SLB ...............387 Final Steps.... 33 forwarding configuration IP forwarding configuration ...... 272 Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link ......32 fwd (STP bridge option) ............................................................................. 25..................................................32................. 270........ 119 setup ................ 367 health checks.......................86 H half-duplex ....................... 271.. 346 Hot Standby Router VLAN (HSRV) use with VRRP .........................417 FDB statistics .......................... 302 script ......................................................................... 344 VRRP priority increment value ............................ 242 Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) ....452 Forwarding Database Information Menu ..............................................................................................189 FTP SLB statistics dump ........ 426 hello STP information .......................................................... 86. 369.............25................... 28 Fast Ethernet Physical Link .......475 EtherChannel as used with port trunking .....................................79................................0.... 110 parameters for most protocols ... 367 layer information ...................................................................... 19 hprompt system option ........368 FTP SLB maintenance statistics.........................268.................... 195 filters IP address ranges .........2 Command Reference duplex mode ............................... 69..............173.....266 fastage ..32 dynamic routes .............................290 FwdDel (forward delay)......... 266....................................54...................... 354 E EMS.................................................................................449 delete entry ..... 266................................... 342 HP-OpenView ................. 242 group ............. 232 HSRP.................................................. 276 setup ...............266 Fast Ethernet....................Alteon EMS ........................... 180 gtcfg (TFTP load command) ............................ 425 WAP ........ 49 global SLB maintenance statistics .. 347 Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) priority increment value for L4 client ports ....................................................................................................... 417 Greenwich .. 484 Index 315393-J............................................. 360 default gateway interval.........187 filter statistics ...................................................................... 272 Gigabit Ethernet configuration ............................................... 370 health check types......38 first-time configuration ........54............................................... number of failed health checks ...... See Hot Standby Router Protocol.............447 factory default configuration ................................. 386 retry................ 86 help ........................................... 302 IDSLB................................................................................... bridge port ........145 fiber optic ports ..... 87 FTP server health checks ... 27.........

............................................................. 444 software............................................ 307 log syslog messages ............................................................................... 69............... 35......................... 302 filter ranges ............................. January 2005 Index 485 .......... 21 configuring default gateway ............................................. 262 Layer 4 administrator account......................... 119 linkt (SNMP option) ........................................ 422 IP interfaces ......................................................................... 53 Interface change stats .................... 90 local (IP route type) ... 94 BOOTP .. 276 link status........ 454 IP routing .. 93 IP Static Route Menu ...................................................... 330 directed broadcasts ...........................................................................1d Spanning-Tree Protocol ..................................................... See Hot Standby Router Protocol............. 54.................. 422 LEARNING (port state) ................................................ 344 configuring address .............. 330 IP Route Manipulation Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 35 local route cache ranges ........................................ 87 Information Menu .......................... 86 least connections (SLB Real Server metric) ...................... 21 IP address mask for SLB ............. 301 active ....................... 92 information ....... 24 Layer 4 processing active.................................. 306 IP forwarding information ....................... HTTP application health checks ............... 90 IP route tag ..................................................................... 92 local network for route caching ..... 35 ARP information .............................................. 54 command ................................................................. 259 http ............. 69.................................... 367..................... 172..................................... 368 imask (IP address mask) ....................................................... 416 IP configuration via setup ...... 304 IP statistics ................................................................ 301 L l4apw (L4 administrator system option) ...................................................................2 Command Reference HSRV.......... 402 system option ........................... 367 IEEE standards 802...................................................................... 119 duplex mode .............................. 233 logical segment..... 370 licence certificate .............................................................................. 441 license password ............. 93 priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP .... 92 Information Trunk Group Information........................ 446 IMAP server health checks ...................................... 195 indirect (IP route type) ... 90..... 306 local route cache IP address ranges for............................................................ 183 layer7 redirection statistics ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 268....... 163 IP address ..................... 161 idle timeout overview. configuring ...............0.............................. selecting ................................... 416 incorrect VIPs (statistic) ............. 387 IP interface ........................... 119 port speed............... 182 LDAP version .................................. 344 layer 7 SLB maintenance statistics ............................................................ 246 LISTENING (port state) .. 85......... 271......... 288 image downloading ......... 35 IP forwarding ................................................................. 441 link speed.............. 307 Telnet ........... 346 IP network filter configuration ........................... 194 incorrect Vports (dropped frames counter) .......................................................... 90 IP Information Menu ............................... 35 tag parameters .................. 54........................................ 155 IP subnet mask ................... 90 lnet (routing option) ........... 297 I ICMP statistics ........................................................................ 184 layer 7 SLB string statistics ............. 86 lmask (routing option) ...................... 173. 301 configuring VLANs ...................... 315393-J.... 104 IP interface ............... 35 IP subnets VLANs ...... 119 Link Status Information ................... See IP subnets....................................Alteon OS 22..... 259 HTTP health checks on any port (aphttp) . 154 interface statistics .............. 368 redirects (Global SLB option) ......................................... 308 IP port configuration ........................................................ 306 local networks for route caching .................. 25 IDSLB health checks .

.....................55.......... 320 dead........... N nbr change statistics.........................316 MD5 cryptographic authentication ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 433 operations-level BGP options ............86 mcon (maximum connections) .................. 317 authentication key ...............................364 metrics..............................370 minimum misses (SLB real server metric) ................416 mnet management traffic IP address for SLB ........ See Management Processor................................................................................................. 365 MD5 authentication key ............................................................................................................21 Main Menu ..................................320 media access control.........449 Management Processor (MP).......17 martian IP route tag (filtered) .. multicast IP route type .......... 442 OSPF area types .......................... 243 NTP time zone .........172. 151 hello...416 monitor port.............................. 292 mxage (STP bridge option) ...................................... 54.455 mmask IP address mask for SLB ....................... 195..........367... 439 operations-level IP options .....................................................................Alteon OS 22........................................... 232 NTP synchronization ............................................................................ metric SLB real server group option........... 451 notice ............................................................... 370 Miscellaneous Debug Menu ......................25 summary .................................................92 mask IP interface subnet address ........... 242 switch location ............... configuring ......19 non TCP/IP frames ........... 321 export ............................................ 151 global . 271............47 Command-Line Interface (CLI) .................................................................................................................................................................................. See MAC address.....2 Command Reference M MAC (media access control) address............ 49 operating mode. 440 Operations-Level Port Options . 194 486 Index 315393-J........ January 2005 ............. 315 cost of the selected path ......................... 127 activating ... 322 dead................. 441...... 435 operations-level SLB options ............................................................. health parameter of a hello packet .. 323 fixed routes .............290 O octet counters .............173........153 Network Address Translation (NAT) filter action ........................................... 315. 436 operations-level VRRP options ........ 439 optional software ................. SLB ... 179 online help ....317 MD5 key ..............................301 MaxAge (STP information) ..................................... 268.............206 MP........ 94.........48 Maintenance Menu ............... 320 cost value of the host ............................... 276 operations menu ............................... 325 general ..................0...................................................................................................... 78.... authentication parameter of a hello packet ............ 98................................................386 network management ......455 display MAC address . 320 configuration ..........................................87...........92 multi-links between switches using port trunking.... 315 ospf area index ..............................................................278 mp packet .93 IP route type (filtered out) ........... 440 operations-level BWM options .................. declaring a silent router to be down ............................................................... 441 removing ...................................................55 manual style conventions ....

.. 361 Index 487 199 P panic command ................................................... 318 stub area .. 317 transit delay ............. 342 priority virtual router .. 377 ping ................................. 32 setup. 449 parameters tag ........ 86 RJ-45... 345 passwords .......................................... 322 host routes ........... 457 switch (and Maintenance Menu option) ...............................................................Alteon OS 22....... See flow control..................................................................................... 99 OSPF General Information ............................................................... 50............................................. 173........................................................................ 277 information ..................... 278 Port number .............................................. 239 proxies IP address translation ........ 119 auto-sense .................. 111 STP port priority ............................... 317 summary range configuration .............. 88 priority......... 24 L4 administrator account ..................................... 150 overflow server activations ......................... 292 VLAN ID................................................................................... 265 SLB state information ........................................... 24 default ............................... 272 port mirroring configuration .......... 32 port states UNK (unknown) . 198 port configuration ........................................................... 321 virtual neighbor... 31 disabling (temporarily)......................................... Port Menu configuration options ...... 314 POP3 server health checks........... 336................. 360 321 persistent bindings real server ............. 316 interface ... 317 virtual link ................................................................................................................ 323 spf.. 24 VRRP authentication ........................................ 24 user account ................................................ 119 port speed ............................................................................................ 315 redistribution menu .... 265 port flow control............... 319 link state database ... 292 port trunking configuration .................................................................................. 266 configuring Gigabit Ethernet (gig) ........................................................ 368 port bandwidth management switch processor statistics switch port contract statistics menu.................... 79 port trunking description ................................. as used with split horizon ................................................... 316 Not-So-Stubby Area ... router ID ............................. 337 virtual router ................................... 188 Password user access control .... 270......................................... 54............................... 316 route redistribution configuration ............................ 292 ports configuration . 359 PIP ........................................ 93 type.................................................................................................................. 321 OSPF Database Information ................................................................................................ 195 overflow servers ...... 316 MD5 authentication key...... 430 poisoned reverse................ 320 range number ................. 261 password administrator account .. 315 virtual link configuration ... 98 OSPF Information Route Codes ....................................................................... 78......... 102 OSPF statistics ......................................0................ 69................................................... 92 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics ................................................................................................... January 2005 .... 318 transit area ................................................................ 120 IP status .......................................... 23 315393-J........ 315 interface configuration ................ 100 OSPF Information ........................... 320 type................................ 317 priority value of the switch interface................................ 120 preemption assuming VRRP master routing authority ............ 266........ shortest path first ........................................... 292 prisrv primary radius server ......................................................................................................... 54............................2 Command Reference host entry configuration .... 101 OSPF general ............................. 342 priority (STP port option) .................................................... 270 configuring Fast Ethernet ...... 90 membership of the VLAN ............................................................................................................

.................................. 297 segmentation.................175 real server group options add .........................................................................302 rip IP route tag ........................50 round robin as used in gateway load balancing .......................................................... January 2005 ................................. 274......79 referenced port .............. rmkey ......................................................................358 real servers backup . 423 scriptable health checks configuration . 157 router hops ........................................................... 229 noback option ..............95 remote monitoring on the port (rmon) ................................364 statistics ......................................... 457 receive flow control 32.......50 R RADIUS server authentication ............................... 370 route cache configuration ............................................. 306 route statistics .................................................................... 276........ 313 rport SLB virtual server option .............................................................................................................................................................................................................354 PVID (port VLAN ID).................435 remote site servers ................................ 447 script health checks ..................366 real server group SLB configuration.............................................0...................................... 367.................. 32................. 359 488 Index 315393-J. 33.......................180 real server groups combining servers into .................................449 restarting switch setup .............................. 363 operations-level options ...................... 152 Q quiet (screen display option) .......54..............................111 proxy IP address (PIP) configuration .................... segments..............................364 real server group statistics ..............245 real server statistics ............... 327 routing information protocol configuration ................................ 190 rx flow control ...... 313 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ............................................................ 314 poisoned reverse ............... See IP subnets................................................................................................................................................... 314 split horizon .............................................................................................................110 reboot ......................................... 376 RTSP SLB statistics .. 93 options .................... 239 Secure Shell .............365 priority increment value (reals) for VRRP ...................... See IP subnets............................................... 33 Rx/Tx statistics.. See Routing Information Protocol............2 Command Reference proxy IP address (PIP) .............368 read community string (SNMP option) . 268..................................................179 real server global SLB statistics ................ 475 Server Load Balancing IDS .... 314 version 1 parameters..449............................... 239 secsrv secondary radius server ...................... 238 security VLANs............239 retry health checks for default gateway ......................Alteon OS 22...................... 20 serial download ...442 reset key combination .....386 reference ports ............... 230 save command..430 ptcfg (TFTP save command) ................. 271......29 retries radius server ......442 S save (global command) .............................................................................. serial cable . 277 redir (SLB filtering option) .................................. 436 real server weights ............................ 347 roundrobin SLB Real Server metric ...............................................................................................93 RIP......................180 real server SLB configuration .............. 120 pwd ................................................................361 removing optional software ... 423 secret radius server ......346 SLB state information .........................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ 368 wtls ...... 365 health checking ................. 399 health check .................... 364 SLB real server option backup .......................... 29 Spanning-Tree Protocol .................................................................................. 359 slowage ...................................................................................... 359 restr (restore) SLB real server UDP option ............................................ 232 SMTP server health checks ............................................................ 110 SLB layer7 statistics .. 387 SLB filtering option action ........................................... 367 ftp ........................................ server port mapping ............................ 360 session identifier ........................... 425 SNMP health checks ..................................... 367 dns .................................................................................................................................................0........................................................... 34 VLAN tagging ..................................... 34 VLAN port numbers ....................................................... 368 smtp ............................ 471 SNMP health check configuration .............................. 111 server traffic processing ....... 370 port options ..... 33 VLANs ............................... 32..................................... 359 name........................................................................................................................... 31 starting ................... 368 snap traces buffer ................ 30 duplex mode ............................ 369 SLB real server group option application health checking ....... 367 imap ........................................................................................... 32.......................................... 33 port speed ..... 34 SFD statistics mp specific ............ 30 system time ............ 360 maxcon (maximum connections) .................... 31 port flow control ............................................................... 387 smtp .... 218 186......................... configuration .......................................... 360 retry ........ 25....................................................................... 368 tcp .................... 353 setup command... 353 setup facility ............................ 386 SLB Information ........................... 455 SNMP ................. alias for each real server ........... 369 sslh.... 182 SLB real server group health checks arp........................................................................................................ 368 http................................................................................................................................................................. 209 SFP GBIC ports .................... 365 metric ........................................................ 368 wsp . 399 server load balancing configuration options .................................................................... 28 stopping........................................................... 35 IP subnet mask .......... 187...................... 272 shortcuts (CLI) ................................................................................................................ 270 SIP (source IP address for filtering) .. 19 menu options ................................... 27 BOOTP ............... 367 metrics .... 32 IP configuration ............. 399 Session Binding Table ........ 30 VLAN name ............. 369 radius ................ 367 udpdns . 360 RIP..................................... 32 restarting ................ 367 SNMP ...........Alteon OS 22............................................................................................................................... 245 set and get access ................................... 359 submac .................... January 2005 Index 489 .................... 369 SNMP statistics ........................................ 356 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics Menu ............... 33 port configuration ......................... real server IP address ......... 19................................................ 245 SNMP Agent ................. 130 health checks ................................................................................ 425 HP-OpenView ............ 194 315393-J......................... 373 setup configuration ...............................................................................................2 Command Reference server load balancing client traffic processing........................ 367 health check types .... 35 port auto-negotiation mode .................................. 29 system date ............................................................................................................... 360 intr (interval) ..................................................................................... 400 server traffic processing ............................................................... 360 weights ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 368 script .... 52 single-mode ports ............................................................................................................................. 417 smask source mask for filtering ................................................... 361 tmout (time out) . 368 ldap ............... 367 icmp .............

.... 232 tnet.............180 management processor ..................................................................................................................... 165........... 21 configuring switches using ............ 451 system options admpw (administrator password) ................................................ 233 system contact (SNMP option) ............................... 240 Telnet support optional setup for Telnet support .................................................. 354 315393-J................ 353 telnet radius server ..... 52 tacacs ....................................................................................... 259 System Maintenance Menu ........418 490 Index sync ......................................................................................... 240..... 354 TFTP server ...............................28 state (STP information) .. 262 login banner .........................................................................448 Switch Processor (SP).......................... client system.........205 Statistics Menu .............186 stacking commands (CLI) ................................................................29 subnet address maskconfiguration IP subnet address .. 39 terminal emulation ........................................................ 17 TFTP ....................87.................................... 20 text conventions ..............................................................31 switch reset effect ............................... 232 cur (current system parameters) .......................................................................... 240 TACACS+ .................................. 445 PUT and GET commands ..............................288 Spanning-Tree Protocol ...................... current ......................................................................................................................93 static route rem .........................86.................................................................. 243 date .................314 SSL ......................................................................................................................301 switch resetting ..........................441 SYN attack detection configuration .....................................................448 split horizon......314 statis route add ...............................................52 starting switch setup ..................... 208 Telnet ...................... 21 BOOTP ............................................................................................................................................................290 bridge priority ................................................................................................................301 subnet mask ..304 statistics group .....................................................Alteon OS 22.......................................................................................292 port priority option..........................................................304 static routes Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ..............................................................................86 state information............. 436 syslog system host log configuration ..................291 bridge parameters .................... 261 system parameters................ 259 l4apw (Layer 4 administrator password) ................. 290 setup (on/off) ..........................................444 SP specific statistics .......................... 240.......2 Command Reference SNMP Support optional setup for SNMP support ............................. 413..... 55 location (SNMP option) ..... 436 synchronization VRRP switch........ 360 health checks ..........................................................................................................455 swkey .................................. 53................. 229 bridge aging option ................................... 232 HTTP access ... 262 BOOTP ................................................35 IP interface ............................210 spanning tree configuration......................0... January 2005 ................................... 373 health checking using .................................................129 stopping switch setup......35 subnets ............................................................................. 245 system access control configuration........................................................................................................441 software image ............377 static IP route tag ......... 240 TCP fragments ..55 license ..................................455 display trace buffer ...................................... 243 T tab completion (CLI) .................... 245 date and time .......................................... 259 tnport ...........................39 software image file and version ........292 root bridge .........................377 secure socket layer statistics ..............................................86 port cost option ...... 385 TCP statistics ................................................ 259 usrpw (user password) ............................................. 232 hprompt ........ 232 time................................................. 368 source and destination ports...............................

.............. 50 Tracking VRRP ............................................... 111 virtual router description . 154 time-to-live.................. 344 HSRP priority increment value ............................................. DNS response (global SLB menu option) V verbose ..................................... 239 timeouts idle connection . 167 unknown (UNK) port state .................................. 326..... 92 typographic conventions............................................................... 336.................. 271......................... 341 virtual router group priority tracking ................. 346 virtual server global SLB statistics ................................ 385 UDP statistics ..................................................... 33 407 tnet system option ..... 32............ 314 IP route tag ................... manual ................................................... 439 password. 270................... 172............... 344 HSRV priority increment value ...2 Command Reference time setup .................. 24 usrpw (system option) . 87 ttl (time to live.....................Alteon OS 22............................... 458 upgrade........ 33.......................... 338.................................................................................... 232 timeout radius server ......... 267................................................... 181 virtual servers ................. 335 priority tracking options ................ 367 SLB state information ........................................... 455 Switch Processor ............................................. 344 priority..... 194 server status using ............................. 50 vip advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes ......................... switch software ............................................................. 79 Unscheduled System Dump ..................... 343 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) authentication parameters for IP interfaces ..... 337 virtual router group VRRP priority tracking ... 208 UDP datagrams ..... 297 VLAN tagging port configuration............................. 360 source and destination ports ......................... 111 statistics ... 346 HSRV........ 268........................... when used for NAT ................................................... 25 timers kickoff....... 386 Trunk Group Information ....... 345 priority election for the virtual router .......................................................... 334 master mode .......... 259 tnport system option ............................... 277 transparent proxies..................0................................................. 30 system option .......... 401 tx flow control............................................... 181 VLAN active port ........ 455 traceroute.............................. 276.... 175 virtual server SLB statistics ................ 111 virtual port state.......................................................................................................................... 342 tracking criteria ................................................. 335............................................................................................... 417 trace buffer .... 338 master preemption (preem) ........................................ 33 type of area ospf............................... 456 315393-J............................................................................... 344 configuration ........................................................... 242 U UCB statistics ............. 345 group options (prio) ................ SLB information about ................ 273.......................... 444 URL for health checks ................................ 347 increasing priority level of ................................ 17 tzone ...... global SLB menu option) ........................................................................... authentication ......................................... 342 operations-level options ........................... 259 TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol) .......... 337 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration333 virtual router sharing ......... 342 virtual routers HSRP failover .............. 317 type parameters ............................. 342 virtual router group configuration ............. 93 virtual IP address (VIP) ........... 298 setup............................................... 340 incrementing VRRP instance ...... 339 transmit flow control32................................... 275 port restrictions ..................................... 342 master preemption (prio) ..................... 111 user account .. 336 priority increment values (vrs) for VRRP .. 261 Uuencode Flash Dump ...................................................................... January 2005 Index 491 ............ 274...........................................................................................................

....................................... January 2005 ...................34 port membership..............345 master advertisements .............335......................................... 426 wtlsprt ......................................297 setting default number (PVID) ...................................................................................................266.......450 web-based management interface.....................................Alteon OS 22.....................................88 VRID (virtual router ID) ......... 54. 272.................................425...............................................................................2 Command Reference VLANs .. 88 name setup...335 tracking ......................................................159 X XModem ................................................................346 write community string (SNMP option) .19 weights for SLB real servers ....33...288 name .......34 security .............................34 Spanning-Tree Protocol ..342 VRRP statistics .........78..................................................................................................288 tagging ...............105 VRRP master advertisements time interval .................................................. 88 port numbers ................78........................................245 wspport WAP health check ...................................... 475 275 W WAP health checks ........................425........94 broadcast domains ......... 342 VRRP interface configuration ............. 120........35 ARP entry information ...............................................297 information ......................... 426 wtlsprt WAP health check ...........371 setting virtual router priority values .....425...426 WAP SLB statistics ............... 298 VLAN Number ................................426 WAP health check wspport . 427 492 Index 315393-J.......................336 VRRP Information ....36 multiple spanning trees ....0...................................................................................................................346 virtual router sharing ............................................................335. 270..............................................88 interface ..................................................... 339 tracking configuration ...........................425................................... 427 WAP health check configuration .. setup ...............................192 watchdog timer .............................................